Skip to main content

Full text of "The foundation of British East Africa"

See other formats


THE    FOUNDATION    OF    BRITISH 
EAST    AFRICA 


I 


HE    FOUNDATION    OF 
BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

By  J.  W.  Gregory,  D.Sc 


PROFESSOR   OF   GEOLOGY    IN   THE    UNIVERSITY 

OF    MELBOURNE,    AUTHOR   OF    "  THE 

GREAT    RIFT   VALLEY" 


^ 


LONDON 

HORACE   MARSHALL   &   SON 

TEMPLE    HOUSE,   E.C 

1 901 


Butler  &  Tanner, 

The  Selwood  Printing  Works, 

Frome,  and  London. 


Preface 

BRITISH  East  Africa  has  a  threefold  history, 
geographical,  political  and  administrative, 
dealing  respectively  with  the  story  of  its 
exploration,  the  struggle  for  its  possession  and  the 
beginning  of  its  commercial  development.  These  three 
histories  relate  to  such  different  subjects  that  it  is  not 
easy  to  combine  them  into  a  connected  story  ;  but  I 
have  tried  to  tell  as  much  of  each  as  is  necessary  to 
explain  the  adventurous  history  of  British  East  Africa 
from  the  voyages  of  the  ancient  merchants  and  Arab 
traders  to  the  establishment  of  British  rule. 

Among  the  modern  expeditions  I  have  only  de- 
scribed those  which  have  had  an  important  influence 
on  the  founding  of  British  East  Africa.  The  story  of 
the  expeditions  which  mapped  the  rivers,  explored  the 
branch  roads,  filled  in  the  topographical  details  and 
determined  the  main  features  in  the  natural  history  and 
geology  of  the  country,  as  well  as  of  the  journeys  of 

1CSCCG3  * 


vi  PREFACE 

the  sportsmen  who  have  opened  up  new  ground,  be- 
longs to  the  geographical  history  of  East  Africa.  It  will 
record  the  discoveries  of,  amongst  others,  Ainsworth, 
Ansorge,  Austin,  Chanler,  Delamere,  Dundas,  Hall, 
Hobley,  von  Hohnel,  Mackinder,  Moore,  Neumann, 
Pigott,  Scott-ElHot,  Donaldson  Smith,  Eric  Smith, 
Captain  Smith,  and  the  important  contributions  of  the 
missionaries  to  our  knowledge  of  the  geography  and 
ethnography. 

I  have  however  included  a  sketch  of  the  early  history 
of  British  East  Africa  ;  for  it  was  the  work  of  the 
classical  traders  whose  stories  threw  over  the  country 
the  glamour  of  myth  and  mystery,  and  of  the  mediaeval 
Portuguese  travellers  who  showed  its  commercial  value 
to  Europe  as  a  station  on  the  route  to  India,  that  gave 
the  country  its  fascination  to  the  modern  missionaries 
and  geographical  pioneers  ;  and  in  turn  it  was  their 
account  of  the  pathos  of  native  life  and  the  horrors 
of  the  slave  trade  which  inspired  the  political  tra- 
vellers whose  work  led  to  the  establishment  of  British 
rule. 

I  have  tried  to  tell  the  principal  events  in  the  three 
chief  stages  in  the  history  of  the  country  closing  with 
the  appointment  in  1899  of  Sir  Harry  Johnston  as 
Commissioner  of  Uganda.  From  his  work  in  Uganda 
great  things  were  expected,  for  it  is  generally  under- 


PREFACE  vii 

stood  that  he  was  sent  out  primarily  as  an  African 
expert  to  advise  as  to  the  future  administration  of  the 
country.  This  administration  has  been  marked  by  some 
important  reforms,  but  the  test  of  his  work  will  be  his 
final  report  as  to  the  requirements  and  resources  of  the 
country. 

Since  the  manuscript  was  concluded,  news  of  the 
mutiny  in  Somaliland  and  the  deplorable  death  of 
Mr.  Jenner,  whose  tact  and  integrity  as  chief  judge 
at  Mombasa  did  so  much  to  establish  native  faith  in 
British  justice,  and  the  rebellion  in  Nandi  show  that 
British  East  Africa  has  not  yet  secured  the  peace  which 
is  essential  to  that  growth  of  population  which  is  the 
country's  greatest  need. 

These  wars  are  most  regrettable  from  financial  as 
well  as  other  considerations.  The  government  of  British 
East  Africa  will  for  some  years  inevitably  be  very 
costly.  A  cheap  administration  at  the  present  stage 
must  come  to  evil.  Five  millions  of  pounds  are  being 
spent  on  the  Uganda  railway,  which  will  assuredly 
prove  a  bad  investment  if  money  for  the  development 
of  the  country  be  unwisely  stinted.  A  more  generous 
grant  for  the  investigation  of  the  economic  resources  of 
the  country  is  especially  necessary. 

The  present  heavy  expenditure  in  South  Africa  may 
lead   to   a   reduction   in   the   subsidy   to    British    East 


viii  PREFACE 

Africa  ;  but  no  one  who  knows  the  country  will  doubt 
that  undue  economy  now  will  cost  dearly  in  the  end_ 
The  administration  of  the  adjoining  state  of  German 
East  Africa  in  many  respects  has  set  an  example  that 
might  be  copied  with  advantage. 

As  the  book  is  popular  in  its  scope  I  have  not  bur- 
dened it  with  references.  The  principal  literature  up 
to  1896  is  referred  to  in  my  Great  Rift  Valley  \  after 
that  date  there  is  a  complete  record  in  the  monthly 
summaries  of  literature  by  Dr.  H.  R.  Mill  and  Mr. 
Heawood  in  the  Geographical  Journal.  A  catalogue  of 
the  blue  books  and  other  official  publications  is  given 
in  Messrs.  P.  S.  King  &  Son's  annual  lists. 

In  conclusion  I  have  to  express  my  thanks  to  Mrs. 
Chaplain,  who  owing  to  my  absence  from  England  has 
kindly  seen  the  book  through  the  press  ;  also  to  my 
colleague,  Prof.  Tucker,  for  his  translation  of  the 
passage  on  the  East  Coast  of  Africa  in  the  Periplus^ 
and  for  some  suggestive  notes  thereon. 

J.  W.  Gregory. 

University^  Melbourne. 
May,   1 90 1. 


Contents 

Chapter    I  page 

THE  GEOGRAPHY  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA         .        .        3 

Chapter    II 
THE  NATIVES  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA        ...       17 

Chapter    III 

THE  DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY         .        .      27 
APPENDIX  TO  CHAPTER  III :  ACCOUNT  OF  THE  EAST 
AFRICAN     COAST    IN    "THE     PERIPLUS   OF    THE 
RED  SEA,"  TRANSLATED  BY  PROFESSOR  TUCKER      49 

Chapter   IV 

THE  MOMBASA  MISSIONS $2 

Chapter   V 

THE  QUEST  FOR  THE  NILE  SOURCES      ....       71 

Chapter   VI 

THE  UGANDA  ROAD  AND  THE  TRAVERSE  OF  MASAI- 
LAND  81 


X  CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Chapter   VII 
STANLEY  AND  THE  UGANDA  MISSION     .        .        .        .103 


Chapter   VIII 

THE    BRITISH    EAST    AFRICA    COMPANY    AND    THE 

STRUGGLE  FOR  WITU 123 


Chapter    IX 
THE  MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION         .        .     144 

Chapter   X 

HOW  THE  MISSIONARIES  RETURNED  TO  UGANDA     .     162 

Chapter   XI 
HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA 174 

Chapter   XII 

UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE.        .        .        .199 

Chapter   XIII 
THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA         .        .        .237 


List  of    Illustrations 

SOMALI   TRIBESMEN Frontispiece 

THE   BAOBAB   TREE Facing  p.      8 

IVORY  TRADERS  IN  MASAI   DRESS  ...  ,,20 

DR.    LUDWIG   KRAPF „          54 

MASAI  WARRIORS ,,82 

HENRY   M.   STANLEY,  AT  THE   TIME   OF   HIS 

FIRST   EXPLORATIONS   IN   AFRICA     .         .  „         106 

A  GROUP  OF   UGANDA  NATIVES       ...  ,,112 

ZANZIBAR   NATIVES:    GATHERING   CLOVES  .  ,,         128 

MOMBASA ,,146 

FORT   MOMBASA „         160 

GENERAL  F.  D.  LUGARD ,,176 

THE  UGANDA  RAILWAY:  MAKUPA  BRIDGE.  „  200 
THE     UGANDA     RAILWAY  :     SCENERY    NEAR 

VOI   STATION ,,224 

THE    UGANDA    RAILWAY  :     CLEARING     FOR 

MOMBASA   STATION ,,240 

THE  UGANDA  RAILWAY  :  A  STEEP  GRADIENT  „        248 

MAPS 
SANSON  D' ABBEVILLE'S  MAP  OF  EQUATORIAL 

AFRICA ,48 

MAP   OF    BRITISH  EAST   AFRICA        .         .  At  end  of  volume 


BOOK  I 


Chapter  I 
HE  GEOGRAPHY  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

"Geography  is  three-fourths  of  war." — Von  Moltke. 

THE  British  territories  on  the  mainland  of 
Eastern  Equatorial  Africa  include  about  half 
a  million  square  miles  of  country,  extending 
from  the  shore  of  the  Indian  Ocean  to  the  basin  of  the 
Nile.  This  vast  area,  more  than  four  times  the  size  of 
England  and  Wales,  was  acquired  for  the  Empire  by  a 
company  of  merchants  and  philanthropists,  known  as 
the  British  East  African  Association,  Their  dominions 
were  called  British  East  Africa,  a  name  still  used  in  its 
original  sense  by  geographers,  though  politicians  now 
restrict  it  to  a  part  of  the  eastern  half  of  that  area. 

The  inland  boundaries  of  British  East  Africa,  using 
the  name  in  its  geographical  sense,  are  either  artificial 
or  uncertain.  On  the  south,  the  British  territories  are 
separated  from  German  East  Africa  by  a  line  drawn 
from  the  coast  at  the  port  of  Wanga,  in  a  north-westerly 
direction,  to  the  shore  of  the  Victoria  Nyanza  ;  whence 


4  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

the  boundary  runs  westward,  along  the  first  parallel  of 
south  latitude,  till  it  reaches  the  Congo  Free  State. 
Except  for  a  bend  which  gives  Kilima  Njaro,  the  highest 
of  African  mountains,  to  Germany,  the  southern  frontier 
has  been  drawn  straight  across  the  country  with  diplo- 
matic indifference  to  geographical  features. 

The  north-eastern  frontier  is  formed  by  the  Juba, 
which  makes  a  natural  boundary  up  to  the  confluence 
of  its  chief  head  streams  ;  but  beyond  that  point  it  is 
perhaps  uncertain  which  of  the  branches  is  the  Juba  of 
the  diplomatist. 

The  northern  boundary  is  the  least  definite,  for  Menelik, 
the  "  Emperor  of  Ethiopia,"  claims  dominion  over  large 
portions  of  the  lowlands  to  the  south  and  west  of  the 
Abyssinian  plateau,  although  they  are  included  within 
the  British  sphere. 

West  of  Abyssinia,  British  East  Africa  meets  the  old 
Equatorial  provinces  of  Egypt,  now  under  the  joint  pro- 
tection of  England  and  Egypt ;  but  where  the  English 
sphere  ends  and  the  Anglo-Egyptian  condominion  begins 
is,  as  yet,  a  little  vague. 

So  far  as  the  limits  can  at  present  be  drawn,  British 
East  Africa  extends  in  length  for  some  eight  hundred 
and  forty  miles  from  south-east  to  north-west,  with  an 
average  width  of  five  hundred  and  sixty  miles.  It  thus 
includes  about  five  hundred  thousand  square  miles. 
Politically,  the  country  is  divided  into  three  parts — the 
Uganda   Protectorate,  which  includes  as  much  of  the 


GEOGRAPHY  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA    5 

Nile  Basin  and  the  Great  Rift  Valley  as  falls  within  the 
British  sphere ;  the  British  East  Africa  Protectorate, 
which  extends  from  the  eastern  wall  of  the  Great  Rift 
Valley  to  a  line  ten  miles  west  of  the  Indian  Ocean 
shore ;  and  the  Zanzibar  Protectorate,  which  includes 
the  islands  of  Zanzibar  and  Pemba,  and  a  ten-mile  belt 
along  the  coast.  Geographically  and  historically,  how- 
ever, the  three  divisions  on  the  mainland  are  one,  and 
their  permanent  political  separation  is  improbable. 

Some  knowledge  of  the  physical  geography  of 
British  East  Africa  is  necessary  in  order  to  understand 
its  recent  history,  for  peculiar  geographical  conditions 
have  rendered  its  administration  especially  difficult  and 
interesting.  The  British  colonisation  of  America  and 
Australia  began  with  the  establishment  of  stations  on 
the  coast,  whence  settlements  crept  backward,  step  by 
step,  up  the  chief  river  valleys,  or  along  the  main  trade 
routes  to  the  interior.  The  British  conquest  of  India 
followed  essentially  the  same  plan.  In  British  East 
Africa,  on  the  contrary,  the  Company,  which  had 
undertaken  the  administration  of  the  country,  aban- 
doned the  traditional  British  policy  ;  it  had  no  sooner 
occupied  the  coast  towns  than  it  advanced  inland,  and 
spent  most  of  its  energies  and  capital  in  a  struggle  for 
the  remotest  province  in  its  territories,  only  concerning 
itself  with  the  more  easily  ruled,  intermediate  country, 
in  so  far  as  it  was  necessary  for  the  maintenance  of  com- 
munications with  its  garrison  in  Uganda. 


6  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Geographical  explorers  have  followed  the  same  system. 
The  "  back  blocks  "  of  British  East  Africa  have  been 
traversed  in  all  directions  and  roughly  surveyed,  while 
there  are  areas  a  day's  march  from  the  coast,  which, 
geographically,  are  quite  unknown. 

The  necessity  for  the  adventurous  and  expensive 
plunge  into  the  heart  of  Africa,  which  ruined  the  British 
East  African  Company,  can  only  be  understood  through 
a  consideration  of  the  physical  structure  of  the  country. 

Geographically,  British  East  Africa  consists  of  seven 
belts  of  country,  which  run  approximately  parallel  to  the 
coast.  The  characters  of  each  belt  are  strikingly  unlike. 
The  first  belt  consists  of  the  coast  plain  and  the  off-lying 
islands  ;  the  second  belt  is  the  Nyika,  a  barren  plateau 
stretching  inland  beyond  the  coast  plain  for  a  width  of 
from  seventy  to  two  hundred  miles  ;  next  come  the  vol- 
canic plains  of  Masai-land,  which  lie  between  the  Nyika 
and  the  eastern  wall  of  the  Erythrean  or  Great  Rift 
Valley  ;  then  follows  the  fourth  belt,  the  Great  Rift 
Valley  itself,  bounded  on  the  west  by  the  scarp  of  the 
Mau-Kamasia  plateau.  This  plateau,  which  forms  the 
fifth  belt,  descends  slowly  to  the  sixth  belt,  the  basin  of 
the  Victoria  Nyanza.  Lastly,  we  come  to  the  Rift 
Valley  of  the  Nile,  the  westernmost  belt  of  British  East 
Africa. 

.  The  first  of  these  parallel  belts  with  which  the  traveller 
becomes  acquainted  is  that  of  the  coastal  plains  ;  this  belt, 
perhaps,  appears  the  most  interesting  and  promising  dis- 


GEOGRAPHY  OF   BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA     7 

trict  to  a  visitor  from  the  temperate  zone.  The  soil  is  rich, 
the  rainfall,  though  irregular,  is  generally  ample,  and 
most  of  this  belt,  thanks  to  its  damp,  warm  climate, 
could  be  tilled  to  a  garden,  growing  all  the  fruits  of  the 
tropics,  and  supporting  a  dense  population.  The 
scenery,  moreover,  especially  if  seen  from  a  dhow  sailing 
along  the  coast,  is  pleasing  and  varied.  Surf-beaten 
coral  reefs  occur  at  intervals  along  the  shore,  and  behind 
the  breakers  is  a  shore  passage,  where  boats  lie  in  peace, 
safe  from  the  heavy  swell  that  rolls  in  from  the  Indian 
Ocean.  Beyond  the  boat  channel  lies  a  beach  of  white, 
glistening,  coral  sand,  backed  here  by  yellow,  palm-clad 
sandhills,  and  there  by  banks  of  soft  blue  mud,  passing 
into  green  forests  of  mangrove  and  jungles  of  screw 
pines  ;  while  elsewhere,  straight  above  the  white  broken 
waters  of  the  reef  belt,  stand  grey  cliffs  of  raised  coral 
rock,  weathered  into  caves  and  crags,  and  capped  by  a 
bright  red  soil. 

Beyond  the  cliffs,  and  along  the  valleys,  there  are 
palm  groves,  fruit  orchards,  rice  fields,  banana  planta- 
tions, well-tilled  fields  of  yams,  maize,  earth-nuts  and 
beans  ;  and,  nestling  in  the  hollows,  are  villages  of  oblong 
huts  made  of  interlaced  palm  leaves  or  of  wattle  and 
daub.  Between  the  cultivated  areas  are  wide  tracts  of 
acacia  scrub,  and  forests  of  branching  palms,  and  of 
native  teak,  ebony,  and  other  timber  trees  ;  these  forests 
are  generally  rendered  almost  impenetrable  by  vines 
and  creepers  and  thick  tropical  undergrowth. 


8  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Westward,  the  belt  of  the  coast  plain  and  the  low 
coast  hills  ends  at  the  foot  of  a  steep  slope,  which 
looks  like  one  side  of  a  mountain  range ;  but,  on 
ascent,  it  proves  to  be  the  eastern  scarp  of  the  great 
East  African  plateau.  This  hill  face  is  well  seen  from 
Mombasa,  and  the  Uganda  Railway  climbs  it  immedi- 
ately after  reaching  the  mainland  ;  but  in  other  parts 
of  the  British  sphere  the  coastal  belt  is  wider,  and 
the  scarp  is  farther  inland  ;  while,  where  it  has  been 
breached  by  the  rivers,  there  is  a  long  gradual  ascent 
into  the  interior  by  a  valley,  instead  of  by  one  steep, 
short  climb. 

From  the  edge  of  this  slope  a  vast  undulating  plain 
extends,  as  far  as  the  eye  can  follow  it,  into  the  interior. 
Most  of  the  plain  is  a  turfless,  sandy  waste,  waterless 
except  in  the  rainy  season. 

This  desert  belt,  which  is  known  as  the  Nyika,  has 
generally  left  a  very  unpleasing  impression  on  the 
minds  of  travellers  who  have  marched  across  it  at  the 
end  of  the  dry  season.  It  is  described  by  Mr.  Scott- 
Elliot,  who  looked  upon  it  with  the  interest  of  a  bota- 
nical specialist,  as  "  a  most  curious  district.  Gnarled 
and  twisted  acacias  of  all  sorts  and  sizes,  usually  with 
bright,  white  bark  and  a  very  thin  and  naked  appear- 
ance, cover  the  whole  country.  Amongst  these  one 
finds  the  flat-topped  acacia,  and  curious  trees  of 
euphorbia.  The  grasses  and  sedges  in  this  part  grow 
in  little  tufts,  at  some  distance  from  one  another,  leav- 


i 


,   ^dy 


GEOGRAPHY  OF  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA    9 

ing  the  general  tint  of  the  landscape  that  of  the  soil 
itself.  No  sward  or  turf  is  formed,  and,  except  imme- 
diately after  the  rains,  all  these  grasses  are  dead,  dry 
and  withered  up.  Most  of  the  plants  are  either  thorny 
or  fleshy,  as  is  usual  in  all  desert  countries."  ^ 

At  the  end  of  the  rainy  season  the  Nyika  may  look 
green  and  fertile,  but,  as  soon  as  the  rains  cease,  the 
pitiless  tropical  sun  scorches  the  vegetation,  sucks  up 
the  rain  pools,  and  turns  the  rush-bordered  stream 
courses  into  sandy  nullahs.  For  a  while,  a  sheet  of 
cabbage-like  Stratiotis  and  the  broad-leaved  lotus  pro- 
tects the  swamps,  which  remain  as  oases  in  the  desert ; 
but,  under  the  hot  blast  from  the  surrounding  plains, 
the  leaves  wither,  and,  thus  uncovered,  the  water  is 
soon  evaporated  by  the  envious  sun  ;  a  layer  of  mud, 
soon  as  dry  as  a  sun-baked  brick,  covers  the  floor  of 
the  water  holes,  and  the  oasis  is  merged  in  the  dreary, 
desert  waste. 

This  belt  of  Nyika  extends  right  across  British  East 
Africa  from  north  to  south,  broken  only  by  the  valleys 
of  the  Sabaki,  Tana  and  Juba  rivers.  Along  the  Tana 
the  soil  is  so  rich  and  deep,  that  the  forest  belt  beside 
the  river  is  impenetrable,  except  where  native  paths  or 
game  tracks  have  bored  a  passage  through  the  under- 
growth. 

Though  the  Nyika  has  been  described  as  a  plain,  its 

1  G.  F.  Scott-Elliot,  A  Naturalist  in  Mid-Africa. 


10  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

surface  is  by  no  means  level,  for  the  belt  is  composed 
of  rocks  of  great  antiquity,  with  bands  of  very  unequal 
hardness.  The  action  of  stream,  rain  and  wind-borne 
sand  has  cut  so  deeply  into  the  Nyika,  that  its  surface 
is  always  undulating,  and  it  is  at  intervals  broken  by 
steep,  hog's-back  ridges  and  boulder-strewn  hills.  The 
highest  of  these  hills  are  the  remnants  of  the  oldest 
mountain  range  in  British  East  Africa  ;  they  occur  as 
a  series  of  ridges  (mostly  near  the  meridian  of  38°  E. 
long.),  and  they  rise  to  the  height  of  from  5,000  to  7,000 
feet  above  the  sea. 

To  the  west  of  the  Nyika  are  the  broad  lava  plains  of 
Kapti,  the  Athi  and  Laikipia.  This  belt  is  probably  the 
most  hopeful  region  in  British  East  Africa,  for  the  soil 
is  fertile  and  the  climate  healthy  ;  the  days  are  often 
hot,  but  the  nights  are  always  cool,  and  Europeans  can 
live  and  labour  in  this  district  with  less  discomfort 
and  ill-health  than  in  any  other  part  of  Equatorial 
Africa.  When  the  grass  of  these  plains  is  low  in  the 
dry  season,  the  soft,  short  turf,  the  dome-shaped  hills 
and  the  well-rounded,  streamless  valleys  give  the  coun- 
try the  aspect  of  some  of  our  English  chalk  downs  ; 
and,  when  timbered,  the  country  is  beautifully  park- 
like. The  volcanic  belt,  however,  includes  some  rugged 
hill  country,  clad  in  dense  forests,  wherein  are  found 
the  great  food  plantations  of  the  Kikuyu,  To  this 
zone  also  belong  the  great  volcanic  piles  of  Kenya 
and  Settima. 


GEOGRAPHY  OF   BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA     ii 

The  lava  plains  are  abruptly  terminated  by  the  Great 
Rift  Valley,  the  most  remarkable  feature  in  the  geo- 
graphy of  Eastern  Africa.  This  valley  has  been 
formed  by  the  subsidence  of  the  block  of  material 
that  once  filled  it.  At  one  time  the  surface  of  the 
volcanic  plains  to  the  east  of  the  Rift  Valley  were 
continuous  with  the  similar  plains  to  the  west.  Paral- 
lel cracks,  hundreds  of  miles  in  length,  broke  across  the 
rocks  ;  the  block  of  material  between  these  cracks  sank, 
leaving  walls,  in  places,  so  precipitous  that  the  Uganda 
Railway  has  had  temporarily  to  use  a  cable-worked 
funicular  railway  for  the  descent  into  the  valley  from 
the  Kikuyu  plateau.  The  walls  of  the  valley,  however, 
are  not  always  precipitous.  The  lines  along  which  the 
subsidence  occurred  cut  across  ridges,  valleys  and  basins  ; 
and  the  character  of  the  scarps  that  now  bound  the 
valley  varies  with  the  structure  of  the  country  on  either 
side  of  the  Rift  Valley. 

In    British    East    Africa    there    are    two   main    rift 

I  valleys.      The    eastern,   known   as   the    Erythrean,   or 

j  Great  Rift  Valley,  extends  through  East  Africa  from  the 

!  German  frontier  to  Abyssinia ;  it  bends  eastward  round 

the  Abyssinian  plateau,  and  reaches  the  southern  end 

of  the  Red  Sea ;  it  is  then  continued  northward  by  the 

Red  Sea  and  Gulf  of  Akaba  to  the  valley,  which  leads 

over  the   Arabah    depression   to   the    Dead    Sea   and 

Jordan  Valley. 

Beyond  the  western  wall  of  the  Great  Rift  Valley  the 


12  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

country  slopes  gradually  to  the  depression,  the  lowest 
part  of  which  is  occupied  by  the  Victoria  Nyanza. 
The  floor  of  the  Nyanza  basin  is  fairly  level,  as  a  rule, 
but  it  is  intersected  by  numberless  broad,  shallow,  flat- 
floored  valleys. 

"The  whole  of  Uganda,  Usoga,  and  much  of 
Karagwe,"  says  Scott-Elliot,  "  consists  of  an  infinity  of 
hills  and  ridges  4,110  feet,  on  an  average,  above  the  sea. 
Their  flat  valleys  are  usually  occupied  by  swamp  rivers, 
often  half  a  mile  wide.  These  curve  and  twist  about  in 
an  extraordinary  fashion,  and  have  numerous  minor 
swamps  connected  with  them.  It  is  thus  immediately 
obvious  that  railways  are  impossible,  and  roads  ex- 
tremely difficult.  In  a  course  of  twenty  miles  we  may 
have  to  cross  eight  swamps  from  a  quarter  to  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  wide,  and  mount  and  descend  twelve 
hills  each  300  feet  high  and  also  steep." 

These  swampy  valleys  are  lined  with  rich,  deep  soil, 
and  the  country  is  at  a  lower  level  than  most  of  the 
volcanic  country  to  the  east.  Lake  Naivasha,  in  the 
Rift  Valley,  is  6,230  feet  above  the  sea,  but  the  level  of 
the  Nyanza  is  only  3,820  feet.  Hence  Uganda  and  the 
countries  around  the  Victoria  Nyanza  have  a  warmer 
climate,  and  are  more  typically  tropical  in  their  cha- 
racters, than  the  high  plateaux  that  separate  them  from 
the  fertile  coast  lands. 

West  of  the  Nyanza  basin  is  the  second  and  western 
Rift  Valley — that  of  the  Nile.     It  lies  between  the  high 


li 


GEOGRAPHY  OF  BRITISH  EAST   AFRICA     13 

plateau  of  the  Congo  Free  State  to  the  west,  and  the 
snow-clad  Ruwenzori  and  the  plateau  of  Unyoro  to  the 
east.  It  is  continued  southward  to  Tanganyika,  and 
northward  down  the  valley  of  the  Nile.  Its  formation 
was  no  doubt  similar  to  that  of  the  Erythrean  Rift 
Valley,  and  Stanley's  bold  suggestion  regarding  the 
event  has  been  justified  by  the  evidence  of  later  travel- 
lers. "  Time  was  when  Ruwenzori  did  not  exist.  It  was 
grassy  upland,  extending  from  Unyoro  to  the  Balegga 
plateau."  ^  Then  came  the  upheaval  at  a  remote  period. 
"  Ruwenzori  was  raised  to  the  clouds,  and  a  yawning 
abyss  250  miles  long  and  30  miles  broad  lay  south-west 
and  north-east." 

The  Nilotic  Rift  Valley  repeats  the  characters  of  the 
Erythrean  Rift  Valley,  and  it  is  occupied  by  long, 
narrow,  fiord-like  lakes,  of  a  very  different  aspect  from 
the  round  lakes,  with  low,  shelving  shores,  of  the  Victoria 
Nyanza  type. 

The  contrast  between  the  two  lake  types  is  well 
expressed  by  the  late  Major  Thruston  : 

"  The  ordinary  conception  of  a  lake  under  the  Equator 
is  of  a  sheet  of  water  with  swampy  shores,  infested  by 
myriads  of  mosquitoes,  surrounded  by  dense  tropical 
forest,  with  rank  undergrowth  and  a  tangled  mass  of 
creepers.  Such  would  be  a  fairly  correct  description  of 
Lake   Victoria.      Lake   Albert   is   very   different.      Its 

^  The  country  to  the  west  of  the  Albert  Nyanza. 


14  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

eastern  shore  is  bounded  by  a  steep  and  sometimes 
precipitous  bank  from  r.cxx)  to  1,500  feet  in  height,  the 
edge  of  the  water  being  fringed  by  a  plain  varying  from 
a  few  feet  to  a  mile  in  breadth,  .  .  .  The  western 
shore  is  formed  by  a  chain  of  lofty  mountains,  the 
highest  peaks  of  which  must  be  at  least  8,000  feet  above! 
the  level  of  the  lake.  The  sides  of  the  mountains  arei 
like  walls  rising  out  of  the  water.  .  .  ,  The  whole] 
scene  resembles  a  fiord  in  Norway." 

Such,  then,  in  broad  outline,  is  the  physical  structure 
of  British  East  Africa.  It  is  a  land  of  striking  con- 
trasts, both  in  climate  and  in  geographical  characters. 
Although  lying  across  the  Equator,  there  are  two 
mountains,  Kenya  and  Ruwenzori,  that  are  always 
snow-capped,  and  the  volcanic  plateaux  bear  many 
plants  whose  affinities  are  with  those  of  the  Mediterra- 
nean basin.  Again,  the  country  exhibits  the  action  of 
both  ice  and  fire :  it  has  a  system  of  glaciers ;  it  has 
also  innumerable  old  volcanoes.  These  last  occur  both 
as  weathered  cones  in  the  last  stages  of  decay,  and  as 
lines  of  well-preserved  craters,  where  the  old  volcanic 
fires  are  not  yet  wholly  extinct.  It  is  a  land,  moreover, 
of  lakes  and  deserts.  In  the  western  basin  is  the 
second  largest  freshwater  lake  in  the  world,  and  in  the 
Rift  Valleys  are  fiord-like  lakes,  one  of  which.  Lake 
Rudolf,  is  170  miles  in  length  ;  while  in  contrast  to  these 
vast  existing  lakes  there  are  barren  tracts  of 


GEOGRAPHY  OF   BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA     15 

"  The  shining  plain  that  is  said  to  be 
The  dried-up  bed  of  a  tormer  sea, 
Where  the  air,  so  dry,  and  so  clear  and  bright. 
Reflects  the  sun  with  a  wondrous  light. 
And  out  in  the  dim  horizon  makes 
The  deep  blue  gleam  of  the  phantom  lakes." 

The  essential  fact,  then,  in  the  economic  geography 
of  British  East  Africa,  is  its  remarkable  diversity.  It 
contains  all  sorts  of  climate  and  all  varieties  of  soils  ; 
we  find  the  fertile,  fever-stricken  belt  of  the  coastlands  ; 
the  broad,  undulating,  arid  waste  of  the  Nyika ;  the 
high,  bracing,  turf-clad  plains  of  Masai-land ;  and  the 
deep,  wind-swept  trough  of  the  Great  Rift  Valley  ;  as 
well  as  the  warm,  rich  lowlands  of  the  Nyanza  basin 
and  the  valley  of  the  Upper  Nile,  where  palms  flourish, 
and  both  vegetation  and  climate  have  a  tropical 
character. 

The  temperate  character  of  the  plateau  country 
renders  it  more  suitable  for  European  settlement  than 
the  low-lying  zones  on  either  side ;  but  so  long  as  the 
highlands  remain  sparsely  inhabited,  they  will  be  of 
less  commercial  value  than  the  more  densely  populated 
and  richer  country  of  Uganda.  Hence  the  British 
East  Africa  Company  was  only  adapting  its  policy  to 
the  natural  conditions  of  the  country  when  it  devoted 
its  best  energies  to  the  occupation  of  the  well-populated 
lowlands  of  the  interior,  and  to  the  establishment  of  a 
direct  connection  between  them  and  the  coast  towns. 
The  British  Government  has  been  forced  to  follow  the 


i6  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

same  plan,  and,  at  the  cost  of  many  millions,  is  building 
a  railway  from  Mombasa  to  the  Victoria  Nyanza  ;  yet 
both  British  administrations  are  only  following  the 
example  of  the  Arab  traders,  who  were  the  pioneers  in 
the  economic  development  of  Eastern  Africa. 


Chapter  II 
THE  NATIVES  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

"  But  no  !  they  rubb'd  through  yesterday 
In  their  hereditary  way, 
And  they  will  rub  through,  if  they  can, 
To-morrow  on  the  selfsame  plan, 
Till  death  arrive  to  supersede. 
For  them,  vicissitude  and  need." 

— Matthew  Arnold. 

SOME  acquaintance  with  the  races,  as  well  as  with 
the  geography,  of  British  East  Africa  is  neces- 
sary for  a  correct  understanding  of  the  history 
of  the  country.  The  tribes  that  live  there  belong  to 
several  distinct  race  groups.  Some  deplorable  inci- 
dents in  the  recent  history  of  the  protectorate  would 
probably  never  have  occurred  had  due  allowance  been 
made  for  the  fundamental  differences  in  character 
between  members  of  the  various  races. 

The  population,  in  the  main,  consists  of  negroes. 
They  belong  to  that  section  of  the  negro  race  known  as 
the  Bantu,  which  occupies  most  of  Africa,  south  of  a 
line   from   the    Cameroons   on   the   west   coast   to  the 

17  C 


i8  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

mouth  of  the  Juba  on  the  east  coast.  The  typical 
Bantu  tribes  of  British  East  Africa  are  the  Wa-nyika, 
with  their  allies  the  Wa-duruma  and  Wa-giriama,  who 
inhabit  the  eastern  part  of  the  Nyika  and  the  southern 
part  of  the  coastal  belt  ;  the  Wa-taita,  who  live  in  the 
Taita  mountains  in  the  south-western  part  of  the  Nyika, 
beginning  some  eighty-five  miles  west  from  Mombasa  ; 
the  Wa-kamba,  who  occupy  the  hilly  country  in  the 
basin  of  the  River  Athi,  along  the  western  boundary  of 
the  Nyika ;  and  the  Wa-pokomo,  who  dwell  on  the 
banks  of  the  lower  Tana,  from  the  edge  of  the  plateau 
country  at  Hameye  to  the  sea. 

The  Bantu  of  British  East  Africa  are,  as  a  rule, 
peaceful  and  industrious  agriculturists.  The  Wa-kamba 
are  the  bravest,  the  most  enterprising,  and  the  most 
intelligent ;  while  the  Wa-pokomo  are  probably  the  most 
industrious,  as  they  are  certainly  the  most  timid,  of  the 
Bantu  tribes. 

The  Bantu  tribes  are  pagans,  and  have  so  far  yielded 
unsatisfactory  returns  to  missionary  enterprise.  Mis- 
sions have  been  established  for  half  a  century  among 
the  Wa-nyika,  with  meagre  results.  The  Scottish 
Industrial  Mission  to  the  Kikumbuliu  section  of  the 
Wa-kamba  has  been  removed,  after  a  few  years'  work,  to 
a  more  hopeful  clan  ;  but,  according  to  Thruston,  even  the 
best  of  the  Wa-kamba  have  decided  that  "  they  will  have 
nothing  to  say  to  the  Gospel,  which  they  consider  a 
most  improbable  story." 


NATIVES   OF    BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     19 

The  Bantu  section  of  the  negro  race  is  also  repre- 
sented by  some  hybrid  tribes,  formed  by  the  inter- 
marriage of  foreign  immigrants  with  the  primitive 
Bantu  stock. 

Of  these  mixed  races  the  most  important  is  that  of  the 
SuahiH,  whose  language,  Ki-suahili,  is  the  lingua  franca 
of  East  Africa.  The  Suahili  live  along  the  coast  lands 
and  in  the  islands  of  Pemba  and  Zanzibar.  The  name 
is  derived  from  Suahil,  a  coast,  and  the  race  has  been 
formed  by  the  intermarriage  of  Arab,  Persian  and 
Beluchi  traders,  with  the  Bantu  of  the  coast  lands,  or 
with  members  of  the  inland  tribes,  who  have  been 
taken  to  the  coast  as  slaves.  The  better-class  Suahili 
live  in  the  eastern  ports,  and  they  conduct  most  of  the 
trade  with  the  interior.  Many  East  Africans,  who  are 
called  Arabs,  are  really  Suahili.  Frequent  reference 
will  be  made  in  subsequent  chapters  to  Arab  traders 
and  Arab  caravans,  but  it  must  be  understood  that  the 
name  is  used  conventionally,  and  is  not  anthropolo- 
gically correct.  Tippu  Tib  is  a  typical  Suahili  ;  his 
mother  was  a  Bantu  slave,  his  father  a  half-caste  Arab. 
But  Tippu  is  usually  called  an  Arab,  in  accordance 
with  the  East  African  use  of  the  word,  as  the  name  of 
a  caste,  rather  than  of  a  race. 

The  Wa-ganda  are  another  tribe  with  a  Bantu  basis 
altered  and  improved  by  intermixture  with  people  who 
do  not  belong  to  the  negro  race.  The  primitive  Bantu 
of  Uganda  were  conquered  by  the  Wa-huma,  a  Hamitic 


20  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

tribe  allied  to  the  Galla  and  to  some  of  the  Abyssinians. 
Some  remnants  of  pure  Wa-huma  still  survive  in  the 
Uganda  Protectorate.  That  they  are  not  negroes  was 
recognised  by  the  first  travellers  in  Uganda.  "  The 
Wa-huma,"  says  Stanley,  "  are  true  descendants  of  the 
Semitic '  tribes  or  communities,  which  emigrated  from 
Asia  across  the  Red  Sea,  and  settled  on  the  coast,  and 
in  the  uplands  of  Abyssinia,  once  known  as  Ethiopia." 

It  is  to  this  foreign  intermixture  that  the  Wa-ganda 
owe  their  political  importance  and  personal  intelligence. 

Another  type  of  the  negro  race  is  represented  by  the 
Kikuyu,  a  tribe  which  lives  in  a  belt  of  forest  country 
extending  from  the  southern  slopes  of  Kenya  to  the 
edge  of  the  Great  Rift  Valley.  The  Kikuyu  differ 
from  the  Bantu  in  many  respects,  and  appear  to  be 
allied  to  the  Niamniam  of  the  Congo  Free  State  rather 
than  to  any  other  tribe  in  East  Africa.  They  may  be 
the  offspring  of  intermarriage  between  the  Bantu 
and  the  Nilotic  races. 

The  Nilotic  group  is  represented  by  the  Masai,  a  race 
of  pastoral,  warlike  nomads,  who  roam  over  the  grazing 
plains  of  the  volcanic  belt  and  of  the  Rift  Valley. 
They  are  allied  to  the  negroes  of  the  Nile  Valley,  and 
must  have  invaded  British  East  Africa  from  the  north 
and  north-west.  The  Masai  are  brave  and  warlike,  and 
the  whole  social  organization  of  the  tribe  is  adapted  for 

'  This  may  have  been  a  lapsus  calami  for  Hamitic. 


.  >^.'K^-U-»/i%pilmm 


NATIVES  OF   BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA     21 

the  training  of  warriors,  who  undertake  cattle-raiding 
expeditions  against  their  neighbours. 

The  Masai  had  a  wide  reputation  for  ferocity,  blood- 
thirstiness,  and  fickleness,  and  Kipling's  "  Some  take 
their  tucker  with  tigers,  and  some  with  the  giddy  Masai" 
illustrates  the  character  they  once  enjoyed.  Before 
British  East  Africa  fell  under  British  influence  the 
Masai  were  a  scourge  to  the  whole  country,  and  they 
prevented  much  of  the  best  land  from  being  cultivated. 
Of  the  Bantu  tribes  only  the  Wakamba  could  hold 
their  own  against  the  Masai ;  and  even  they  had  to  leave 
untilled  much  of  the  best  land  in  their  country,  for  they 
could  not  protect  exposed  portions. 

As  late  as  1889  the  Masai  raided  in  sight  of  Mom- 
basa ;  they  frequently  quarrelled  with  Arab  caravans, 
which  they  annihilated  ;  they  have  killed  several  Euro- 
peans during  the  last  few  years,  and  in  1894  massacred 
a  Government  caravan  of  over  1,000  porters.  Cattle 
disease,  however,  has  now  broken  their  power  and  re- 
duced their  numbers,  and  they  are  not  likely  to  give 
serious  trouble  to  the  British  Administration  ;  but  their 
military  system  and  power  to  mass  rendered  them,  at 
one  time,  more  dangerous  than  any  other  tribe  in  British 
East  Africa. 

The  Nilotic  race  is  also  represented  among  the  people 
of  Kavirondo,  whose  most  striking  characteristic  is  their 
absolute  nudity.  But,  as  is  often  the  case  in  Africa, 
nudity  is  accompanied  by  morality  ;  some  of  their  fully- 


22  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

clad  neighbours  are  far  less  moral  than  these  naked 
natives  of  Kavirondo.  Hobley's  researches  show  that 
the  Wa-kavirondo  include  a  mixture  of  races,  but  the 
main  basis  of  population  appears  to  be  the  Nilotic  negro. 
Another  tribe  of  the  same  race  are  the  Nyempsians,  the 
best  British  East  African  representative  of  the  peoples 
called  Wakwafi  ;  these  tribes  have  been  regarded  as  de- 
generate Masai,  who  had  lost  their  cattle  and  taken  to 
agricultural  pursuits.  But,  according  to  evidence  col- 
lected by  New,  the  first  Englishman  to  study  them, 
these  Wakwafi  are  a  distinct  race,  who  have  been 
crushed  and  dispossessed  by  the  Masai  invasion.  This 
view  is  the  more  probable. 

The  Hamitic  race  is  represented  in  British  East  Africa 
by  the  Galla.  One  section  of  this  tribe  lives  along  the 
Tana  Valley,  and  in  the  plains  between  that  river  and 
the  Sabaki.  Early  in  the  nineteenth  century  the  Galla 
were  of  greater  importance  than  at  present,  and  they 
ruled  the  country  from  the  Juba  to  Mombasa.  They 
then  gained  a  great  reputation  for  cruelty  and  ferocity. 
Boteler,  who  surveyed  the  eastern  coast  in  1 822-1 826, 
tells  us  that  "  the  Gallah  have  no  houses,  but  wander  in 
the  woods  in  the  wildest  state.  Professed  enemies  to 
every  native  and  tribe  around  them,  they  hunt  and  are 
hunted,  committing  indiscriminate  slaughter  on  unresist- 
ing multitudes  one  day,  and  becoming  the  victims  of 
like  treatment  from  a  superior  force  of  their  enemies  on 
the  ne.xt.' 


NATIVES  OF  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA     23 

But  at  present  the  power  of  the  Galla  is  insignificant, 
and  this  interesting  tribe,  including  the  most  intellectual 
of  the  East  African  natives,  is  of  little  political  import- 
ance. Their  allies,  the  Randile,  living  in  the  country 
east  of  Lake  Rudolf,  are,  however,  still  numerous  and 
prosperous,  having  great  herds  of  camels  and  cattle. 

The  last  element  in  the  population  of  British  East 
Africa  is  a  survival  of  the  aboriginal  pygmy.  This  race 
is  represented  on  the  western  edge  of  the  country  by 
true  pure-bred  pygmies,  who  have  been  studied  by  Stiihl- 
mann.  To  the  east  of  the  Rift  Valley  there  is  a  dwarf 
tribe  of  historic  interest,  as  it  supplied  the  first  modern 
confirmation  of  the  classical  and  mediaeval  reports  of  the 
existence  of  pygmies  in  Central  Africa,  This  tribe,  how- 
ever, has  been  much  altered  by  negro  intermixture,  so 
that  its  members  are  only  half-castes.  The  tribe  was 
first  reported  from  Abyssinia  under  the  name  of  the 
Doko.  The  earliest  detailed  account  of  them  was  pub- 
lished by  Sir.  W.  C.  Harris,  but  it  was  apparently  written 
by  Krapf  ^     Subsequently  rumours  of  the  existence  of  a 

•  In  The  Great  Rift  Valley^  p.  327,  I  regret  to  have  done  an 
injustice  to  Krapf,  by  accusing  him  of  plagiarism  from  Harris. 
The  two  men  published  a  detailed  account  of  the  Doko  in  practi- 
cally identical  language.  Harris's  account  appeared  in  1844  and 
Krapf 's  in  i860.  I  therefore  concluded  that  Krapf  had  copied 
from  Harris  ;  but  Krapf  elsewhere  declares  that,  while  in  Abyssinia, 
he  lent  his  note  books  to  Harris,  who  published  long  extracts  from 
them  without  acknowledgment.  Krapf  felt  at  liberty  to  reprint 
his  notes,  without  reference  to  their  prior  publication  by  Harris  ; 


24  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

southern  section  of  the  tribe,  mentioned  as  the  Wa- 
berikimo,  were  reported  from  Mombasa  by  Boteler  and 
Rigby.  Members  of  the  northern  tribe,  or  Doko,  have 
been  seen  by  Dr.  Donaldson  Smith,  while  the  southern 
tribe  has  been  described  by  the  author. 

he  thereby  laid  himself  open  to  a  charge  of  plagiarism,  which  I 
gladly  now  withdraw. 


BOOK    II 

THE   GEOGRAPHICAL   PIONEERS 

"We  were  dreamers,  dreaming  greatly,  in  the  man-stifled  town  ; 

We  yearned  beyond  the  sky-line,  where  the  strange  roads  go 

down." 

— Kipling. 


Chapter    III 
THE  DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY 

"  Far  hence,  upon  the  Mountains  of  the  Moon, 
Is  my  abode ;  where  heaven  and  nature  smile, 
And  strew  with  flowers  the  secret  bed  of  Nile." 

— Dryden. 

THE  modern  period  in  the  geography  of  Equa- 
torial Africa  began  with  Bruce's  Travels  in 
Abyssinia^  and  the  foundation  of  the  African 
Association, — the  parent  of  the  Royal  Geographical 
Society.  But  long  before  the  time  of  Bruce  and  Park, 
Eastern  Africa  had  been  explored  and  exploited  by 
travellers,  who  had  discovered  most  of  the  leading  facts 
in  the  geography  of  Equatorial  Africa.  As  is  shown  by 
Sanson  d' Abbeville's  map  of  Equatorial  Africa  published 
in  1635,  it  was  known  early  in  the  seventeenth  century 
that  the  Congo  rose  from  Lake  Zaire  or  Tanganyika, 
and  that  the  Nile  sprang  from  a  series  of  lakes.  Indeed, 
the  outline  of  "  Zaflan  Lacus,"  the  largest  of  these  lakes, 
is  more  correctly  represented  in  Sanson's  map  of  1635 
than  it  is  in  the  map  of  Africa  in  the  latest  edition  of 


28  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

the  Encyclopmdia  Britannica.  The  early  geographers 
knew,  moreover,  of  the  existence  of  Lake  Rudolf,  which 
was  not  seen  by  any  European  until  1889 ;  and 
they  marked  the  courses  of  the  two  chief  rivers  of 
British  East  Africa,  the  Tana  and  Sabaki,  with  greater 
accuracy  than  was  done  in  our  maps  of  ten  years 
ago. 

In  fact,  the  end  of  the  first  half  of  the  nineteenth 
century  is  the  period  when  European  ignorance  of  the 
geography  of  Central  Africa  reached  its  climax ;  the 
reports  of  early  travellers  had  been  dismissed  as  lies 
and  fables,  and  the  whole  interior  of  the  continent  was 
represented  as  an  uninhabited,  desert  waste. 

But  these  early  explorations  must  not  be  forgotten,  as 
the  reports  to  which  they  gave  rise,  inspired  interest  in 
Central  Africa,  and  guided  later  travellers  to  their  goal. 

At  what  date  the  exploration  of  the  interior  of  East 
Africa  began  is  unknown,  for  some  of  the  results  are 
quoted  in  the  oldest  known  literature.  On  early 
Egyptian  monuments  there  are  figures  of  the  equatorial 
dwarfs,  with  the  name  "  Akka  "  written  beside  them. 
These  drawings  show  that  at  the  time  when  they  were 
made  there  was  intercourse  between  Egypt  and  the 
highlands  on  the  south-western  part  of  the  Nile  basin. 
The  first  pages  of  existing  literature  show  some  know- 
ledge of  Equatorial  Africa.  Homer  states  that  when,  to 
escape  the  northern  winter, — 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY  29 

"  To  warmer  seas  the  cranes  embodied  fly, 
With  noise  and  order,  thro'  the  mid-way  sky. 
To  pygmy  nations  wounds  and  death  they  bring." 

As  the  flamingoes  of  the  Mediterranean  migrate  every 
winter  to  the  Upper  Nile,  where  the  pygmies  still  live, 
this  passage  shows  that,  even  in  Homer's  time,  the 
Greeks  knew  something  of  the  more  striking  marvels  of 
Eastern  Equatorial  Africa, 

The  indications  of  this  knowledge  become  more  pre- 
cise in  the  works  of  later  classical  authors,  and,  before 
the  beginning  of  the  Christian  Era,  the  Greek  geogra- 
phers certainly  possessed  much  reliable  information 
about  Equatorial  Africa. 

This  knowledge  was  no  doubt  obtained,  in  the  first 
instance,  from  traders,  some  of  whom  journeyed  south, 
across  the  Sahara  or  up  the  Nile,  while  others  sailed 
down  the  Red  Sea  into  the  Indian  Ocean,  and  along  the 
East  African  coast. 

The  trade  was  probably  begun  and  developed  by  the 
Phoenicians,  for  Solomon's  joint  enterprise  with  Hiram 
of  Tyre  is  the  first  recorded  commercial  venture  in 
Eastern  Africa.  The  ships  were  built  on  the  Red  Sea 
at  Eziongeber  in  the  land  of  Edom.  Hiram  supplied 
the  seamen  and  Solomon  the  commercial  travellers. 
Once  every  three  years  the  fleet  returned  from  Ophir, 
with  "  gold  and  silver,  ivory,  and  apes  and  peacocks." 

If  the  peacocks  were  guinea-fowl,  as  has  been  not  un- 
reasonably suggested,  then  Solomon's  Ophir  may  well 


30  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

have  been  in  South- Eastern  Africa.  That  Phoenician  or 
Sabean  influence  reached  the  Zambesi  is  shown  by  the 
famous  ruin  of  Zimbabwe  in  Mashona-land.  It  is  prob- 
able that  this  temple  was  built  by  the  traders,  who 
worked  the  goldfields  of  British  South  Africa  centuries 
before  the  Christian  era. 

We  are  not,  however,  compelled  to  rely  on  any  doubt- 
ful identification,  such  as  the  site  of  Solomon's  Ophir 
must  always  remain.  The  writings  of  classical  geo- 
graphers contain  definite  evidence  of  the  early  explora- 
tion of  Equatorial  Africa.  Herodotus  tells  us  of  the 
journey  of  some  young  men  from  Nassamonia,  a  country 
to  the  west  of  Lower  Egypt,  who  crossed  the  Sahara  to 
a  river,  which  is  generally  believed  to  be  the  Niger.  He 
further  records  the  circumnavigation  of  Africa,  two 
centuries  before  his  time,  by  some  mariners  sent  out  by 
Pharaoh  Necho.  These  men  were  Phoenicians,  who  en- 
tered the  Egyptian  service  ;  ships  were  built  on  the  Red 
Sea,  and  the  expedition  started  southward.  It  passed 
through  the  Straits  of  Bab-el-Mandeb,  out  into  the  Indian 
Ocean,  and  slowly  made  its  way  down  the  East  African 
coast.  Several  times  the  stores  of  food  were  exhausted, 
and  the  mariners  had  to  haul  their  boats  ashore,  and  sow  a 
crop  of  grain.  They  waited  until  it  had  grown,  and  when 
it  was  harvested,  the  boats  were  launched  again  on  the 
arduous  voyage.  At  length  the  explorers  reached  the 
southern  coast  of  what  is  now  Cape  Colony ;  they 
steered  westward,  with  the  sun  on  their  right  hand,  until 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     31 

they  again  turned  to  the  north,  entered  the  Mediterra- 
nean through  the  Pillars  of  Hercules,  and  reached  Egypt 
after  an  absence  of  three  years. 

Herodotus,  himself,  dismisses  the  report  as  fabulous, 
owing  to  the  assertion  that,  during  part  of  the  voyage, 
the  sun  was  on  their  right  hand.  This  statement,  however, 
is  now  regarded  as  probably  the  strongest  evidence  in 
favour  of  the  truth  of  the  narrative. 

The  objects  of  Solomon's  southern  venture  were 
avowedly  commercial,  and  the  first  Egyptian  expedi- 
tions were  probably  inspired  by  the  same  motive.  But 
the  Egyptian  traders  were  soon  followed  by  geographers 
anxious  to  solve  the  problem,  why  the  Nile  should  rise 
in  flood  during  the  hottest  and  driest  season  of  the 
year.  The  explanation,  that  it  was  due  to  snow  on 
high  mountains  melting  in  the  summer,  had  even  then 
been  suggested  ;  for  Herodotus  argues  against  the  theory 
on  the  ground  of  the  high  temperature  of  the  country 
south  of  Egypt,  as  proved  by  the  heat  of  the  south  wind, 
the  blackness  of  the  natives,  and  the  southward  flight  of 
the  cranes  to  avoid  the  winter  cold.  The  snow  theory 
being  dismissed  as  improbable,  the  behaviour  of  the  Nile 
remained  a  puzzle  which  specially  roused  the  interest  of 
the  speculative  Greeks.  Thus  the  first  question  that 
Alexander  the  Great  put  to  the  oracle  of  Jupiter 
Ammon  was  an  inquiry  respecting  the  sources  of  the 
Nile,  Nero  sent  an  army  up  the  Nile  to  trace  the  river 
to  its  head,  while  the  wiser  Ptolemy  Philadelphus  en- 


32  BRITISH    EAST  AFRICA 

deavoured  to  solve  the  problem  by  sending  an  expedi- 
tion overland  from  the  eastern  coast.  That  the  origin 
of  the  Nile  was  a  source  of  interest  to  the  Romans  in 
the  time  of  Nero  may  be  seen  in  the  Phavsalia,  where 
Lucan  makes  Caesar  say  that  he  would  abandon  the 
career  of  arms,  if  he  could  see  the  Nile  fountains. 

That  the  repeated  efforts  to  reach  the  Upper  Nile  were 
rewarded  by  definite  information  about  the  source  of  that 
river,  is  proved  by  the  works  of  the  classical  geographers. 
They  show  that  the  Nile  rises  from  three  lakes  in  the 
equatorial  regions,  and  that,  later  on,  it  is  joined  by  the 
Blue  Nile  from  Abyssinia.  This  knowledge  is  evident 
in  Hipparchus'  map,  and  the  same  information  is  re- 
peated, with  much  additional  matter,  in  Ptolemy's  map 
and  writings,  A.D.  1 50. 

Before  Ptolemy,  however,  an  account  of  the  East 
African  coast  was  issued  in  an  Egyptian  "  Pilot's  Guide 
to  the  Indian  Ocean,"  which  was  compiled  towards  the 
end  of  the  first  century  A.D. 

This  work*  is  of  interest,  as  it  gives  the  earliest 
description  of  Zanzibar.  The  name  of  the  author  is  un- 
known. The  title  of  the  book  is  the  "  Periplus  of  the 
Red  Sea  "  {Peviphis  Maris  Erythraei),  Its  authorship 
was  once  referred  to  Arrian. 

The  exact  date  of  the  work  is  uncertain,  but  that  it 
is  earlier  than  the  time  of  Ptolemy  is  evident  from  its 

'  A  text  in  Greek  and  Latin,  with  elaborate  notes,  is  published 
in  Mailer's  Lesser  Greek  Geographers  (1855),  vol.  i.  pp.  257-305. 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     33 

less  accurate  information  regarding  India.  The  author's 
information  was  probably  obtained  from  the  logs  of  the 
mariners  and  traders,  who  had  journeyed  into  the  Indian 
Ocean.  The  Periplus  describes  the  sailing  route  down 
the  Red  Sea,  and  round  Cape  Aromata  (Cape  Guar- 
dafui).  The  country  near  it  was  rich  in  frankincense, 
myrrh,  and  spices.  After  passing  the  Cape,  the  route 
lay  along  the  East  African  coast,  and  during  the  voyage 
the  merchants  exchanged  corn,  wine  and  weapons  for 
ivory,  tortoiseshell  and  rhinoceros  horns. 

A  translation  of  the  description  of  the  East  African 
coast  in  the  Periplus,  for  which  I  am  indebted  to  my 
colleague.  Professor  Tucker,  is  given  in  an  appendix 
to  this  chapter  (page  49). 

Ptolemy's  account  is  more  detailed.  The  passages 
are  worth  quoting  as  the  first  description  of  East  Africa, 
of  which  we  know  the  date  and  author.  The  translation 
is  by  Dr.  Schlichter. 

"  Going  from  Arabia  to  Aromata,  the  course  passes 
the  country  of  Barbaria ;  after  Aromata,  there  is  a  bay, 
and  the  village  of  Panum  situated  in  it,  one  day's 
journey  distant  from  Aromata.  From  this  village  the 
emporium  of  Opone  is  distant  another  day's  journey, 
and  then  comes  a  second  bay.  Here  begins  the  country 
of  Azania,  near  the  promontory  of  Zingis,  and  the  moun- 
tain of  Phalangis,  which  has  three  peaks.  This  bay 
is  called  Apocopa,  and  can  be  passed  in  two  days  and 
two  nights.     Then,  thre     courses  distant,  we  find  the 

D 


34  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Little  Strand,  and  another  place  which  is  called  the 
Great  Strand,  and  is  five  courses  distant  from  the  former  ; 
both  these  distances  can  be  accomplished  by  sailing  in 
four  days  and  four  nights.  Then  follows  another  bay, 
in  which  is  situated  an  emporium  called  Essina,  reached 
after  a  further  navigation  of  one  day  and  one  night ; 
and  then  commences  the  bay,  which  extends  to  Rhapta 
and  is  a  three  days'  and  three  nights'  journey  by  ship. 
Near  the  beginning  of  this  bay  is  an  emporium,  which 
is  called  Tonike,  and  not  far  from  the  promontory  of 
Rhaptum  is  the  river  Rhaptus,  and  the  capital  with  the 
same  name,  the  latter  being  inland,  but  not  far  from  the 
coast.  From  Rhaptum  to  the  promontory  of  Praesum 
extends  a  very  large  but  shallow  bay,  the  shores  of 
which  are  inhabited  by  cannibals." 

In  a  later  passage  Ptolemy  continues : 
"  Ethiopia,  which  is  situated  south  of  these  regions, 
and  of  the  whole  country  of  Libya,  is  terminated  north- 
ward by  a  line,  reaching  from  the  promontory  of  Rhap- 
tum to  the  large  bay  of  the  exterior  ocean,  and  by 
that  part  of  the  western  ocean  which  is  near  it.  West 
and  south  it  is  terminated  by  unknown  country.  On 
the  eastern  side  it  reaches  from  the  promontory  of 
Rhaptum  and  bay  of  Barbaria  (which  is  called  the 
'  rough  sea,'  on  account  of  the  force  of  the  waves)  to 
the  promontory  of  Praesum.  After  that  the  country  is 
unknown." 

Still  more   important   than   Ptolemy's  knowledge  of 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     35 

the  coast  line  is  the  fact  that  he  had  some  acquaintance 
with  the  ivory-yielding  hinterland.  For  he  tells  us  that 
to  the  west  of  his  cannibal-haunted  bay,  between 
Praesum  and  Rhaptum,  extend  the  mountains  of  the 
Moon,  from  which  the  Nile  lakes  receive  the  snows.  It 
is  true  that  the  positions  assigned  by  Ptolemy  to  these 
lakes  were  inaccurate,  but  this  mistake  was  inevitable,  as 
he  had  to  rely  only  on  the  recollections  of  rough-route 
traverses  by  native  traders.  Cooley  dismissed  Ptolemy's 
information  as  the  result  of  a  few  lucky  guesses.  But 
the  closeness  of  the  coincidence,  and  the  fact  that  Ptolemy 
was  a  scientific  geographer  and  not  a  guesser,  render 
this  view  improbable.  The  information  is  sufficiently 
accurate,  in  the  essential  points,  to  show  that  the  east- 
coast  caravans  must,  even  at  this  early  date,  have 
worked  their  way  to  the  high  plateau  of  the  interior. 

Ptolemy's  belief  that  the  Nile  was  fed  by  melting 
snow  is  interesting,  as  it  shows  that  all  the  classical 
authorities  were  not  convinced  by  Herodotus'  arguments. 
But  for  the  first  certain  evidence  of  the  existence  of 
snow-capped  mountains  in  Eastern  Africa  we  have  to 
turn  to  the  Arabian  geographers,  who,  after  the  fall  of 
the  Mediterranean  school,  continued  the  exploitation  of 
the  country. 

The  Arabians  and  Persians  had  probably  conducted 
an  East  African  ivory  and  slave  trade  from  the  re- 
motest antiquity.     Many  of  the  Persian  tales  are  based 


36  BRITISH  EAST   AFRICA 

on  the  adventures  of  their  sailors  on  the  eastern  coast. 
Sinbad  the  Sailor's  powerful  bird,  the  roc,  for  instance, 
is  most  likely  the  now  extinct  yEpyornis  of  Madagascar, 
which  laid  truly  colossal  eggs  ;  and  Reinaud,  it  may 
be  remembered,  has  identified  the  Isles  of  Wak-Wak  as 
the  Zanzibar  group. 

After  the  Mohammedan  conquest  of  Egypt,  the 
Arabian  geographers  became  as  interested  in  the 
mystery  of  the  Nile  as  the  Greeks  had  been,  and  they 
explored  the  Nile  Valley  as  well  as  the  eastern  coast. 
Stanley  quotes  Abdul  Hassan  Ali,  an  Arab  geogra- 
pher, who  was  born  at  Bagdad  and  settled  in  Egypt 
in  A.D.  955,  as  saying  : 

"  I  have  seen,  in  a  geography,  a  plan  of  the  Nile 
flowing  from  the  Mountains  of  the  Moon — Jebel  Kumr. 
The  waters  burst  forth  into  twelve  springs  and  flow  into 
two  lakes,  like  unto  the  ponds  of  Bussora.  After  leaving 
these  lakes  the  waters  reunite,  and  flow  through  a  sandy 
and  mountainous  country.  The  course  of  the  Nile  is 
through  that  part  of  the  Soudan  near  the  country  of  the 
Zenj  (Zanzibar)." 

Hence  the  Arabs  believed  in  the  "  Mountains  of  the 
Moon  "  as  firmly  as  did  Ptolemy.  Edrisi,  a  twelfth- 
century  geographer,  also  tells  us  that  the  Nile  rises  from 
two  lakes,  which  discharge  their  water  into  a  third  ; 
this  is  exactly  true  of  the  Nile,  and  he  adds  that  these 
lakes  are  all  to  the  north  of  the  "  Mountains  of  the 
Moon." 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     37 

Two  centuries  later  (in  1331)  the  famous  Arab  ex- 
plorer, Sheikh  Ibn  Batuta,  during  the  course  of  his 
75,000  miles  of  wandering,  visited  the  east  coast  and 
described  Mombasa.  He  calls  it  a  large  town,  and 
speaks  of  the  natives  as  "  chaste,  honest  and  religious," 
but  he  tells  us  nothing  of  the  interior,  and  it  is  not  until 
the  seventeenth  century  that  we  get  the  first  definite 
account  of  the  East  African  snow  fields. 

An  Arab  manuscript,  of  the  year  of  the  Hegira  1098 
(a.d.  1686),  which  Stanley  gives  in  a  translation,  dis- 
cusses the  old  problem  of  the  periodic  floods  of  the 
Nile: 

"  Some  say  that  its  rise  is  caused  by  snow  melted  in 
summer,  and,  according  to  the  quantity  of  snowfall,  will 
be  the  greater  or  lesser  rise."  "  The  Nile,"  it  continues, 
"  starts  from  the  Mountains  of  Gumr  beyond  the 
Equator.  There  is  a  difference  of  opinion  as  to  the 
derivation  of  the  word  '  Gumr.'  Some  say  it  ought  to 
be  pronounced  '  Kamar,'  which  means  the  sun  ;  but  the 
traveller,  Ti  Tarshi,  says  that  it  was  called  by  that  name 
because  'the  eye  is  dazzled  by  the  great  brightness.' 
Some  say  that  people  have  ascended  the  mountain,  and 
one  of  them  began  to  laugh  and  clap  his  hands,  and 
thr6w  himself  down  on  the  further  side  of  the  mountain. 
The  others  were  afraid  of  being  seized  with  the  same 
fit,  and  so  came  back.  It  was  said  that  those  who  saw 
it  saw  bright  snows,  like  white  silver,  glistening  with 
light." 


38  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Ibn  Batuta's  visit  to  Mombasa  was  in  1331,  and  his 
account  shows  that  the  Arabs  were  then  in  undisputed 
control  of  the  coast  lands  ;  but,  at  the  end  of  the  next 
century,  the  Portuguese  arrived  upon  the  scene. 

The  first  Portuguese  expedition  to  visit  East  Africa 
was  that  of  Vasco  da  Gama,  who  rounded  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope,  and,  in  1498,  worked  his  way  north- 
ward to  Melindi,  whence  he  sailed  across  the  ocean 
to  India. 

The  various  accounts  of  his  expedition,  though  they 
differ  in  important  particulars,  give  us  a  good  idea  of 
the  state  of  the  country  at  that  time.  The  coast  towns 
were  all  under  Arab  rule,  and  were  far  more  flourishing 
than  they  have  been  in  recent  times. 

Kilwa  was  a  great  rendezvous  of  the  Arab  traders,  for 
Vasco  da  Gama's  pilot  told  him  "  that  Quilva  was  in- 
deed a  great  city,  and  traded  in  much  merchandise, 
which  came  from  abroad  in  a  great  many  ships  from 
all  parts,  especially  from  Mekkah ;  and  that,  in  the 
city,  there  were  many  kinds  of  people;  and  there  were 
some  Armenian  traders,  who  were  from  a  country 
called  Armenia,  and  it  was  said  that  these  people  were 
Christians." 

Vasco  da  Gama  arrived  at  Mombasa  on  7th  April, 
1498.  He  describes  it  as  "a  great  city  of  trade,  with 
many  ships."  The  king  sent  the  explorers  "  a  large 
boat  laden  with  fowls,  sheep,  sugar  canes,  citrons,  lemons, 
and  large,  sweet  oranges,  the  best  that  had  ever  been 


•  DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     39 

seen  " ;  he  also  sent  "  a  respectable  old  Moor  "  to  wel- 
come Da  Gama,  and  to  say  that  "  his  pleasure  would 
be  complete  when  the  ships  were  at  anchor  within  his 
port,  if  he  could  go  in  person  to  visit  him  on  board  of 
his  ship "  ;  and  he  hoped  "  that  peace  would  last  for 
ever  between  him  and  their  king." 

The  old  Moor  returned  with  two  of  the  Portuguese, 
one  of  whom  was  Peter  Diaz.    They  were  promised  that 

*  they  should  have,  without  money,  all  that  they  saw 
and  required,  or  that  they  asked  for."  They  were  taken 
to  the  houses  of  some  Moors,  "  who  feigned  to  be 
Christians,  and  who  showed  them  beads  with  crosses, 
which  they  kissed  and  put  in  their  eyes,  and  did  great 
honour  to  our  people  for  being  Christians,  making  them 
sit  down  and  eat  cakes  of  rice,  with  butter  and  honey, 
and  plenty  of  fruit." 

Unfortunately,  what  appears  to  have  been  a  misunder- 
standing broke  off  these  friendly  relations,  and  deprived 
us  of  any  detailed  account  of  Mombasa  in  the  year 
1498.  The  entrance  to  Mombasa  Harbour  is  obstructed 
by  coral  reefs,  and  its  navigation  is  often  difficult.  While 
working  through  the  channel,  Vasco  da  Gama's  ship 
"  missed  stays,"  and  began  to  drift  towards  the  bank. 
The  anchors  were  dropped,  sails  struck,  and  the  danger 
averted.  These  proceedings  were  accompanied  by  much 
rushing  and  shouting  on  the  part  of  the  Portuguese 
crew ;  the  native  pilots,  according  to  one  account,  were 
so  terrified  that  some  of  them  sprang  overboard.    There- 


40  BRITISH   EA.ST   AFRICA 

upon,  Vasco  da  Gama  suspected  treachery  ;  he  seized  the 
last  of  the  pilots,  and,  by  applications  of  boiling  grease, 
made  the  poor  wretch  confess  that  the  pilots  had  been 
ordered  to  wreck  the  ships.  Vasco  da  Gama,  accord- 
ingly, at  once  sailed  northward.  As  Peter  Diaz,  one  of 
the  sailors  who  was  ashore  at  the  time  of  the  mishap, 
was  kindly  treated  by  the  natives,  and  at  the  first 
opportunity  sent  to  India  after  Da  Gama,  the  Portuguese 
suspicions  were  probably  unfounded. 

At  Melindi,  the  next  important  port  north  of  Mom- 
basa, Vasco  da  Gama  made  a  long  stay,  which  enabled 
him  to  give  a  detailed  account  of  that  town.  This 
description  is  worth  notice,  as  showing  the  wealth  and 
civilization  which  the  country  then  enjoyed,  and  the 
simple  friendliness  with  which  the  natives  were  prepared 
to  welcome  the  new  comers.  In  Vasco  da  Gama's  de- 
scription of  Melindi,  he  tells  us  that  "  the  city  was  a 
great  one,  of  noble  buildings,  and  surrounded  by  walls, 
and,  placed  immediately  on  the  shore,  it  made  an  im- 
posing appearance."  The  "  king  "  invited  the  Portuguese 
ashore,  and  promised  them  every  hospitality.  But,  re- 
membering Mombasa,  the  suspicious  da  Gama  declined 
the  invitation,  on  the  ground  that  "  he  and  his  men  had 
been  forbidden  by  their  sovereign  to  land  in  foreign 
countries."     As  Camoens  puts  it — da  Gama 

"  obeys  his  king's  command. 
That,  till  his  orient  mission  be  complete, 
Nor  coast  nor  harbour  tempt  him  from  the  fleet. 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     41 

This  excuse  was  accepted  by  the  king,  who  forthwith 
made  the  expedition  a  generous  present  of  food.  He 
sent  them  a  boat  "  laden  with  large  copper  kettles,  and 
cauldrons  of  boiled  rice,  and  very  fat  sheep  roasted 
whole,  and  boiled,  and  much  good  butter,  and  thin  cakes 
of  wheat  and  rice  flour,  and  many  fowls,  boiled  and 
roast,  stuffed  with  rice  inside ;  also  much  vegetables 
and  figs,  cocoanuts,  and  sugar  canes ;  and  all  in  such 
quantities,  that  all  the  crews  of  the  ships  were  sated." 
The  Portuguese  were  soon  convinced  of  the  natives' 
sincerity,  and  landed  in  the  town.  The  king  looked 
after  his  visitors  with  oriental  hospitality.  "  In  order 
that  our  people  should  not  be  cheated  in  the  price  01 
things,  the  king  ordered  it  to  be  cried  all  over  the  city, 
that  nobody  was  to  sell  anything  to  the  Portuguese  for 
more  than  it  was  worth,  and  that  if  any  one  did  so,  he 
would  send  and  burn  his  house,  so  that  all  observed 
this  order."  To  mark  his  gratitude  for  the  help  given 
him  in  the  refitting  of  his  ships  for  the  voyage  to  India, 
Vasco  da  Gama  erected  a  pillar  on  an  adjacent  head- 
land, and  he  told  the  king  that  he  had  been  ordered 
not  to  do  so  "except  in  a  country  in  which  they 
knew  true  friendship  and  sincere  love,  such  as  you, 
sire,  have  shown  us  out  of  the  greatness  of  your  good- 
ness." 

The  friendly  relations  between  the  Portuguese  and 
the  East  African  Arabs  did  not,  however,  long  continue, 
Mvita,  the  native  name  for  Mombasa,  means  "  battle," 


42  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

and  for  some  time  after  the  arrival  of  the  Portuguese, 
the  name  was  only  too  well  deserved. 

After  Vasco  da  Gama's  return  to  Lisbon,  a  fleet  was 
sent  to  India  to  annex  and  proselytize  the  country. 
Its  commander,  Cabral,  was  ordered  to  begin  with 
preaching,  and  if  that  failed,  to  proceed  to  "  the  sharp 
determination  of  the  sword."  In  1500  he  looted  Mom- 
basa, to  avenge  the  supposed  treachery  to  da  Gama. 
In  1503  the  town  was  again  visited  by  a  Portuguese 
fleet,  and  compelled  to  pay  tribute.  In  August,  1505, 
it  was  attacked  and  destroyed  by  Francisco  Almeyda 
with  a  fleet  of  twenty  ships.  Three  years  later  the 
island  was  formally  annexed  to  Portugal.  But  the 
inhabitants  were  turbulent,  and  gave  so  much  trouble 
that  in  1528  Don  Zuna  da  Cunha  was  sent  to  raze  the 
city  to  the  ground,  and  it  was  captured  after  a  desperate 
defence  of  four  months.  Later  on  the  city  was  rebuilt, 
and  its  history  was  comparatively  uneventful  until  1586, 
when  a  Turkish  fleet,  under  AH  Bey,  visited  Mombasa, 
which  promptly  placed  itself  under  the  suzerainty  of 
the  Porte. 

A  fleet  from  India,  under  Alfonso  de  Melo  Bombeyro, 
punished  this  act  of  rebellion  and  defiance  by  again 
burning  the  town.  Mombasa  was  soon  rebuilt,  but 
only  to  be  burnt  again — this  time  by  a  tribe  of  southern 
cannibals  known  as  the  Zimba,  whose  name  is  still 
current  in  the  legends  of  the  Suahili.  The  Zimba  were 
soon   expelled  by  the  Portuguese,  who,  to  secure  their 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     43 

hold  on  the  island,  built  the  fort  of  Mombasa  in  1 594 ; 
the  stone  for  the  building  is  said  to  have  been  brought 
ready  trimmed  from  Portugal. 

The  struggle  between  the  Portuguese  and  the  Arabs 
continued.  In  1630  a  revolt  broke  out  under  an  apos- 
tate mission  boy,  Yusuf  bin  Ahmed,  who  attacked  the 
fort.  The  Portuguese  capitulated  on  condition  that 
their  lives  should  be  spared,  but  the  treacherous  natives 
shot  all  their  prisoners  with  arrows.  A  powerful  force 
from  India  landed  in  Mombasa  to  avenge  the  massacre. 
Yusuf  defended  the  fortress  for  three  months,  then 
dismantled  it,  and  fled  to  Arabia  in  a  captured  Portu- 
guese ship.  In  1635  Xerxas  de  Cabreira  rebuilt  the 
fort,  which  still  stands,  and  is  the  most  picturesque  and 
interesting  building  in  British  East  Africa. 

Until  1660  the  Portuguese  supremacy  was  undis- 
puted, but  then  the  Mazrui,  the  leading  Arab  clan  on 
the  east  coast,  entered  into  alliance  with  the  Sultan 
of  Muscat.  This  potentate  is  more  correctly  known 
as  the  I  man  of  Oman,  the  south-eastern  province  of 
Arabia.  The  allied  Arab  forces  captured  the  fort  of 
Mombasa  after  a  five  years'  struggle,  but  the  Portu- 
guese still  maintained  their  hold  over  the  town  and 
over  part  of  the  island  ;  but  in  1698  the  Arabs  were 
finally  victorious,  and  the  Portuguese  for  the  last  time 
were  expelled  from  Mombasa. 

The  Portuguese,  during  their  occupation  of  Mombasa, 
held   it  rather  as  a  point  of  departure  for  India  than 


44  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

for  the  sake  of  the  country  itself  They  seemed  to  take 
small  interest  in  the  interior,  and  we  learn  little  about 
it  from  them.  Fernandez  de  Enciso,  in  his  Suma  de 
Geographia  ( 1 5  30),  states  that  "  West  of  this  port 
[Mombasa]  stands  the  Mount  Olympus  of  Ethiopia, 
which  is  exceedingly  high,  and  beyond  it  are  the 
'  Mountains  of  the  Moon,'  in  which  are  the  sources  of 
the  Nile."  His  Mount  Olympus,  west  of  Mombasa,  is 
probably  Kilima  Njaro. 

De  Barros,  in  1552,  records  that  the  Arabs  knew  the 
fi  Quilimanse  ^  for  thirty  days'  journey  into  the  interior, 
and  that  negro  caravans  came  to  the  coast,  from  the 
interior,  with  gold. 

Much  of  the  Portuguese  information  regarding  the 
interior  was  doubtless  derived  from  the  Arabs,  but  that 
some  of  the  Portuguese  themselves  went  inland  is 
known  from  various  records:  thus  Marmol  (1667)  re- 
ports that  a  Portuguese  named  Fonseco  explored  the 
Quilimanse  for  five  days'  journey  into  the  interior.  It 
was  probably  the  Portuguese  who  supplied  the  informa- 
tion in  John  Senex's  map  of  171 1,  which  represents 
Baringo  as  an  isolated  lake  without  an  outlet,  although 
the  contrary  was  incorrectly  maintained  by  Livingstone 
and  Burton,  two  and  a  half  centuries  later. 

That  Portuguese  missionaries  worked  their  way  in- 

'  The  name  Quilimanse  has  been  given  to  the  Sabaki,  Tana 
and  Juba.  In  this  case  it  is  probably  intended  for  the  Sabaki, 
as  the  mouth  of  the  river  is  said  to  be  at  Melindi. 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     45 

land  is  also  probable  from  Sanson  d'Abbeville's  map. 
Opposite  the  head  of  the  Tana  and  the  northernmost 
tributary  of  the  Sabaki,  i.e.  the  Athi,  is  an  isolated 
mountain,  corresponding  in  position  to  Kenya.  Against 
it  is  written,  "  N.  D.  Monasterium,"  which  suggests  that 
the  Portuguese  had  a  mission  station  in  that  district, 
as  they  certainly  had  in  some  of  the  other  localities 
thus  marked  on  the  map. 

In  Equatorial  Africa,  however,  the  Portuguese  made 
no  such  extensive  explorations  inland  as  they  did  further 
south  in  the  Zambesi  basin.  The  first  detailed  accounts 
of  journeys  in  the  interior  we  owe  to  the  Arabs,  who 
succeeded  to  supreme  power  on  the  coast  after  the 
expulsion  of  the  Portuguese.  To  Arab  traders  belongs 
the  honour  of  having  first  explored  the  interior  of 
British  East  Africa,  which  they  traversed  in  every 
direction.  Most  of  the  results  of  their  work  have,  how- 
ever, been  lost,  as  there  are  no  written  records  ;  but  a 
number  of  itineraries  were  collected  by  Denhardt  and 
published  by  him  in  188 1.  In  these  itineraries  Den- 
hardt constructed  a  map  which  marks  nearly  every 
important  lake,  mountain,  and  river  in  British  East 
Africa.  The  outlines  are  crude,  and  the  relative  posi- 
tions often  incorrect,  but  this  map  of  1881  was  much 
fuller  of  detail  than  maps  published  some  years  later 
by  European  travellers.  The  journeys  of  these  brave 
Arab  and  Suahili  traders  must  be  counted  among  the 


46  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

most  remarkable  feats  of  travel  in  the  history  of  British 
East  Africa,  and  their  names  are  worthy  of  an  honoured 
place  in  the  roll  of  East  African  explorers. 

Long  before  any  European  explorer  had  reached 
Naivasha  or  Baringo  these  lakes  were  marked  on 
Denhardt's  map,  on  the  faith  of  the  journey  of  Kam- 
tima  of  Tanga.  This  trader  started  inland  from 
Freretown,  the  Church  Mission  Settlement  opposite 
Mombasa.  He  marched  across  the  Nyika  to  Lake 
Jipe,  at  the  south-eastern  foot  of  Kilima  Njaro  ;  thence 
he  struck  northward  past  Taveta,  round  the  western 
flank  of  Kilima  Njaro,  and  over  the  Kapte  Plains  to 
Ngongo  Bagas,  the  famous  trading  rendezvous  at 
the  south-western  end  of  the  Kikuyu  country.  Thence 
he  marched  along  the  Rift  Valley  to  Lake  Naivasha, 
and  again  on  to  the  salt  lake  of  Nakuro  and  the 
river  Njoki  (Nyuki),  which  flows  through  Njemps  into 
Baringo.  From  Njemps,  Kamtima  continued  along 
the  Rift  Valley,  for  two  marches,  to  Kamasia,  and  thence 
to  the  country  of  the  Suk.  Three  days  more  took  him 
to  a  lake  which  Denhardt  records  as  Baringo,  but  which 
must  be  Lake  Rudolf,  as  the  true  Baringo  is  only  six 
miles,  and  not  six  marches,  from  Njemps. 

Further  information  regarding  the  Rift  Valley,  in  the 
Naivasha  to  Baringo  district,  was  obtained  by  Kaptao 
of  Mombasa,  who  reported  the  existence  of  Doenyo 
Ngai,  a  still  active  steam  vent  in  Masai-land,  and  who 
successfully  crossed    the   dangerous   country   of  Sotik. 


DAWN  OF  EAST  AFRICAN  GEOGRAPHY     47 

Kaptao  knew  Lake  Baringo,  and  of  the  existence  to 
the  south  of  it  of  the  now  well-known  hot  springs  of 
Suva  ya  Moto,  and  the  adjacent  lake  (Lake  Losuguta), 
with  "  hot,  bitter,  stinking  waters."  The  truth  of 
Kaptao's  report  the  present  author  found  to  his  cost 
when  he  reached  that  lake  waterless  in  1893. 

Another  famous  Arab  traveller  was  Ferhaji  of  Pan- 
gani,  who  crossed  the  Mau  plateau  from  Naivasha  to 
the  shores  of  the  Victoria  Nyanza  in  Kavirondo ; 
thence  he  returned  to  Lake  Baringo  by  a  march  which 
gives  the  first  information  about  the  now  famous 
locality  of  Eldoma,  the  ravine  by  which  the  Uganda 
road  leaves  the  Rift  Valley.  He  refers  to  the  locality 
as  Eldomiano.  Ferhaji  was  quite  clear  as  to  the  dis- 
tinction between  the  three  lakes,  the  Victoria  Nyanza, 
Baringo,  and  Lake  Rudolf  The  first  he  calls,  ap- 
parently from  its  size,  the  Bahari  dja  Pili,  "  the  Second 
Sea  " ;  the  name  Baringo,  he  says,  comes  from  Bahari 
Ndogo,  "  or  Little  Lake,"  while  Lake  Rudolf  he  refers 
to  as  Samburu.  Ferhaji  had  reached  Lake  Rudolf 
from  Naivasha,  across  the  western  margin  of  Laikipia, 
through  the  bamboo  forests  of  Miansini,  over  the 
grazing  plain  of  Rangatan  Busi  (Angata  Wus  as 
Denhardt  spells  it),  round  the  northern  flanks  of 
Settima,  and  over  the  wooded  ranges  of  Subugo,  of 
most  of  which  places  we  first  hear  in  the  narrative  of 
this  enterprising  Suahili. 

Another  remarkable  journey  of  Ferhaji's  was   from 


48  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Mombasa  past  Kilima  Njaro  to  Naivasha,  and  thence 
across  Laikipia  to  Ndoro  at  the  western  foot  of  Kenya. 
He  skirted  the  Kenya  forest  belt  to  the  north,  and 
crossed  the  Djombeni  Mountains,  a  range  of  which  we 
first  hear  from  European  travellers,  after  the  expedition 
of  Chanler  and  von  Hohnel  in  1893.  Ferhaji,  in  the  same 
journey,  also  reached  the  vast  swamp  of  Lake  Lorian. 

The  Kenya  district  was  visited  by  Mkaba  of  Ikanga, 
who  made  the  first  recorded  traverse  of  Laikipia,  from 
the  foot  of  Kenya  to  Baringo. 

Another  route  to  Lake  Rudolf,  by  the  eastern  foot 
of  Kenya,  was  followed  by  Kamtjimi  of  Wasin.  This 
intelligent  trader  brought  back  with  him  some  remark- 
able information  about  a  tribe  of  natives  who  live  on  a 
high  mountain  on  the  eastern  shore  of  Lake  Rudolf; 
these  natives  are  said  to  be  "  Ristiani,"  and  to  "  hold  their 
goods  in  common,  and  believe  in  Issa  and  Mariam ;  and 
are  therefore  no  heathens."  They  trade  with  the  Somali 
and  Abyssinians. 

No  travellers  have  yet  found  any  Christians  in  this 
district,  or  any  record  of  faith  in  Jesus  or  Mary,  but  the 
persistent  native  rumours  of  the  existence  of  such  a 
tribe,  in  the  district  east  of  Lake  Rudolf,  render  it 
probable  that  there  is  a  clan  in  that  district  which  has 
retained  some  relics  of  the  Christian  faith,  gained  by 
their  ancestors  from  Abyssinia,  or  from  the  missions  of 
the  Portuguese. 


Lig-fic    Tons    I'.t'quutcur 


C5 

M  L   R    I    D    I    O    N    A    L 


E   T  H    I    0   P    I    E    N 


r 


Appendix 

Account  of  the  East  African  Coast  in  "  The 

Periplus  of  the  Red  Sea,"  translated 

BY  Professor  Tucker 

"  From  Opone  [i.e.  Afun  or  Hafun]  the  shore  drawing 
more  to  the  south/  first  there  come  what  are  called  the 
Little  and  Big  Sheer-crests  of  Azania  ~[by  means  of 
places  for  casting  anchor,  rivers]  to  the  extent  of  six  runs, 
the  course  being  now  due  S.W.  Then  came  the  Little 
Beach  and  the  Big  Beach  for  another  six  runs,  and  next 
(there  follow)  in  succession  the  runs  ^  of  Azania ;  in 
the  first  place,  that  which  bears  the  name  of  Sarapion, 
then  that  of  Nicon,  following  which  are  a  number  of 
rivers  and  other  anchorages  one  after  another,  at  in- 
tervals of  stages  and  runs,  to  the  number  of  seven  al- 
together, as  far  as  the  Pyralaoi  islands  and  what  is  called 
the  Channel,  from  which,  a  little  up    from  the  S.W.,'^ 

'  i.e.  the  shore  _^rsf  runs  S.,  and  then,  when  the  Apocopa 
begin,  it  runs  exactly  S.W.  This  I  gather  from  the  Greek,  not 
the  Atlas. 

^  Text  corrupt.  (I  suppose  he  said  that  there  were  spots  where 
you  could  cast  anchor.) 

^  The  language  denotes  that  the  name  was  established  and 
recognised  for  that  part. 

*  i.e.  '•'■back  up"  from  S.W,  and  more  towards  E.  So,  at  least,  I 
should  understand  it  if  I  had  no  maps  and  no  knowledge  of  the 
place  referred  to. 

49  E 


50  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

after  two  runs  of  a  day  and  night    *     -x-     *  (running)^ 
exactly  westerly^  there  meets  you  the  island  ^  Menuthias/ 

'  Text  meaningless. 

^  The  name  slightly  corrupted. 

^  i.e.  the  island,  as  you  meet  it  in  coming  to  it,  stretches  to 
W.  But  the  text  immediately  following  is  a  jargon,  and  there  is  no 
deciding  precisely  to  what  ivap   avrrjv  rrjv  Bva-vp  refers. 

*  If  by  this  island  he  meant  Zanzibar,  it  is  most  remarkable  that 
he  did  not  mention  Pemba.  His  Trora/xol  is  applicable  to  a  "  stream  " 
of  any  size,  and  need  not  be  taken  as  much  argument.  (I  don't 
know  whether  there  are  "  streams  "  in  Pemba.)  On  the  other 
hand,  his  next  section  carries  us  past  Zanzibar,  and  ignores  it  if 
ikis  island  is  Pemba  ;  and  surely  he  would  mention  Zanzibar.  I 
feel  that  there  is  no  sort  of  certainty  as  to  the  amount  of  accidental 
omission  from  our  text.  The  letters  fiT{vr]8ia>n  may  be  all  that 
remains  of  something  (beginning  with  eKreivei  or  the  like)  which 
dropped  out  because  followed  by  a  similar-looking  clause  begin- 
ning with  dra  or  the  like.  It  is  useless  to  guess.  On  the  whole, 
I  feel  convmced  that  he  has  lumped  Pemba  and  Zanzibar  together — 
to  this  extent,  that  the  island  which  "  meets  "  you  "  a  little  way 
back  from  S.W."  is  Pemba,  but  the  general  description  is  of 
Zanzibar.  In  other  words,  if  you  come  your  "two  runs  of  a  day 
and  a  night "  from  "  the  Channel,"  you  will  be  "  met,"  a  "  little 
more  E.  of  your  S.W.  course,"  by  an  island  which  presents 
you  with  a  coast  "running  west."  This  ought  to  be  the  N. 
coast  of  Pemba.  Now,  assuming  that  this  N.  coast  of  Pemba 
was  familiar  by  sight  to  our  sailor  friends,  they  probably  knew 
little  more  about  the  island,  although,  again,  they  did  know  some- 
thing more  of  Zanzibar.  In  any  case  our  author  appears  to  me  to 
have  got  already  a  little  out  of  his  own  distance,  and  to  be,  as  I 
say,  lumping  information. 

Nevertheless,  the  gap  may  be  considerable  in  the  corrupt 
portion,  and  he  may  have  spoken  of  Pemba  first  and  Zanzibar  next. 
Omissions  of  the  sort  are  not  rare  in  Greek  MSS. 


APPENDIX  51 

about  300  stades  [37  miles]  from  the  land,  low-lying  and 
covered  with  trees,  in  which  are  rivers,  and  very  many 
sorts  of  birds,  and  tortoises.  Of  wild  animals,  it  con- 
tains none  at  all  except  crocodiles,^  but  they  hurt  no 
man.  There  are  in  it  little  boats  sewn  together,  or 
made  of  a  single  log,  which  they  use  for  fishing  and 
catching  turtle.  In  this  island  they  also  snare  them 
in  a  peculiar  manner  with  baskets,  which  they  let  down 
instead  of  nets  about  the  openings  [inlets]  of  the  fore- 
shore." 

'  We  have  no  right  to  suppose  that  the  author  thought  them  to 
be  anything  else,  whatever  they  may  have  been  in  reality. 


Chapter  IV 
THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS 

"  He  hath  showed  His  people  the  power  of  His  works,  that  He 
may  give  them  the  heritage  of  the  heathen." 

THE  geographical  reports  of  the  early  Portuguese 
and  Arab  traders  were  unconvincing  and  in- 
adequate. They  were  the  work  of  men  who 
kept  no  journals,  who  took  no  observations,  and  who, 
on  their  return,  could  only  tell  rough  yarns,  like  those 
on  which  Defoe  founded  his  story  of  Captain  Singleton's 
adventures  in  Madagascar  and  march  across  Africa. 
The  critical  geographers  of  the  early  part  of  the 
present  century,  accordingly,  dismissed  all  the  available 
evidence  as  mere  travellers'  tales,  unworthy  of  notice 
outside  of  a  nursery.  Hence,  while  maps  of  the  seven- 
teenth and  eighteenth  centuries  were  full  of  details 
regarding  the  interior  of  Africa,  the  maps  of  the  con- 
tinent, between  1820  and  1850,  represented  the  whole 
interior  as  an  unknown,  unvisited  blank. 

The  tales  of  the  Arab  traders,  however,  roused  the 
curiosity  of  more  skilled  explorers,  and  thus  led  to  the 
next  stage  in  the  exploration  of  the  interior,  the  work 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  53 

of  the  geographical  pioneers.  The  pioneers  in  the  ex- 
ploration of  Eastern  Equatorial  Africa  were  Dr.  Lud- 
wig  Krapf  and  Sir  Richard  Burton,  who  were  sent  to 
the  East  African  coast  on  missions  at  a  time  when 
Europe  had  little  concern  or  interest  in  that  region. 
Both  men  fell  under  the  spell  of  its  singular  and  power- 
ful fascination. 

Burton,  with  his  usual  facility  in  acquiring  languages 
and  winning  the  confidence  of  Orientals,  gained  the 
intimacy  of  the  men  who  led  caravans  into  the  interior, 
and  of  slaves  who  remembered  the  land  of  their  birth. 
The  natives  told  him  of  great  lakes,  one  of  them  so 
vast  and  stormy  that  they  called  it  the  "  Second  Sea." 
These  tales  roused  Burton's  interest,  and  he  resolved  to 
explore  the  mysterious  region  around  these  inland  seas. 

Krapf  was  a  man  of  quite  another  type  of  mind. 
He  was  a  simple-hearted,  pure-souled  evangelist,  who 
had  settled  on  the  eastern  coast  near  Mombasa,  in  the 
service  of  the  Church  Missionary  Society.  His  interests 
were  religious,  not  scientific.  At  first  he  cared  nothing 
about  geographical  exploration,  except  as  the  instru- 
ment by  which  the  Gospel  could  be  carried  to  the  people 
of  the  interior.  He  studied  the  character  of  the  natives 
in  order  to  discover  how  to  win  their  souls,  and  he  com- 
piled dictionaries  and  grammars  of  their  languages 
that  the  people  might  learn  the  teachings  of  Christ. 

The  work  of  Krapf  and  Burton  lay  on  the  coast 
lands,  but  they  both  looked  eagerly  westward   at  the 


54  BRITISH  EAST   AFRICA 

wall  of  the  East  African  plateau,  and  longed  to  climb 
it.  Krapf  prayed  daily  that  he  might  scale  that  "  ram- 
part of  East  African  heathendom,"  and  Burton  made 
up  his  mind  that  he  would  follow  the  strange  roads 
that  led  across  it  into  the  darkness  of  the  unknown  land 
beyond. 

Burton  was  the  more  successful  in  rousing  English 
interest  in  the  interior  of  the  country,  for  Krapf s 
reports  were  discredited  as  those  of  an  untrained, 
unreliable  missionary.  But  to  Krapf  is  due  the 
honour  of  beginning  European  exploration  in  Eastern 
Equatorial  Africa. 

Ludwig  Krapf  was  born  on  the  nth  January,  1810, 
and  was  the  son  of  a  Wurtemberg  farmer.  As  he  tells 
us  in  quaint  narrative :  "  My  father,  whose  circum- 
stances were  easy,  followed  farming,  and  lived  in  the 
village  of  Derendingen,  near  Tubingen."  He  was  edu- 
cated at  Tubingen,  where  he  showed  great  zeal  as  a 
student.  He  suffered  severely  during  his  passage 
through  a  period  of  philosophic  doubt.  When  his 
mental  struggle  was  over,  he  resolved  to  devote  his  life 
to  the  African  mission  service.  He  was  trained  for  the 
work  at  a  college  in  Basel,  and  then  sent  by  the  Church 
Missionary  Society  to  Shoa,  a  province  on  the  south- 
western border  of  Abyssinia.  He  was  well  received  by 
the  King  of  Shoa,  and  laboured  there  for  some  years ; 
then  he  went  back  to  Europe  for  a  visit,  and  married 


UK.     lAinVU;    KRAl'T. 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  55 

during  his  stay  there.  On  his  return  to  Africa,  in  1842, 
he  found  that  Shoa  had  been  closed  to  Protestant  mis- 
sionaries, a  proceeding  which  he  attributed  to  the 
intrigues  of  a  French  mission. 

Krapf  had  taken  especial  interest  in  the  tribe  of 
Galla  who  live  in  the  country  between  Abyssinia  and 
Mombasa,  and  he  thought  that,  as  he  could  not  reach 
the  Galla  through  Shoa,  he  could  do  so  from  the  eastern 
coast.  He  and  his  wife,  accordingly,  started  from 
Aden  in  an  Arab  dhow;  the  vessel  was  nearly  wrecked, 
and  had  to  put  back  to  Aden.  A  second  attempt  was 
more  successful.  On  the  23rd  of  November,  1843,  they 
started  south  again  in  a  smaller  dhow,  under  the  com- 
mand of  a  native  from  Mombasa.  They  made  slow 
progress  in  the  Gulf  of  Aden,  and  it  was  not  until  i8th 
December  that  they  rounded  the  eastern  horn  of  Africa. 
They  then  had  a  fairer  wind,  made  a  better  voyage,  and 
landed  at  Mombasa  on  4th  January,  1844. 

Krapf  immediately  began  to  search  for  the  most 
promising  field  for  work.  He  made  repeated  excursions 
to  Zanzibar,  to  secure  the  support  of  the  Sultan,  and  to 
find  the  best  site  for  his  mission  station.  He  finally 
resolved  on  Mombasa,  where  he  settled  in  June.  The 
natives  of  Mombasa  have  a  proverb,  "  Better  a  useful 
infidel  than  a  useless  believer,"  and  in  that  tolerant  and 
practical  spirit  Krapf  was  welcomed.  The  Kadi  of 
Mombasa  at  once  helped  Krapf  in  the  translation  of 
Genesis   into    Suahili.     A   month  after  the   settlement, 


56  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

Krapf  lost  his  wife  and  his  new-born  child,  and  the 
bereaved  missionary  was  left  to  work  at  his  colossal  task 
alone.  He  made  an  excursion  into  the  country  of  the 
Wa-nyika,  thinking  that  a  mission  there  might  be  more 
useful  than  among  the  civilized  Mohammedan  people 
of  Mombasa.  He  returned  disappointed  at  the  mental 
condition  of  the  natives.  "  Drunkenness  and  materialism 
have  completely  blunted  their  perception  of  everything 
connected  with  spiritual  religion,"  wrote  Krapf;  and  he 
sadly  confessed  that  among  these  people,  "  for  the  pre- 
sent, no  great  missionary  results  were  to  be  obtained." 
But  he  had  an  unshaken  belief  that  "  Ethiopia  shall 
soon  stretch  out  her  hands  unto  God." 

To  enable  Christian  missionaries  to  respond  when 
the  appeal  came,  Krapf  translated  the  whole  of  the 
New  Testament  into  Suahili,  and  compiled  a  grammar 
and  dictionary  of  the  language. 

Next  year  (1845)  he  started  inland  again,  to  visit  some 
Wa-kamba,  hoping  that  they  would  be  better  disciples 
than  the  Wa-nyika,  but  he  did  not  reach  the  Wa-kamba 
country,  and  returned  to  the  Wa-nyika,  who  promised 
him  every  assistance.  "  Our  land,  our  trees  and  houses, 
our  sons  and  daughters,  are  all  thine,"  said  the  elders,  in 
reply  to  his  request  for  permission  to  settle  among  them. 

In  1845  Krapf  was  joined  by  Rebmann,  the  second  of 
the  two  great  missionary  pioneers  of  Eastern  Africa. 

Krapf  had  arranged  to  found  his  station  on  the  hills 
at  Rabai,  one  of  the  spurs  of  the  East  African  plateau. 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  57 

about  ten  miles  from  Mombasa.  So  Rebmann  and  he 
went  together  and  asked  the  elders  for  the  promised 
help.  "  The  birds  have  nests,  and  the  Wa-zungu 
[Europeans]  too  must  have  houses,"  replied  the  elders  ; 
and  the  natives,  though  irregularly  and  unskilfully,  gave 
the  missionaries  such  materials  as  they  had,  and  helped 
them  to  build  their  home. 

There  the  two  men  laboured  faithfully  and  patiently 
to  teach  the  natives,  to  undermine  the  influence  of  the 
secret  societies,  and  to  abolish  the  old  pagan  rites.  They 
secured  a  few  converts,  but  only  a  few.  The  awful 
power  of  secret  societies,  the  profound  faith  in  fetishes, 
the  reluctance  of  the  natives  to  abandon  the  ceremonies 
connected  with  the  initiation  of  boys  into  manhood,  and 
their  enjoyment  of  the  orgies  that  accompanied  the 
women's  "  Muansa,"  were  all  serious  obstacles  to  the 
missionaries'  success.  Krapf  and  Rebmann  worked  on, 
undaunted  by  the  difficulties  of  their  task.  Krapf  learnt 
the  language  of  the  Wa-nyika  ;  he  wrote  a  primer  of  its 
grammar,  and  collected  much  valuable  information  re- 
garding the  ordeals,  institutions,  and  customs  of  the 
natives. 

But  the  two  missionaries  sadly  realized  that  they  were 
making  no  sensible  impression  on  the  habits  of  the  tribe, 
and  they  yearned  for  a  people  less  drunken  and  less 
sensual  than  the  Wa-nyika,  and  less  influenced  by 
Mohammedanism  than  the  inhabitants  of  the  coast  towns. 
Four  days'  journey  inland  from  Rabai  the  missionaries 


58  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

saw  the  rugged  peaks  of  Kilibasi  and  Kadiaro  rising 
above  the  plateau  on  their  western  horizon.  The 
traders  who  knew  the  regions  beyond  these  moun- 
tains told  the  missionaries  weird  stories  of  pygmies  and 
cannibals,  of  white-capped,  lofty  mountains,  of  the 
"  Second  Sea,"  and  of  a  vast  western  morass  which  is 
the  end  of  the  world.  Little  by  little  these  stories 
though  dismissed  at  first  as  "  fabulous  tales,"  had  their 
influence  :  they  roused  in  the  two  brave  missionaries 
a  keen  interest  in  the  western  land. 

Krapf  had  heard  some  of  these  stories  before  in 
Abyssinia,  where  he  had  been  told  of  a  dwarf  tribe,  the 
Doko  ;  and  apparently  the  same  race  were  now  reported 
to  him  by  the  east  coast  traders  under  the  name  of  the 
Wa-bilikimo.  But  what  especially  interested  the  mis- 
sionaries were  the  rumours  of  Christian  tribes  in  the 
interior. 

Krapf,  when  in  Shoa,  had  heard  of  a  tribe  of  white 
Christian  Galla,  and  of  the  land  of  Kambat,  "  where  a 
small  nation  of  Christians,  with  fifteen  churches  and 
monasteries,  is  said  to  have  retained  its  existence." 

Hence,  as  the  missionaries  began  to  despair  of  the 
Wa-nyika,  their  thoughts  turned  to  the  people  of  the 
interior,  and,  in  1847,  they  definitely  resolved  to  carry 
the  Gospel  to  the  inland  tribes.  It  was  decided  that 
Rebmann  should  work  due  westward  from  Mombasa, 
while  Krapf  was  to  endeavour  to  reach  his  old  goal, 
Galla-land. 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  59 

The  inland  mission  was  begun  in  October,  1847,  when 
Rebmann,  with  six  Wa-nyika  and  two  "  Mohammedans  " 
[Suahili],  started  on  the  first  European  expedition  into 
the  interior  of  British  East  Africa.  The  journey  was 
short,  and  only  lasted  a  fortnight :  its  goal  was  the  peak 
of  Kadiaro,  some  eighty  miles  west  of  Mombasa.  Reb- 
mann brought  back  such  a  favourable  report  of  the 
mountain  country,  of  the  healthiness  of  its  climate,  and 
the  friendliness  of  its  inhabitants,  that  the  two  mission- 
aries were  eager  to  establish  a  station  there.  "  As 
regards  a  mission,"  they  wrote,  "  we  can  only  say  that  it 
is  very  feasible  and  very  desirable.  The  way  is  clear." 
And  Krapf  dreamed  of  a  chain  of  mission  stations 
stretching  right  across  Equatorial  Africa,  from  the 
Mom.basa  to  the  Atlantic  shore. 

A  few  months  later  Rebmann  started  inland  again 
on  a  more  ambitious  errand.  The  missionaries  had 
heard  strange  tales  about  Kilima  Njaro,  and  Rebmann 
proposed  to  visit  Chagga,  the  trading  station  at  the 
south-eastern  foot  of  the  mountain.  The  Governor  of 
Mombasa  at  first  opposed  the  undertaking;  he  was 
reluctant  to  let  Rebmann  expose  himself  to  such  risks. 
"  For,"  said  he,  "  people  who  have  ascended  the  mountain 
have  been  slain  by  the  spirits,  their  feet  and  hands  have 
been  stiffened,  their  powder  has  hung  fire,  and  all  kinds 
of  disasters  have  befallen  them."  Rebmann  promised 
that  he  would  not  go  "  too  near  the  fine  sand,"  and 
left  Rabai  for   the  interior  on    27th  April,   1848.      On 


6o  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

May  II,  "about  ten  o'clock,"  he  tells  us  in  his  journal, 
"  I  saw  the  summit  of  one  of  the  peaks  covered  with 
a  dazzlingly  white  cloud.  My  guide  called  the  white 
which  I  saw,  merely  '  Beredi,'  cold  ;  it  was  perfectly 
clear  to  me,  however,  that  it  could  be  nothing  else  but 
snow."  Rebmann  returned  to  the  coast,  on  June  ii, 
to  announce  the  discovery  that  Kilima  Njaro  is  capped 
with  perpetual  snow. 

In  November  of  the  same  year  Rebmann  started  on 
a  third  expedition,  intending  to  reach  Kikuyu  ;  his  party 
was  larger,  consisting  of  sixteen  natives,  armed,  some 
with  muskets,  the  rest  with  bows  and  arrows.  The  pro- 
jected goal  was  not  reached,  but  Rebmann  paid  a  second 
visit  to  Chagga,  and  saw  again,  even  by  moonlight,  the 
"  majestic  snow-clad  summit"  of  Kilima  Njaro.  He 
learnt  from  the  natives  that  the  white  material,  when  put 
into  the  fire,  turns  to  water,  and  that  its  extent  on  the 
mountain  varies  with  the  season.  In  April,  1849,  Reb- 
mann tried  again  to  penetrate  beyond  Kilima  Njaro.  He 
hired  thirty  porters,  and  hoped  to  reach  the  Unyamwesi 
country.  It  was  the  rainy  season,  and  Rebmann,  who 
travelled  without  a  tent,  often  had  no  other  protection 
than  his  umbrella.  He  reached  Chagga,  but  the  Chief 
extorted  from  him  almost  all  his  stores,  and  Rebmann 
was  compelled  to  return  to  the  coast. 

While  Rebmann  was  thus  exploring  to  the  west  of 
Mombasa,  Krapf  had  not  been  idle,  and  was  preparing 
to  fulfil  his  old  dream  of  a  mission  to  the  Galla,  whose 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  6i 

land,  in  his  enthusiasm,  he  describes  as  "  Ormania,  the 
Germany  of  Africa."  He  first  had  to  make  a  short  visit 
to  the  mountains  of  Usambara,  in  what  is  now  German 
East  Africa,  and  he  travelled  there  with  a  party  of  one 
guide  and  seven  porters.  This  mission  accomplished,  he 
felt  at  liberty  to  turn  his  attention  to  the  north-west. 
His  start  was  delayed  by  the  arrival  of  Erhardt  and 
Wagner,  two  recruits  for  the  mission,  who  landed  at 
Mombasa  in  June,  1849.  Wagner  died  on  the  ist  of 
August,  and  Erhardt,  for  some  time,  was  too  ill  and 
inexperienced  to  be  left  alone,  so  Krapf  was  detained 
for  some  months  longer  on  the  coast.  At  length,  on  the 
1st  November,  1849,  Krapf  was  free  to  start  on  his  pro- 
jected mission.  He  read  the  2nd  chapter  of  Haggai, 
which  strengthened  him  greatly,  and  leaving  Rabai,  he 
plunged  into  the  dreary  wilderness  of  the  Nyika.  His 
caravan  consisted  of  twelve  porters,  and  his  immediate 
goal  was  Ukambani,  the  country  of  the  Wa-kamba. 
Thence  he  hoped  to  work  his  way  to  the  Unyamwezi, 
and  onward  "  to  the  sources  of  the  Nile,  and  to  those 
still  surviving  Christian  remnants  at  the  Equator  of 
whom  I  heard  in  Shoa." 

The  time  was  unfortunate,  as  it  was  the  end  of  the 
long  dry  season  ;  water  was  scarce,  and  the  usual  water 
holes  dry  ;  the  route  was  badly  selected,  and  took  the 
party  through  scrub  so  thick  that  they  had  to  crawl  on 
hands  and  knees  through  the  thickets.  Nevertheless 
they   crossed    the    Nyika   in    safety   to  Taita,    whence 


62  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

Krapf  enjoyed  a  view  of  Kilima  Njaro  and  its  snow  cap. 
Turning  northward,  he  crossed  the  Tzavo  River,  and 
entered  Ukambani.  He  reached  the  village  of  Kitui, 
and  from  a  hill  above  it,  on  3rd  December,  1849,  he  saw 
the  snow-flecked  summit  of  Mount  Kenya. 

Krapf  was  delighted  with  the  Wa-kamba,  and  resolved 
to  establish  a  mission  in  their  country.  He  secured  the 
friendship  of  Kivoi,  the  chief  of  Kitui,  and  then 
returned  to  the  coast  for  the  necessary  stores,  Krapf's 
ultimate  aim  was  to  make  this  station  in  Ukamba  the 
first  in  a  chain  of  mission  settlements  extending  across 
Equatorial  Africa  from  Mombasa  to  the  Atlantic. 

He  reached  the  coast  in  safety,  and  after  a  short  rest 
marched  inland  with  a  caravan  of  thirty  porters.  Provi- 
dentially, he  fell  in  with  a  party  of  100  Wa-kamba,  who 
were  returning  home  after  a  trading  trip  to  Mombasa. 
In  the  Taita  country  the  caravan  was  attacked  by 
robbers.  Krapf  was  no  soldier,  and  always  got  into 
trouble  when  fighting  began. 

"  In  the  confusion,"  he  tells  us,  "  I  lost  my  powder 
horn,  and  one  of  my  people  burst  the  barrel  of  his  gun 
by  putting  too  large  a  charge  into  it.  The  ramrod  of 
another  was  broken  through  his  being  knocked  over  by 
a  Mnika  [one  of  Krapf's  own  men],  in  the  confusion,  just 
as  he  was  going  to  load,  whilst  the  gun  of  another  missed 
fire  altogether."  The  Wa-kamba  traders  made  a  better 
defence,  and  beat  back  the  robbers.  Krapf  was  suitably 
modest  over  the  victory.     "It  was  God  who  preserved 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  63 

us,"  he  says,  "  and  not  our  own  sword  and  bow " — 
a  grateful  acknowledgment,  however,  which  omits  d  irect 
reference  to  his  Wa-kamba  allies. 

The  rest  of  the  journey  was  peaceful.  Krapf  reached 
the  plateau  of  Yata  on  the  eastern  border  of  Ukamba, 
and  there  he  built  a  hut  and  began  mission  work.  He 
was  greatly  encouraged  by  the  friendliness  of  the  natives 
but  troubled  by  the  selfishness  of  his  Wanika  servants. 

He  visited  his  old  friend  Kivoi,  who  introduced  him 
to  a  native  from  the  southern  slopes  of  Kenya.  This 
man  told  Krapf  that  he  had  frequently  been  to  the 
mountain,  but  had  not  ascended  it,  because  it  contained 
Kirira — a  white  substance  producing  very  great  cold. 
The  white  substance,  he  added,  produced  continually  a 
quantity  of  water. 

Kivoi  was  about  to  start  for  the  country  to  the  north 
of  the  Tana,  and  Krapf,  delighted  with  the  prospect  of 
a  nearer  view  of  Kenya,  consented  to  go  with  him. 

Near  the  Tana  the  caravan  was  attacked  by  robbers. 
The  first  fight  was  a  victory  indirectly  due  to  Krapf, 
though  not  to  his  fighting  capacities.  With  character- 
istic simplicity  he  left  his  ramrod  in  his  gun  when  he 
fired,  so  that  he  could  not  reload  ;  but  the  enemy  were 
temporarily  routed  by  one  of  Kivoi's  wives  opening 
Krapf 's  umbrella.  The  raiders  came  on  again  later,  and 
the  caravan  was  defeated.  Krapf,  having  provided  him- 
self with  a  new  ramrod,  fired  twice,  but  he  fired  in  the 
air,  "  for  I  could  not  bring  myself  to  shed  the  blood  of 


64  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

man,"  and  then  he  joined  in  the  general  flight.  Kivoi 
was  killed,  Krapf  was  left  behind  alone,  and  nearly  fell 
into  the  hands  of  the  enemy  by  mistaking  them  for  his 
friends.  He  escaped,  however,  and  hid  in  the  forest  on 
the  Tana  banks.  There  he  prepared  for  his  journey  over 
the  waterless  desert,  that  lay  between  him  and  Ukamba. 
He  filled  his  telescope  and  both  the  barrels  of  his  gun 
with  water,  and  started  on  the  attempt  to  find  his  way 
back.  His  improvised  water  bottles  were  not  a 
success,  the  telescope  case  leaked,  and  the  bushes  tore 
the  grass  plugs  out  of  the  gun  barrels.  He  was  soon 
starving  for  food  and  water.  He  ate  leaves,  roots, 
elephant  dung,  and  ants  ;  and  when  these  failed,  he  tried 
gunpowder,  and  the  bitter  shoots  of  a  young  tree.  "  I 
soon  felt  severe  pains  in  my  stomach,"  says  Krapf  The 
pains  were  probably  very  severe.  Fortunately  he  fell  in 
with  two  of  his  fellow  fugitives,  who  guided  him  back  to 
Ukamba.  The  natives  were  angry  at  the  death  of  their 
chief,  which  they  held  that  Krapf  ought  to  have  pre- 
vented. They  appeared  so  hostile,  that  Krapf  thought 
it  prudent  to  escape.  He  tried  to  cross  the  country  by 
night  marches,  but  could  not  find  his  way,  and  after 
three  days  of  terrible  hardships,  he  threw  himself  on  the 
mercy  of  a  Mkamba.  The  native  guided  him  to  Kivoi's 
village,  whence  he  was  sent  back  to  his  station  at  Yata. 
Worn  out  with  his  exertions,  Krapf  felt  bound  to 
return  to  the  coast.  The  friendly  Wa-kamba  tried  to 
persuade  him  to  stay  longer  among  them,  but  on  his  in- 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  65 

sisting,  they  consented  to  his  departure,  and  he  left,  "  not 
only  in  peace,  but  with  honour," 

So  the  first  Ukamba  mission  failed  by  an  unlucky 
accident,  and  Krapf  returned  to  Europe  in  1853,  to 
recover  from  the  effects  of  his  nine  years'  work  in  British 
East  Africa.  In  1854  he  started  back  for  Rabai.  He 
was  stopped  by  severe  illness  in  Egypt ;  he  struggled 
with  disease,  and  the  indomitable  old  missionary  would 
not  easily  give  in.  Reluctantly  he  was  forced  to  the 
conclusion  that  his  constitution  was  broken,  and  his 
African  mission  at  an  end.  "  So  with  deep  sorrow,"  as 
we  can  well  believe,  "  in  August,  1855, 1  bade  farewell  to 
the  land  where  I  had  suffered  so  much,  journeyed  so 
much,  and  experienced  so  many  proofs  of  the  protecting 
and  sustaining  hand  of  God,  where,  too,  I  had  been  per- 
mitted to  administer  to  many  souls  the  Word  of  Life 
and  to  name  the  Name  of  Jesus  Christ  in  places  where 
it  had  never  before  been  uttered  and  known.  God  grant 
that  the  seed  sown  broadcast  may  not  have  fallen  only 
in  stony  places,  but  may  spring  up  in  due  season,  and 
bear  fruit  a  hundredfold." 

But  Krapf 's  African  work  was  not  yet  done.  In 
i860  he  published  his  journals.  Their  contagious 
enthusiasm  roused  some  members  of  the  United  Metho- 
dist Free  Church  to  help  forward  the  work.  They 
asked  Krapf's  advice.  He,  of  course,  offered  his  assist- 
ance, and  urged  them  to  undertake  the  work.  In  1861 
four  missionaries — Wakefield,  Woolner,  and  two  Swiss 

F 


66  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

— were  sent  out  to  establish  the  Methodist  Mission  in 
East  Africa.  Krapf  went  with  them  to  introduce  them 
to  the  country,  and  help  them  to  found  their  stations, 
Krapf  took  the  Swiss  to  Kauma,  in  the  northern  part  of 
the  Wa-nyika  country,  a  site  he  selected,  as  it  was  on 
the  road  to  Galla-land.  The  missionaries  were  well 
received,  and  it  was  arranged  that  they  should  settle  at 
Kauma  as  soon  as  they  had  learnt  sufficient  of  the 
language.  Wakefield  and  Woolner  were  then  similarly 
introduced  to  the  people  of  Usambara,  and  the  mission 
prospects  seemed  bright.  But  a  wave  of  anti-European 
feeling  broke  out  in  Mombasa,  in  consequence  of  a  fight 
in  the  harbour  between  some  Arab  slaves  and  the  boats 
of  H.M.S.  Ariel.  The  Swiss  missionaries  decided  to 
return  home,  and  Woolner  accompanied  them,  as  his 
health  had  collapsed. 

Krapf  then  settled  Wakefield  at  Ribe,  a  station  six 
miles  north-east  of  Rabai,  where  a  year  later  Wakefield 
was  joined  by  Charles  New.  These  two  missionaries 
faithfully  strove  to  follow  in  the  footsteps  of  Krapf  and 
Rebmann.  They  worked  among  the  Wa-nyika,  and 
sought  to  increase  the  area  of  their  usefulness  by 
journeys  inland.  Wakefield,  in  1865,  visited  the  Galla 
at  Chafifa,  and  New,  in  1866,  ascended  the  Tana  Valley 
from  Melindi  as  far  as  Ngao.  He  saw  the  Pokomo 
along  the  Tana,  and  visited  the  Galla  at  their  villages 
on  Lake  Ashaka  Babo.  In  1871  New,  whose  interest 
in  Kilima  Njaro  had  been  roused  by  an  interview  with 


THE  MOMBASA  MISSIONS  67 

Van  der  Decken,  on  that  ill-fated  traveller's  return  from 
the  mountain  in  1863,  marched  inland  to  Taveta.  On 
the  26th  August,  1 87 1,  in  a  second  attempt  to  ascend 
Kilima  Njaro,  New  settled  for  ever  the  controversy  as 
to  the  character  of  its  white  cap  by  reaching  its  border, 
and  actually  handling  the  East  African  snow. 

This  mountaineering  feat  of  New's  was  important,  as 
the  greatest  doubts  had  been  thrown  on  the  truth  of 
Krapf  and  Rebmann's  reports.  Neither  of  the  mission- 
aries was  a  scientific  observer  ;  they  over-estimated  their 
distances,  and  they  miscalculated  their  bearings.  Hence 
critics  at  home  found  it  easy  to  detect  improbabilities  in 
their  narratives.  And  one  party  of  critics,  headed  by 
Livingstone  and  Cooley,  scouted  the  possibility  of  these 
equatorial  snows.  Cooley's  criticisms  were  the  most 
precise :  he  declared  that  Kitui,  the  village  whence 
Krapf  saw  Kenya,  must  "  stand  within  60  miles  of  the 
sea."  The  distance  is  really  over  180  miles.  The 
perpetual  snows  Cooley  dismissed  as  a  myth. 

"With  respect  to  those  eternal  snows,  on  the  dis- 
covery of  which  Messrs.  Krapf  and  Rebmann  have  set 
their  hearts,  they  have  so  little  of  shape  or  substance, 
and  appear  so  severed  from  realities,  that  they  take 
quite  a  spectral  character.  No  one  has  yet  witnessed 
their  eternity ;  dogmatic  assertion  proves  nothing ;  of 
reasonable  evidence  of  perpetual  snow  there  is  not  a 
tittle  offered.  The  only  sentence  in  Mr.  Rebmann's 
journal  which  ventures  to  touch  upon   the  fact  of  a  fall 


68  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

of  snow  is,  as  has  been  shown,  neither  genuine  nor 
correct  "  (p.   1 27). 

Livingstone  was  almost  as  contemptuous,  and  even 
in  the  introductory  chapter  to  Krapfs  own  book  the 
same  doubts  were  expressed,  for  of  Cooley's  disbelief 
it  is  said,  "whether  on  sufficient  grounds  or  no  is  at 
best  but  doubtful." 

Cooley  not  only  denied  the  existence  of  the  snow 
fields,  but  he  attacked  Krapfs  character ;  he  insinuated 
that  his  journeys  were  a  misapplication  of  missionary 
funds  to  satisfy  personal  ambition. 

"  Krapf  holds,"  says  Cooley,  "  that  in  Africa,  geo- 
graphical discovery  must  precede  evangelization,  and  it 
will  be  time  enough  to  think  of  cultivating  a  corner  of 
the  immense  vineyard  when  the  whole  of  it  shall  have 
been  explored.  But  the  weakness  of  ambition  is  mani- 
fest in  his  blind  attachment  to  grand  problems,  and  his 
disinclination  to  relinquish  the  delusions  connected  with 
them.  Miserably  poor  in  facts,  he  is  profuse  of  theory ; 
his  distances  are  exaggerated,  his  bearings  all  in  dis- 
order, his  etymologies  puerile,  and  he  seems  to  want 
altogether  those  habits  of  mental  accuracy  without 
which  active  reason  is  a  dangerous  faculty." 

These  attacks  on  Krapf  were  unjust  and  unjustifiable. 
Fortunately  the  two  founders  of  the  East  African 
Mission  lived  to  see  their  reports  confirmed,  and  their 
merits  acknowledged. 

After  Krapfs  return  from  the  foundation  of  the  Ribe 


THE   MOMBASA   MISSIONS  69 

Mission  in  1863,  he  settled  in  Wurtemberg,  whence  he 
wrote  bright  messages  of  encouragement  and  hope, 
whenever  the  future  of  the  East  African  Missions  was 
especially  gloomy.  He  lived  to  welcome  Stanley's 
appeal  for  the  evangelization  of  Uganda,  and  to 
strengthen  those  weaker  brethren  whose  hearts  misgave 
them,  when  the  prospects  of  the  Uganda  Mission  were 
at  their  worst. 

Rebmann  stayed  on  in  East  Africa,  working  patiently 
and  faithfully,  and  almost  forgotten.  In  1872  Sir 
Bartle  Frere  found  him  at  Rabai,  blind  and  infirm,  but 
still  at  work,  and  surrounded  by  a  handful  of  devoted 
converts. 

After  the  Freretown  Mission  was  established  at  the 
end  of  1874,  Rebmann  was  reluctantly  persuaded  to 
return  home.  He  consented,  for  he  felt  that  his  pioneer 
work  was  done.  He  had  lived  in  East  Africa,  without 
a  single  break,  from  1845  to  1874.  He  had  maintained 
the  continuity  of  the  Church  Missionary  Society's  work 
in  East  Africa,  from  the  time  of  Krapf 's  departure  till 
the  mission  of  Sir  Bartle  Frere,  and  the  re-establish- 
ment, in  1874,  of  the  Society's  work  on  a  more  adequate 
and  worthy  scale. 

Rebmann  was  brought  back  to  Europe,  and  settled 
beside  his  old  comrade,  Krapf,  in  the  Kornthal.  Krapf 
arranged  his  marriage  with  a  pious  widow,  who  nursed 
him  through  his  last  days. 

But,   after   a   twenty-nine   years'   residence    in    East 


70  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

Africa,  the  return  to  Europe  was  too  great  a  wrench. 
It  would,  perhaps,  have  been  better  for  the  blind  old 
missionary  to  have  died  among  the  coaverts  he  had 
made,  and  to  have  been  buried  on  the  station  where  his 
life's  work  was  done.  Rebmann  died  within  a  year  of 
his  return,  on  4th  October,  1876,  and  five  years  later 
(26th  November,  1881)  Krapf  followed  him  to  his  rest. 

The  story  of  the  work  of  Krapf  and  Rebmann,  the 
two  founders  of  the  East  African  Mission,  is  one  of  the 
brightest  chapters  in  African  history.  They  entered 
the  mission  field  from  motives  of  disinterested  philan- 
thropy. Their  service  is  an  example  of  the  highest 
type  of  missionary  enterprise.  Their  enthusiasm  was 
irrepressible,  and  yet  innocent  of  fanaticism ;  their 
sympathy  with  the  natives  they  strove  to  convert  was 
as  deep  as  their  patience  was  inexhaustible.  They 
achieved  great  geographical  success  with  insignificant 
resources.  Though  they  did  not  hesitate  to  denounce 
evil  practices,  they  kept  aloof  from  politics  ;  nevertheless 
they  helped  to  revolutionize  the  political  conditions  ot 
the  continent  by  rousing  European  interest  in  Eastern 
Equatorial  Africa.  Their  work  was  great,  and  their 
lives  were  noble.  Said  Said,  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar, 
wrote  the  simple  truth  when  introducing  Krapf  to  the 
Governor  of  Mombasa,  he  described  him  as  "  a  good 
man,  who  wishes  to  convert  the  world  to  God." 


Chapter  V 
THE  QUEST  FOR  THE  NILE  SOURCES 

"  Arcanum  natura  caput  non  prodidit  ulli, 
Nee  licuit  populis  parvum  te,  Nile,  videre, 
Amovitque  sinus,  et  gentes  maluit  ortus 
Mirari,  quam  nosse,  tuos.     Consurgere  in  ipsis 
Jus  tibi  solstitiis,  aliena  crescere  bruma." 

—Lucan,  ^^  Pharsalia"  (x.  295-9). 

Nature  conceals  thy  infant  stream  with  care, 
Nor  let  thee,  but  in  majesty,  appear. 
Upon  thy  banks  astonish'd  nations  stand, 
Nor  dare  assign  thy  rise  to  one  peculiar  land. 
Exempt  from  vulgar  laws  thy  waters  run, 
Nor  take  their  various  seasons  from  the  sun. 

— Row^s  Translation. 

THE  missionary  was  not  long  allowed  a  mono- 
poly of  pioneer  exploration  in  East  Africa. 
The  philanthropist  was  soon  joined  by  the 
geographical  explorer.  The  annual  occurrence  of  the 
floods  of  the  Nile  at  the  driest  and  hottest  season  of 
the  year  was  an  anomaly  that  impressed  observers  in 
all  ages.  Every  attempt  to  solve  this  problem  directly 
by  a  journey  up  the  Nile  Valley  failed.  The  difficul- 
ties were  long  insuperable,  and  geographers  turned  their 


72  BRITISH    EAST   AFRICA 

attention  to  the  possibility  of  reaching  the  Nile  sources 
from  the  East  Coast.  With  this  end  in  view,  Ptolemy 
Philadelphus  invaded  Ethiopia  ;  and  the  accurate  infor- 
mation of  Ptolemy  the  geographer  was  doubtless  de- 
rived from  traders,  who  reached  the  Upper  Nile  basin 
from  the  Zanzibar  coast. 

The  search  for  the  Nile  sources,  in  the  present 
century,  begins  with  the  work  of  Sir  Richard  Burton, 
who,  in  1854,  was  sent  on  a  mission  to  Harrar,  a  town 
in  the  Galla  country,  south-west  from  Aden.  The 
journey  gave  him  a  keen  interest  in  African  research  ; 
and,  a  year  later,  he  tried  to  make  a  dash  for  the  in- 
terior from  Berbera  on  the  Somali  coast.  The  attempt 
ended  in  disaster.  The  caravan  was  massacred  by  the 
Somali,  Lieutenant  Stroyan  was  killed,  Speke  escaped 
with  nineteen  spear  wounds,  and  the  Somali  road  was 
closed  for  thirty  years. 

When  another  opportunity  to  reach  Central  Africa 
came  in  Burton's  way,  he  chose  a  more  southern  zone, 
and  entered  East  Africa  opposite  Zanzibar.  His  former 
companion,  John  Manning  Speke,  again  went  with  him. 
The  two  travellers  left  the  coast  in  June,  1857,  ^"d 
crossed  the  whole  width  of  what  is  now  German  East 
Africa,  to  the  eastern  shore  of  Tanganyika. 

This  journey  marked  one  of  the  great  epochs  in  East 
African  history,  for  it  started  the  scientific  explorations 
of  the  equatorial  lakes.  The  honour  of  beginning  this 
work  belongs  to  the  illustrious  Burton  ;  the  credit  for  its 


THE   QUEST   FOR   THE   NILE   SOURCES       73 

continuation  is  mainly  due  to  Speke.  Burton  was  not 
the  type  of  man  to  enjoy  travel  among  the  Bantu  tribes 
of  German  East  Africa.  His  mind  was  an  unsuitable 
instrument  for  such  rough  work.  His  companion,  the 
plodding  Speke,  though  far  inferior  to  him  in  brilliancy, 
made  the  more  successful  traveller  in  Eastern  Africa.  By 
the  time  the  two  men  had  reached  the  Arab  settlement 
at  Kazeh,  on  the  journey  home,  Burton  had  had  enough 
of  the  work.  When  Speke  suggested  a  branch  excur- 
sion to  visit  a  reputed  lake  beyond  the  hills  of  Unyam- 
wezi.  Burton  was  only  too  glad  to  let  his  companion 
go  alone,  while  he  settled  down  for  three  months'  life 
among  the  Arab  traders.  Speke  left  Kazeh  on  9th 
July,  1858,  and  on  the  3rd  of  the  following  month  he 
reached  the  shores  of  the  Victoria  Nyanza. 

It  was  this  discovery  which  connects  the  Burton 
and  Speke  expedition  with  the  history  of  British  East 
Africa.  The  discovery  was  of  fundamental  importance, 
because  it  finally  disposed  of  the  theory  that  the  various 
lakes  reported  by  native  traders  were  all  based  on  one 
lake.  Moreover,  Speke  claimed  his  lake  as  the  true 
source  of  the  Nile.  Burton  estimated  the  level  of 
Tanganyika  at  1,844  feet  above  the  sea  (it  is  really 
2,750  feet)  ;  it  was  therefore  improbable  that  it  could  be 
the  source  of  the  Nile,  which,  at  450  miles  to  the  north 
of  Tanganyika,  is  450  feet  higher.  But  Speke's  Vic- 
toria Nyanza  is  at  the  level  of  3,820  feet  above  the  sea, 
and  it  was  therefore  quite  possible  that  it  might  be  con- 


74  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

nected  with  the  Nile.  Speke  was  confident  that  it  was. 
"  I  no  longer,"  he  wrote,  "  felt  any  doubt  that  the  lake 
at  my  feet  gave  birth  to  this  interesting  river."  This 
discovery,  however,  was  somewhat  unlucky  for  Speke. 
It  brought  him  at  once  into  conflict  with  Burton  and 
Livingstone,  both  of  whom  denied  that  the  Nile  rose  in 
Speke's  newly-found  lake.  Livingstone,  in  spite  of  in- 
consistent levels,  derived  the  Nile  from  Tanganyika,  and 
even  denied  the  existence  of  Speke's  lake  as  a  fact. 
Geographers,  at  the  time,  mostly  sided  with  Burton  and 
Livingstone  ;  and  the  cartographers  broke  up  the  Vic- 
toria Nyanza  into  a  series  of  lakes  and  swamps. 

To  prove  the  existence  of  his  newly-discovered  lake 
and  its  connection  with  the  Nile,  Speke  organized  an- 
other expedition,  in  which  he  was  accompanied  by 
Grant.  The  expedition  was  well  found,  carefully 
organized  and  strongly  escorted.  It  left  Zanzibar  on 
2nd  October,  i860.  The  caravan  consisted  of  some 
men  from  the  Cape  Mounted  Rifles,  and  182  Zanzi- 
bari.  The  expedition  followed  Speke's  old  road  to 
Kazeh,  where  it  stayed  two  months  for  the  reorgani- 
zation of  the  caravan.  After  this  point  the  difficulties 
began.  The  porters  were  so  reduced  in  numbers  that 
the  caravan  had  to  march  thrice  over  every  stage  of  the 
journey,  and  both  explorers  fell  ill.  The  condition  of 
the  South  African  men  was  so  precarious  that  they  had 
to  be  sent  home,  and  Speke  accompanied  them  back  to 
Kazeh.     After  he  had  rejoined  Grant,  the  northward 


THE   QUEST  FOR   THE   NILE   SOURCES       75 

march  was  resumed  ;  but  disaster  still  dogged  the  foot- 
steps of  the  two  explorers.  The  guides  deserted,  and 
once  more  Speke  had  to  return  to  Kazeh  to  engage 
others.  He  secured  two  guides,  but  could  get  no  more 
porters,  and  the  caravan  had  to  continue  to  work  for- 
ward in  detachments.  While  the  force  was  thus  divided 
Grant's  section  was  attacked  and  his  men  scattered. 
With  dogged  perseverance,  the  two  men  steadily  pushed 
northward.  They  crossed  Uvinza  and  Usui,  and  reached 
the  frontier  of  Karagwe,  a  province  to  the  west  of  the 
Victoria  Nyanza,  now  included  in  German  East  Africa. 

Here  there  was  a  sudden  change  in  the  attitude  of 
the  natives.  Speke  and  Grant  were  met  at  the  frontier 
by  officers  carrying  the  royal  maces  of  Karagwe.  The 
officers  bade  them  welcome  in  the  king's  name,  the 
explorers  were  treated  with  universal  respect,  the  cara- 
van was  supplied  with  food  at  the  king's  expense,  and 
everything  was  done  to  help  instead  of  to  hinder. 
Speke  and  Grant  had  made  an  unexpected  and  im- 
portant anthropological  discovery. 

The  explorers  had  previously  been  travelling  in  a 
region  ruled  by  ignorant  petty  chiefs,  whose  one  idea 
was  to  get  what  they  could  for  themselves  by  continual 
begging  and  theft.  From  the  country  of  independent 
village  communities,  Speke  and  Grant  had  suddenly 
passed  to  the  territory  of  a  chief  who  ruled  a  large 
country  in  which  his  power  was  absolute,  except 
where  limited  by  the  rules  of  a  feudal  system.     The 


76  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

king,  Rumanika,  was  hospitable,  friendly  and  intelli- 
gent. Instead  of  plaguing  the  travellers  by  begging 
and  bullying,  he  received  them  with  great  friendliness, 
and  entertained  them  with  princely  hospitality.  Speke 
was  amazed  at  the  change,  both  in  the  people  and  the 
conditions  of  travel.  He  describes  Rumanika  as  "  a 
model  of  good  manners  and  good  taste,  and,  in  the 
truest  sense  of  the  word,  a  gentleman,  ruling  his 
people  with  justice,  mingled,  perhaps,  with  a  little 
African  severity." 

The  explanation  of  this  startling  change  in  his  recep- 
tion by  the  natives,  and  in  the  political  conditions  of 
the  country,  Speke  rightly  deduced  from  the  physical 
characteristics  of  the  Karagwe  aristocracy.  Speke  de- 
scribes Rumanika  as  a  tall  man,  six  feet  two  inches  in 
height,  "  with  nothing  of  the  African  in  his  appearance, 
except  that  his  hair  was  short  and  woolly."  Speke  saw 
at  once  that  the  king  and  his  courtiers  were  "  as  unlike 
as  they  could  be  to  the  common  order  of  natives  of  the 
surrounding  districts.  They  had  fine  oval  faces,  large 
eyes  and  high  noses,  denoting  the  best  blood  of  Abys- 
sinia." 

Speke  therefore  concluded  that  an  Abyssinian  race 
had  conquered  some  negro  tribes  around  the  Victoria 
Nyanza,  and  thus  established  the  political  system  of 
Karagwe, 

Speke's  explanation  is  essentially  correct.  The  race 
in  question  may  not  have  been  Abyssinian,  but  that  the 


THE   QUEST  FOR  THE  NILE   SOURCES       77 

semi-civilization  of  Karagwe  was  due  to  the  influence  of  y 
a  non-negro  race,  which  had  conquered  and  ruled  some 
negro  tribes,  is  now  universally  accepted.  Speke  recog- 
nised this  fact  from  the  aspect  of  the  people,  and  he 
obtained  interesting  evidence  in  its  support  from  native 
traditions. 

The  explorers  made  a  long  stay  at  Rumanika's 
capital,  where  Grant  was  nursed  through  a  serious 
illness.  When  his  comrade  could  be  safely  left  to  the 
care  of  the  king,  Speke  started  for  Uganda.  He 
crossed  the  Kagera  river,  and  from  Meruka,  on  3rd 
January,  1862,  he  obtained  the  first  view  of  the  western 
shore  of  the  Victoria  Nyanza.  He  followed  the  lake  to 
the  north,  crossed  Budu  to  Uganda,  and  reached  the 
capital  of  the  King  Mtesa  on  19th  February,  1862.  His 
reception  in  Uganda,  as  in  Karagwe,  was  hospitable  : 
the  day  after  his  arrival  some  pages  drove  in  twenty 
cows  and  ten  goats,  with  a  request  from  the  king  that 
Speke  "  would  accept  these  few  chickens,  until  he  could 
send  more." 

Speke  was  greatly  impressed  by  the  civil  administra- 
tion of  Uganda,  though  horrified  at  the  reign  of  terror 
and  blood.  Executions  for  the  most  frivolous  reasons 
were  a  daily  occurrence.  The  king,  however,  treated 
Speke  well ;  and  Grant,  having  recovered  under  Ru- 
manika's care,  arrived  in  May.  In  July  the  two 
explorers  said  farewell  to  Mtesa,  who  presented  them 
with  sixty  cows,  a  flock  of  goats  loads  of  butter,  coffee 


78  BRITISH    EAST  AFRICA 

and  tobacco,  and  lOO  sheets  of  bark  cloth  for  clothing 
for  the  porters. 

Illness  soon  forced  Speke  and  Grant  to  part  company 
once  more.  Grant's  health  collapsed,  and  he  had  to  be 
left  to  journey  slowly  westward,  while  Speke  went  east- 
ward to  see  the  great  river  that  was  said  to  flow  out  of  the 
Victoria  Nyanza.  On  the  21st  January  he  reached  the 
river,  and  found  it  flowing  northward.  Speke  followed 
it  southward  till  he  reached  its  outlet  from  the  Victoria 
Nyanza  at  the  "  Ripon  Falls."  He  then  descended  the 
river  valley  to  the  north,  rejoined  Grant,  and  the  two 
explorers  visited  Kamrasi,  the  king  of  Unyoro.  They 
then  returned  to  the  Nile,  crossed  to  the  right  bank, 
and  marched  across  the  Shuli  country,  until  they  again 
reached  the  Nile,  which  they  followed  northward  to 
Gondokoro.  There,  on  the  15th  February,  1863,  they 
met  Samuel  Baker  and  Mrs.  Baker,  who  had  come  in 
search  of  them  ;  and  in  the  Bakers'  dhow  they  descended 
the  Nile  to  Khartum. 

This  expedition  of  Speke  and  Grant  showed  that  the 
Nile  flowed  from  the  Victoria  Nyanza,  but  it  did  not 
conclusively  prove  either  the  unity  of  that  lake,  or  that 
it  was  the  only  source  of  the  Nile.  Livingstone  still 
insisted  on  dissecting  the  Nyanza  into  five  lakes,  and 
asserting  that  Tanganyika  was  the  real  southern  source 
of  the  Nile.  Speke  and  Grant,  moreover,  had  themselves 
heard  when  in  Unyoro  of  another  lake  into  which  the 
Nile  flowed,  between  the  point  where  they  had   left  it 


THE   QUEST   FOR   THE   NILE   SOURCES       79 

below  the  Victoria  Nyanza,  and  where  they  rejoined  it 
above  Gondokoro. 

In  order,  therefore,  to  complete  the  brilliant  work  of 
Speke  and  Grant,  Samuel  Baker  and  his  devoted  wife 
set  forth  on  the  expedition  which  discovered  the  Albert 
Nyanza.  They  had  left  Khartum  in  December,  1862, 
in  order  to  meet  Speke  and  Grant,  and  give  them  any 
assistance  they  might  need.  On  the  way  up  the  Nile, 
they  passed  the  steamer  with  the  ill-fated  party  consist- 
ing of  the  Baronne  von  Capillan,  her  sister  and  daughter, 
Mile.  Tinn6,  two  Dutch  maids,  a  doctor,  and  an  Italian, 
who  were  on  their  way  to  the  Bahr-el-Ghazl,  where  they 
all  died  of  fever,  with  the  single  exception  of  Mile.  Tinne. 
The  Bakers  were  at  Gondokoro  when  Speke  and  Grant 
arrived  there  in  February,  1863  ;  and  at  the  end  of 
March  the  Bakers  started  for  the  south.  They  followed 
the  Nile  to  the  falls  near  Lado,  and  then  crossed  to  the 
eastern  bank.  They  travelled  across  the  Latuk  and 
Madi  districts,  and  reached  the  Nile  again  at  the  Karu- 
ma  Falls.  Thence  they  visited  Mruli,  the  chief  town  of 
Kamrasi,  king  of  Unyoro.  Baker  had  some  trouble  with 
Kamrasi,  who  was  a  persistent  beggar.  However,  he 
told  Baker  about  the  second  Nile  lake,  which  he  called 
Mwutan  Nzige,  and  sent  men  to  guide  him  across  Un- 
yoro to  visit  it.  Baker  found  the  lake  at  the  foot  of 
some  cliffs,  1,500  feet  high,  and  so  precipitous  that  he 
could  not  get  his  oxen  down  them.  He  describes  the 
lake  as  in  "  a  vast  depression,  far  below  the  general  level 


8o  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

of  the  country,  surrounded  by  precipitous  cliffs,  and 
bounded  to  west  and  south-west  by  great  ranges  of 
mountains  from  5,cxx)  to  7,CXXD  feet  above  the  level  of 
its  waters."  Baker  proved  that  the  Nile  flows  into 
this  lake  from  the  Victoria  Nyanza,  and  flows  out  again 
to  the  north.  As  it  receives  many  streams  from  the 
south,  it  acts  as  a  second  reservoir  for  the  Nile, 

The  Bakers'  expedition,  therefore,  demonstrated 
the  existence  of  the  second  of  Ptolemy's  Nile  reser- 
voirs. The  true  sources  of  the  Nile  had  been  found. 
But  the  solution  of  the  Nile  problem  was  still  incom- 
plete. The  unity  of  the  Victoria  Nyanza  had  not  yet 
been  proved,  and  it  was  possible  that  some  large  rivers, 
worthy  to  be  regarded  as  a  continuation  of  the  Nile, 
might  flow  into  its  southern  end.  That  Tanganyika 
could  discharge  its  surplus  waters  to  the  Victoria 
Nyanza  was  impossible  ;  but  when  the  lake  levels  were 
more  accurately  determined,  the  Albert  Nyanza  was 
found  to  be  300  feet  lower  than  Tanganyika.  Hence 
it  was  not  impossible  that  Livingstone  might  be  right 
after  all,  and  that  his  favourite  Tanganyika  might  be 
connected  with  the  Nile. 

These  questions  were  not  finally  settled  till  the 
journey  of  Stanley  ten  years  later,  but  Baker's  results 
were  generally  regarded  as  conclusive.  The  inferences 
drawn  from  them  have  proved  correct,  and  the  Bakers' 
expedition  to  the  Albert  Nyanza  practically  closed  the 
two  thousand  years'  quest  for  the  sources  of  the  Nile. 


Chapter  VI 

THE  UGANDA  ROAD  AND  THE  TRAVERSE 
OF  MASAI-LAND 

"  Mayo  uazako,  be  ndo  uendako." 

"  Where  the  heart  desires,  there  it  goes." 

— East  African  Proverb. 

THE  expeditions,  which  discovered  the  Victoria 
Nyanza  and  subsequently  proved  its  unity, 
reached  the  lake  by  what  is  now  known  as  the 
"  German  road  "  to  Uganda.  This  route  begins  on  the 
coast  opposite  Zanzibar  ;  it  proceeds  eastward  across 
Usambara,  and  turns  north  across  the  country  of  the 
Wanyamwezi  to  the  southern  shore  of  the  Nyanza.  It 
is  the  road  followed  by  Speke,  Stanley,  and  the  first  mis- 
sionaries to  Uganda.  New  and  Denhardt,  however,  had 
learnt  from  the  Arab  traders  that  there  was  a  much 
shorter  route,  direct  from  Mombasa  to  the  eastern  shore 
of  the  Nyanza.  Hence,  as  soon  as  European  interest 
in  Uganda  was  roused  by  Stanley's  visit  in  1875  (p.  107), 
the  attempt  to  open  up  this  road  was  eagerly  discussed 
by  geographers.    There  were  two  difficulties  in  the  way. 

81  G 


82  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

The  German  road  traverses  inhabited  country  through- 
out its  whole  length  ;  thus  travellers  can  rely  on  food 
and  water  at  every  stage  of  the  journey.  The  direct 
road,  on  the  contrary,  was  known  to  cross  wide  belts  that 
are  uninhabited,  and  deserts  that  are  uninhabitable. 
This  difficulty,  however,  was  a  mere  question  of  organi- 
zation and  transport ;  but  the  second  and  more  serious 
difficulty  was  that  this  road  crosses  the  country  of  the 
Masai,  then  the  most  formidable  and  dreaded  tribe  in 
East  Africa. 

That  these  difficulties  were  not  insuperable  was  clear 
from  the  fact  that  the  east  coast  traders  had  repeatedly 
crossed  Masai-land.  If  native  caravans,  armed  only 
with  a  few  muzzle-loading  guns  made  of  second-hand 
Birmingham  gas-pipe,  and  loaded  with  soft  bullets  and 
trade  powder,  could  successfully  travel  and  trade  in 
Masai-land,  it  was  surely  possible  for  a  well-organized 
European  expedition,  armed  with  breech-loading  rifles, 
to  explore  the  country. 

Accordingly  much  attention  was  directed  in  Europe 
to  the  Arab  trade  route  across  Masai-land  to  the 
Victoria  Nyanza. 

The  first  explorer  to  show  that  this  route  was  practi 
cable  to  European  travellers  was  a  German  naturalist 
Dr.  G.  A.  Fischer,  who  was  sent  out  in  command  of  ar 
expedition   organized  by  the   Geographical  Society  ol 
Hamburg. 

Dr.  Fischer  started  from  Pangani,  opposite  Zanzibai 


MASAI    WARRIORS. 


THE   UGANDA   ROAD  83 

in  1882,  with  a  caravan  of  120  natives  and  porters,  and 
accompanied  by  100  extra  men  belonging  to  some  native 
traders.  He  marched  to  Kilima  Njaro,  both  the  peaks 
of  which  were  snow-clad,  and  early  in  1883  he  reached 
Little  Aruscha — a  village  on  the  Masai  border,  previ- 
ously visited  by  van  der  Decken.  Beyond  this  point 
lay  Masai-land,  till  then  untrodden  by  Europeans.  The 
Masai  were,  at  first,  hostile  and  aggressive,  and  while 
Dr.  Fischer's  porters  were  cutting  firewood,  they  were 
attacked  by  some  of  the  warriors  or  Elmoran.  After  a 
fight,  in  which  two  of  the  Masai  were  killed,  the  attack 
was  repelled,  and  the  expedition  was  allowed  to  advance. 
After  a  six  weeks'  journey.  Dr.  Fischer  arrived  at 
Ngurunani.  )On  the  nth  of  May  he  reached  Lake 
Naivasha,  and  was  thus  the  first  European  to  see  the 
highest  lake  in  the  Erythrean  Rift  Valley.  From  Little 
Aruscha,  where  he  entered  Masai-land,  to  Naivasha  is 
some  230  miles,  and  his  last  camp  was  only  from  20  to 
30  miles  from  the  northern  frontier,  so  that  he  had  nearly 
traversed  the  whole  of  the  widest  part  of  the  Masai 
country.  His  completion  of  the  traverse  was,  however, 
impossible.  Fischer  had  arrived  at  Naivasha  at  the 
most  unfortunate  time  of  year,  when  the  Masai  are 
usually  massed  around  the  lake.  The  natives  were 
troublesome ;  they  branded  some  of  the  porters  with 
red-hot  spears,  and  resolutely  opposed  Fischer's  further 
progress  to  the  north.  His  store  of  trade  goods  was 
exhausted,  and  he  was  taken  ill,  so  he  had  to  submit. 


84  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

He  stayed  beside  the  lake  for  almost  four  weeks,  and 
made  a  careful  anthropological  study  of  the  Masai.  He 
began  his  return  journey  on  June  6th,  and  safely  reached 
I  the  coast  at  Pangani. 

By  this  journey  Fischer  showed  the  practicability  of 
the  exploration  of  Masai-land,  and  his  extensive  scien- 
tific collections  furnished  important  evidence  as  to  the 
geological  structure  of  the  country.  He  obtained  con- 
clusive and  unexpected  proof  of  widespread  volcanic 
action  in  the  interior.  He  found  hot  springs  in  the  Rift 
Valley  :  he  saw  a  steam  column  rising  from  the  summit 
of  Doenyo  Ngai,  and  heard  that  that  volcano  was  in 
eruption  in  December,  1880.  He  saw  snow  on  Kilima 
Njaro  and  Mount  Meru. 

Kenya  was  hidden  from  Fischer  by  the  mountain 
Settima  and  the  eastern  wall  of  the  Great  Rift  Valley. 
So  the  honour  of  confirming  Krapf's  report,  as  to  the 
existence  of  a  snow-clad  mountain  in  British  East  Africa, 
was  reserved  for  Joseph  Thomson. 

Thomson's  expedition  was  organized  and  paid  for  by 
the  Royal  Geographical  Society.  The  story  of  its  ad- 
ventures is  graphically  told  in  Across  Masailand. 

Thomson's  caravan  of  140  men  left  the  coast  on  15th 
March,  1883.  He  started  from  Mombasa,  and  crossed 
the  Nyika  to  the  Church  Missionary  Society's  station  at 
Taita,  the  first  of  Krapf  s  projected  chain  across  the  con- 
tinent.    Hence  he  continued  westward  to  Taveta,  on  the 


THE  UGANDA   ROAD  85 

south-eastern  flanks  of  Kilima  Njaro.  He  was  warned 
there  that  it  was  impossible  to  enter  Masai-land  with 
less  than  300  men,  but  he  made  the  attempt.  He  found 
the  Masai  hostile,  and  returned  to  Taveta,  where  he 
joined  forces  with  a  company  of  Arab  ivory  traders,  of 
whom  the  chief  was  the  famous  Jumbe  Kimameta. 

The  caravan  was  now  too  powerful  to  fear  direct 
attack,  but  Thomson  was  greatly  bothered  by  the 
thievish  and  begging  propensities  of  the  Masai,  "  Even 
with  our  large  caravan,"  he  reports,  "  we  had  to  submit 
with  the  meekness  and  patience  of  martyrs  to  every 
inconceivable  indignity."  The  Masai  warriors  forced 
their  way  into  the  camp,  though  it  was  surrounded  by  a 
double  thorn  stockade.  "In  spite  of  everything,"  says 
Thomson, "  they  would  frequently  push  the  men  aside 
and  swagger  into  the  tent,  bestowing  their  odoriferous, 
greasy,  clay-clad  persons  on  my  bed,  or  whatever  object 
best  suited  their  ideas  of  comfort.  After  formal  saluta- 
tions and  assurances  (with  'asides')  of  how  delighted  I 
was  to  see  them,  begging  would  commence,  and  string 
after  string  of  beads  would  be  given  them  in  the  hope  of 
hastening  their  departure." 

Notwithstanding  these  persecutions,  Thomson  and  his 
companion  Martin  continued  northward  and  reached 
Ngongo  Bagas,  at  the  south-western  corner  of  the 
Kikuyu  country.  Here  there  was  a  fight  between  the 
caravan  and  the  natives,  resulting  in  the  death  of  two 
porters  and  of  several  of  the  natives.     After  emerging 


86  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

from  the  Kikuyu  forests,  *'  the  next  march  was  a  long 
one,  without  water,  and  ended  in  a  marvellous  scene  of 
disorder  and  panic.  Men  fell  down  exhausted  ;  lions 
attacked  the  donkeys,  killing  several.  The  donkeys 
fled  braying,  kicking  off  their  loads,  and,  in  the  darkness, 
many  were  shot  down  as  lions.  Men  threw  down  their 
loads,  and  fled  for  camp,  or  spent  the  night  up  trees. 
Lions  roaring,  donkeys  braying,  guns  firing,  shouts  and 
cries  of  panic-stricken  porters  and  excited  masters,  pro- 
duced an  effect  such  as  I  shall  never  forget,  while  fear- 
maddened  cattle  broke  away  from  all  control  and 
crashed  through  the  bush." 

A  three  days'  halt  was  necessary  to  repair  the  disasters 
of  that  night,  and  the  caravan  re-entered  the  Masai 
country  and  reached  ■  Naivasha.  The  Masai  were  very 
troublesome,  and  Thomson  tells  us  that  for  ten  days  he 
literally  bored  his  way  through  them,  continually  ex- 
posed to  their  plundering.  He  then  crossed  the  northern 
flanks  of  Settima,  in  the  hope  of  reaching  Kenya, 
which  he  was  the  first  European  to  see  from  the  west. 
The  Masai,  however,  were  in  force  on  Laikipia,  the 
plateau  which  separates  Settima  and  Kenya.  Thomson, 
by  tricks,  gained  a  great  reputation  as  a  medicine  man ; 
but  for  which,  he  tells  us,  his  progress  would  have  been 
impossible.  Even  with  this  assistance  he  was  "  driven 
almost  mad  with  days  of  worry  and  nights  of  incessant 
watchfulness." 

At   length   Thomson's   trade  goods  were  exhausted. 


THE   UGANDA   ROAD  87 

and  "  as  I  had  no  better  stock  in  hand  than  a  couple  of 
artificial  teeth,  and  some  Eno's  Fruit  Salt,  to  keep  up 
my  reputation  as  the  Wizard  of  the  North,  my  position 
became  doubly  dangerous."  His  food  supply  also  failed, 
as  one  of  those  terrible  epidemics  of  rinderpest,  which 
periodically  decimate  the  Masai  herds,  had  recently 
broken  out.  "  A  strange  disease,"  says  Thomson,  "  had 
attacked  the  Masai  cattle,  and  was  sweeping  them  off  in 
myriads.  In  many  districts  not  a  head  was  left,  and  our 
customary  mode  of  travelling  was,  with  fingers  holding 
our  noses,  through  miles  of  country  covered  with  decom- 
posing bodies.  For  the  most  exorbitant  prices,  we  were 
able  to  buy  nothing  but  bullocks,  at  the  point  of  death. 
Of  these  only  small  portions  were  at  all  eatable,  the  rest 
being  absolutely  putrid,  and  even  the  bones  were  like 
mud.  Such  was  our  food  in  Laikipia."  The  attitude 
of  the  Masai  became  more  hostile,  and  Thomson  had 
"  to  take  French  leave  at  last,  and  fly  in  the  middle  of 
the  night.  We  had  almost  to  make  a  run  of  it,  and 
having  no  loads,  we  soon  put  a  considerable  distance 
between  ourselves  and  our  persecutors."  He  fortunately 
escaped,  reached  the  uninhabited,  northern  part  of 
Laikipia,  and  began  the  descent  to  Njemps,  the  trading 
station  near  the  southern  end  of  Lake  Baringo.  On  the 
way  down  Thomson  got  separated  from  his  caravan,  and 
had  to  find  his  way  alone  to  Njemps. 

Thence  Thomson  marched  westward  across  Kamasia 
and  Elgeyo,  the  plateau  on  the  western  side  of  the  Rift 


88  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Valley.  He  entered  Kavirondo,  and  reached  the  Vic- 
toria Nyanza  in  the  district  of  Usoga,  forty-five  miles 
east  of  the  outlet  of  the  Nile. 

Here  Thomson  was  taken  ill,  so  that  he  could  not 
reach  the  Nile.  He  went  north  to  Elgon,  a  great  vol- 
cano, famous  for  its  caves,  which  he  described  as  arti- 
ficial. On  his  way  back  to  Baringo  he  was  tossed  by  a 
wounded  buffalo,  but  his  injuries  did  not  prevent  his 
marching  round  Baringo,  which  he  proved  to  be  a  small 
lake,  disconnected  from  the  Nyanza. 

While  staying  at  Njemps  Thomson's  health  collapsed, 
and  he  had  to  be  carried  on  a  stretcher  back  to 
Naivasha.  For  two  months  he  hovered  between  life 
and  death  in  a  miserable  hut  among  the  bamboos  of 
Mianzini.  His  comrade,  Martin,  devotedly  nursed  him 
through  the  illness,  and  carried  him  to  Ukambani. 
In  that  healthy  district  Thomson  soon  regained  his 
health,  and  on  2nd  June,  1884,  he  arrived  in  safety  at 
the  coast  opposite  Mombasa. 

The  results  of  Thomson's  journey  were  of  great  im- 
portance. Thomson  was  the  first  explorer  to  cross  the 
whole  width  of  the  Masai  country  and  reach  the  Vic- 
toria Nyanza  from  the  east.  He  had,  moreover,  shown 
that  Lake  Baringo  was  a  small,  isolated  lake,  whereas 
Denhardt's  map  had  represented  it  as  a  long  inland  sea. 
The  natives,  however,  persisted  that,  in  addition  to  the 
small  lake  reached  by  Thomson,  there  was  a  much 
greater  lake,   which  they  called   the  lake  of  Samburu, 


THE   UGANDA   ROAD  89 

and  that  this  was  the  lake  marked  on  Denhardt's  map 
as  Baringo. 

To  settle  the  existence  of  the  great  lake  of  Samburu 
was  the  main  object  of  the  third  great  geographical 
expedition  across  Masai-land.  It  was  commanded  by 
Count  Samuel  Teleki  von  Szek,  who  was  accompanied 
by  Lieut,  von  Hohnel.  The  expedition  was  organized 
at  Zanzibar,  two  years  after  Thomson's  return.  Teleki 
secured  the  services  of  Jumbe  Kimameta,  the  trader 
who  had  helped  Thomson  across  Masai-land,  and  as 
head  man  of  his  caravan,  he  took  Dualla  Idris,  a  young 
Somali,  who  had  distinguished  himself  by  his  bravery 
during  Stanley's  march  across  Africa,  and  by  his  capa- 
city as  head  man  of  the  James  and  Lort-Phillips'  expe- 
dition in  Somali-land. 

Teleki's  caravan  numbered  300  natives,  and  was  ex- 
ceptionally well  provided  with  stores  and  trade  goods. 
Teleki  took  with  him  6,000  lb.  of  beads,  4,800  lb.  of 
iron  wire  and  cowries,  and  80  loads  of  cotton  cloth. 
The  expedition  left  Zanzibar  on  23rd  January,  1887, 
and  the  march  inland  began  from  Pangani  on  3rd 
February.  It  took  the  German  road  to  Taveta,  whence 
Kilima  Njaro  was  explored  and  partially  ascended. 
Teleki  joined  forces  with  a  party  of  native  traders,  and 
the  combined  caravans  entered  southern  Masai-land. 
To  von  Hohnel  we  are  indebted  for  an  account  of  the 
structure  of  this  part  of  British  East  Africa.     The  ex- 


90  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

plorers  passed  along  Lake  Nyiri,  which  must  once  have 
been  far  larger  than  at  present,  for  between  the  lake 
and  the  mountains  to  the  north-east  are  tracts  of  barren, 
sandy  desert,  covered  with  snow-white  natron,  which 
was  deposited  by  the  evaporation  of  the  lake  waters. 
Beyond  Nyiri  the  country  is  richer,  and  the  grass-clad 
steppes  of  the  Kapte  plains  include  some  of  the  most 
populous  districts  of  Masai-land. 

On  August  27th  the  expedition  reached  Ngongo 
Bagas,  on  the  south-eastern  corner  <(8if  the  Kikuyu 
country,  where  its  most  important  work  began. 

The  Kikuyu  country  is  a  narrow  belt,  some  eight- 
and-twenty  miles  broad,  extending  from  Ngongo  Bagas 
on  the  south-west,  to  the  slopes  of  Kenya  on  the  north- 
east. The  country  is  completely  surrounded  by  a  belt 
of  dense  forest,  in  the  midst  of  which  the  inhabited  dis- 
trict has  been  cleared.  It  has  an  elevation  of  4,500  to 
6,500  feet,  and  is  well  watered  by  many  rivers,  which 
flow  through  deep  valleys  to  the  south-east.  Its  soil  is 
extremely  fertile.  Owing  to  the  protection  of  the  forest 
girdle,  and  the  system  of  irrigation,  the  Kikuyu  have 
been  able  to  cultivate  vast  plantations,  which  are  un- 
usually well  tilled  and  prolific.  But  before  Teleki's 
journey  this  country  was  unknown.  As  von  Hohnel 
correctly  remarks,  "  Before  our  arrival  little  was  really 
known  about  the  land  or  the  people  of  Kikuyu."  No 
European  had  crossed  the  country.  Fischer  and  Thom- 
son had  skirted  its  south-western  border,  but  no  tra- 


THE  UGANDA  ROAD  91 

veller  had  been  allowed  to  enter  the  great  plantations, 
which  the  Kikuyu  religiously  guarded  from  foreign  in- 
trusion. Teleki  resolved  to  march  along  the  middle  line 
of  the  Kikuyu  land,  to  the  southern  foot  of  Kenya. 

With  infinite  trouble  friendly  relations  with  the 
Kikuyu  were  established.  Teleki  and  some  of  the 
chiefs  were  made  blood  brothers,  and  the  march  began. 
Unluckily  for  the  explorers  they  entered  the  country  in 
September,  the  season  when  the  sugar  cane  is  ripe,  and 
the  natives  haB»te  an  abundance  of  intoxicating  beer. 
Hence  the  warriors  were  drunk,  and  their  insolent  be- 
haviour led  to  continual  quarrels.  For  a  week  the 
strenuous  efforts  of  Teleki  and  von  Hohnel  and  of  the 
leading  local  chiefs  secured  peace  between  the  explorers' 
men  and  the  drunken  Kikuyu.  But  at  length  a  native 
warrior  wounded  a  porter  with  a  poisoned  arrow,  and 
the  Zanzibari  fired  a  volley  in  reply.  Seven  of  the 
Kikuyu  chiefs,  however,  remained  with  Teleki,  and  took 
sides  with  him  against  their  own  people.  In  fact,  faith- 
ful to  the  obligations  imposed  on  them  by  blood  brother- 
hood, the  guides  used  to  warn  Teleki  of  any  hostile 
designs. 

After  the  first  skirmish  the  natives  divided  into  two 
parties,  of  which  one  was  in  favour  of  peace,  while 
the  other  clamoured  for  war.  The  two  factions  became 
so  angry  that  from  argument  they  soon  came  to  blows. 
At  one  conference,  the  peace  party,  suddenly  closed 
up  its  ranks,  and  with  a  terrible  war  cry  charged   its 


92  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

opponents,  and  after  a  ten  minutes'  club  fight  drove 
the  fighting  faction  from  the  field.  Thanks  to  these 
energetic  champions  of  peace,  and  the  tact  and  for- 
bearance of  Count  Teleki,  there  was  a  few  days'  re- 
spite, during  which  the  explorers  marched  through  a 
district,  so  carefully  and  systematically  cultivated  that 
it  might  have  been  in  Europe.  The  natives  were 
friendly,  and  in  return  for  some  strings  of  beads,  used 
to  supply  the  caravan  with  the  thorn  bushes  with  which 
the  camp  was  defended  at  night. 

The  peace,  however,  was  not  permanent.  On  Sep- 
tember 20th  there  was  a  fight  with  2,000  warriors,  who 
shot  half  a  dozen  arrows  at  the  caravan,  but  fled, 
frightened  at  the  noise  of  the  wild  firing  of  the  excited 
porters.  Ten  days  later,  at  Masiyoya,  there  was  a  more 
serious  encounter.  Teleki's  patience  was  now  exhausted, 
and  he  allowed  his  men  to  take  decisive  action.  There 
was  a  sharp  fight ;  the  Suahili  under  Dualla  attacked 
and  burnt  some  villages,  capturing  a  booty  of  19 
prisoners,  90  cows,  and  1,300  sheep. 

This  encounter  taught  the  Kikuyu  better  manners, 
and  Teleki  was  supplied  with  food,  and  allowed  to 
continue  his  journey  without  opposition.  He  left 
Kikuyu,  and  early  in  October  pitched  camp  at  Ndoro, 
at  the  western  foot  of  Mount  Kenya. 

During  a  month's  stay  here,  Teleki  made  the  first 
partial  ascent  of  the  mountain.  The  chief  difficulty  was 
the  passage  of  the  bamboo  zone,  which  consists  of  huge 


THE   UGANDA   ROAD  93 

bamboos,  growing  as  closely  together  as  reeds.  These 
would  have  been  quite  impassable,  if  a  path  had  not 
been  trodden  through  them  by  elephants  and  buffaloes ; 
and,  even  as  it  was,  "  we  often  had  to  use  the  axe,  and 
to  part  the  bamboo  stems,  dripping  wet  with  rain,  with 
our  outstretched  arms — a  most  arduous  and  exhausting 
task." 

Above  the  bamboo  belt  Teleki  entered  a  zone  of 
alpine  meadows,  from  which  he  enjoyed  the  first  near 
view  of  the  Kenyan  snow  fields. 

From  Ndoro  Teleki  crossed  the  prairie  country  of 
Laikipia,  which  occurs  as  a  wide,  broad  valley  between 
Kenya  and  Settima,  and  expands  to  the  north  in  a 
broad,  open  plateau.  The  caravan  reached  the  eastern 
edge  of  the  Rift  Valley,  and  began  the  steep  descent  of 
its  terraced  precipices.  The  scenery  was  so  magnificent 
that  it  moved  the  Zanzibari  to  raptures.  One  of  them, 
Juma,  was  sent  on  to  explore,  and  returned  "in  such 
wonderful  good  spirits,"  says  von  Hohnel,  "  that  one 
would  have  thought  he  had  been  indulging  in  too  much 
tombe  (beer).  He  declared  that  his  delight  was  merely 
at  having  caught  sight  of  the  gleaming  surface  of  Lake 
Baringo."  The  descent  was  difficult ;  hills,  which  from 
the  east  appeared  as  mere  inequalities  of  plain,  were 
found  to  face  the  west  with  almost  perpendicular 
precipices,  from  650  to  1,000  feet  in  height. 

The  descent  was  successfully  accomplished,  and 
Teleki   took    up   his   quarters   at   the  now  well-known 


94  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

food  centre  of  Njemps.  The  country,  however,  was 
suffering  from  famine,  and  the  caravan  had  to  stay 
there  for  more  than  two  months,  till  grain  supplies 
could  be  brought  from  the  mountains,  and  stores  of 
dried  meat  obtained  from  game.  On  the  loth  February, 
1888,  Teleki  and  von  Hohnel  started  north  again,  on 
the  difficult  march  in  search  of  Samburu. 

They  passed  from  Baringo  and  its  fresh  green  sward 
to  a  desert,  where  storms  buried  the  camp  in  sand  and 
dust.  They  discovered  a  mountain  chain,  which  they 
named  after  General  (now  Sir)  Lloyd- Matthews,  the 
Prime  Minister  of  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar.  The  main 
difficulty  was  scarcity  of  water  ;  the  journey  involved 
one  stage  of  fifty  miles,  from  a  camp  where  a  little 
water  was  obtained  by  digging  in  a  stream  bed,  to  the 
next  water  at  the  foot  of  Mount  Nyiro.  The  guide 
engaged  at  Njemps  and  some  of  the  porters  were  lost 
here ;  but  after  wandering  for  five  days  in  the  desert 
with  nothing  to  eat  but  acacia  gum,  they  managed  to 
find  the  track  of  the  caravan,  and  thus  rejoin  it. 

From  Nyiro  it  was  but  a  short  distance  to  the  Lake 
of  Samburu,  but  the  approach  to  it  was  not  encouraging. 
'  With  every  step,  the  scenery  grew  more  and  more 
dreary  and  deserted-looking.  Steep,  rocky  slopes  alter- 
nated with  ravines,  strewn  with  debris,  which  gave  one 
the  impression  of  being  still  glowing  hot,  and  of  having 
been  but  recently  flung  forth  from  some  huge  forge.  .  .  . 
To  the  north,  a  single  peak  gradually  rose  before  us. 


THE   UGANDA   ROAD  95 

the  gentle  contours  rising  symmetrically  from  every 
side,  resolving  themselves  into  one  broad,  pyramidal 
mountain,  which  we  knew  at  once  to  be  a  volcano.  On 
the  east  of  the  mountain  the  land  was  uniformly  flat, 
a  golden  plain  lit  up  by  sunshine,  whilst  in  the  east  the 
base  of  the  volcano  seemed  to  rise  up  out  of  a  bottom- 
less depth,  a  void  which  was  altogether  a  mystery  to 
us.  We  hurried  as  fast  as  we  could  to  the  top  of  our 
ridge,  the  scene  gradually  developing  itself  as  we  ad- 
vanced, until  an  entirely  new  world  was  spread  out 
before  our  astonished  eyes.  The  void  down  in  the 
depths  beneath  became  filled,  as  if  by  magic,  with 
picturesque  mountains  and  rugged  slopes,  with  a  medley 
of  ravines  and  valleys,  which  appeared  to  be  closing  up 
from  every  side  to  form  a  fitting  frame  for  the  dark 
blue,  gleaming  surface  of  the  lake,  stretching  away  be- 
yond as  far  as  the  eye  could  reach.  For  a  long  time 
we  gazed  in  speechless  delight,  spellbound  by  the  beauty 
of  the  scene." 

On  March  6th  the  explorers  reached  the  lake,  to 
find,  to  their  bitter  disappointment,  that  the  water  was 
brackish.  Later  travellers,  such  as  Neumann,  have 
found  the  Rudolf  waters  palatable  and  very  pleasant 
to  drink  ;  but  in  1888,  either  there  must  have  been  a 
failure,  of  the  rainfall  to  the  north,  which  caused  a 
lowering  of  the  lake  level,  and  consequent  concentration 
of  the  salts  in  its  waters,  or  else  the  mineral  springs 
on  the  shore  had,  just  before,  been   unusually  active. 


96  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

The  lake  water  was  rich  in  soda  ;  it  not  only  tasted 
like  lye,  but  it  effervesced  strongly  when  tartaric  acid 
was  poured  into  it. 

The  situation  was  serious.  "  The  full  significance  of 
the  utterly  barren,  dreary  nature  of  the  district  rose 
before  the  caravan  like  some  threatening  spectre.  Into 
what  a  desert  had  we  been  betrayed  !  A  few  scattered 
tufts  of  fine,  stiff  grass,  rising  up  in  melancholy  fashion 
near  the  shore,  from  the  wide  stretches  of  sand,  were  the 
only  bits  of  green,  the  only  signs  of  life  of  any  kind. 
Here  and  there  stood  isolated  skeleton  trees,  stretching 
up  their  bare,  sun-bleached  branches  to  the  pitiless  sky. 
No  living  creature  shared  the  gloomy  solitude  with  us  ; 
and  far  as  our  glass  could  reach,  there  was  nothing  to  be 
seen  but  desert — desert  everywhere.  To  all  this  was 
added  the  scorching  heat,  and  the  ceaseless  buffeting  of 
the  sand-laden  wind,  against  which  we  were  powerless  to 
protect  ourselves  upon  the  beach,  which  offered  not  a 
scrap  of  shelter,  whilst  the  pitching  of  the  tents  in  the 
loose  sand  was  quite  impossible." 

Teleki,  however,  was  determined  to  explore  the  lake. 
For  a  month  the  caravan  marched  northward  along  the 
eastern  shore,  tramping  over  sand  deserts  and  lava 
plains  ;  the  porters  daily  grew  weaker,  owing  to  the 
purgative  action  of  the  soda-charged  lake  waters,  and 
all  the  cattle  died.  Half  way  along  the  eastern  shore, 
a  clan  of  "  Elmolo  "  were  found  living  upon  two  bar- 
ren sand  banks  in  the  lake ;  the  two  islands  together 


i 


THE    UGANDA   ROAD  97 

are  not  a  square  mile  in  area,  but  upon  them  were 
huddled  two  villages  of  huts,  with  a  population  of  some 
1 50  to  200  people,  who  supported  themselves  by  fishing. 
From  these  people  Teleki  got  a  small  supply  of  food, 
and  continued  his  march  to  the  north.  The  water  was 
still  bad.  "  It  tasted  and  smelt  equally  disagreeable,  and 
to  us  Europeans  was  simply  undrinkable,"  says  von 
Hohnel.  "  The  men  were  becoming  so  weak  that 
Dualla's  evening  report  was  usually  watu  wawili 
wamekufa  (two  men  have  died)."  Some  of  the  porters 
went  out  of  their  minds,  threw  down  their  loads,  and 
fled  into  the  bush  to  die. 

At  length,  on  April  4th,  "  after  fifty-four  days'  wander- 
ing in  an  all  but  uninhabited  land,  nearly  bare  of  fresh 
water,  and  of  vegetation,  we  were  once  more  in  a  well- 
populated  district,"  for  the  caravan  found  a  tribe,  the  Re- 
shiat,  living  in  an  alluvial  plain  at  the  northern  end 
of  the  lake. 

Teleki  sojourned  among  these  Reshiat  for  six  weeks 
in  order  to  rest  his  caravan.  He  occupied  the  time  by  a 
journey  eastward  to  Lake  Stephanie,  a  smaller,  but  still 
considerable  lake,  at  a  level  of  some  400  feet  higher 
than  Lake  Rudolf.  The  lake  at  its  southern  end  was 
very  shallow,  and  so  brackish  that,  but  for  the  rain- 
pools,  the  caravan  could  not  have  remained  beside  it. 
That  the  saltness  of  the  water  was  due  to  concentration 
by  drought  is  probable,  as  the  level  of  the  lake  was 
many  feet  lower  than  it  had  been   when  Teleki's  Re- 

H 


98  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

shiat  guide  had  last  been  there,  three  years  previously. 
No  satisfactory  exploration  of  Lake  Stephanie  could  be 
conducted,  as  there  were  no  natives  near  the  lake,  and 
Teleki  could  obtain  no  food  for  his  men.  An  attempt 
to  return  south  along  the  western  shore  of  Lake  Rudolf 
was  also  foiled,  and  that  route  was  first  accomplished 
by  a  Suahili  caravan  from  Mombasa  a  few  years  later. 

Owing  to  the  death  of  so  many  of  his  porters  and 
baggage  animals,  Teleki's  transport  was  seriously  re- 
duced. So  on  leaving  the  Reshiat  he  had  to  load  his 
men  with  burdens  of  from  no  lb.  to  148  lb.  The 
porter's  proper  load  is  from  60  to  65  lb.  Forced 
marches  were  necessary,  and  the  caravan  went  235  miles 
in  sixteen  days.  At  the  southern  end  of  Lake  Rudolf, 
an  active  volcano  was  discovered  and  named  by  von 
Hohnel  the  Teleki  Volcano. 

To  avoid  the  deserts  on  the  eastern  margin  and  floor 
of  the  Rift  Valley,  Teleki  crossed  to  the  west.  He 
reached  the  country  of  the  Turkana — a  tribe  of  Nilotic 
negroes  living  on  the  plateau  to  the  west  and  south-west 
of  Lake  Rudolf.  The  Turkana  attacked  the  caravan, 
and  were  only  repelled  after  a  severe  struggle.  Food 
was  unprocurable,  and  the  caravan  proceeded  southward 
on  the  verge  of  starvation.  Despite  the  Mohammedan 
horror  of  donkey-flesh,  the  men  had  to  live  on  it ;  some 
wild  fig-trees  luckily  supplied  a  few  days'  food,  and 
enabled  the  caravan  to  reach  the  country  of  the  Wasuk. 
The  only  foods  available  were  wild  berries  and  unripe 


THE   UGANDA   ROAD  99 

grain  idhiirra).  So  as  rapidly  as  the  feeble  men  could 
march,  Teleki  pushed  southward.  The  Kerio  was 
reached,  and  it  was  in  flood.  From  sheer  weakness 
some  of  the  natives  were  drowned  at  the  ford.  Von 
Hohnel  was  taken  seriously  ill. 

Teleki  and  Dualla  roused  the  disheartened  porters  to 
continue  their  efforts  ;  and  at  length,  after  an  absence  of 
166  days,  the  exhausted  remnant  of  the  once  powerful 
caravan  reached  its  old  camp  at  Njemps.  Thence,  after 
a  long  rest,  the  caravan  returned  to  Mombasa,  where 
it  arrived  on  the  24th  October,   1888. 

By  this  important  journey,  Teleki  had  explored  the 
last  of  the  great  African  lakes  that  remained  to  be 
discovered ;  he  had  twice  crossed  the  Masai  country 
without  conflict  with  the  natives  ;  and  his  assistant, 
von  Hohnel,  had  mapped  the  whole  length  of  the  Rift 
Valley  in  British  East  Africa. 

This  expedition  closed  the  work  of  the  geographical 
pioneers  in  British  East  Africa.  During  Teleki's  absence 
a  great  change  had  come  over  Eastern  Africa.  When 
he  left  for  the  interior,  the  country  was  a  political  no 
man's  land.  He  reached  Mombasa  to  find  himself  in  a 
British  Protectorate.  The  work  of  the  missionary  and 
of  the  geographical  explorer  had  led  to  the  usual  con- 
sequences— the  arrival  of  the  European  Consul,  and  the 
establishment  of  European  control. 


BOOK    III 

THE  ESTABLISHMENT  OF  BRITISH  CONTROL 

"  First  the  missionary,  then  the  consul,  then  the  general." 
Oriental  Proverb  {vide  Lord  Salisbury). 


Chapter  VII 
STANLEY  AND  THE  UGANDA  MISSION 

"  Work  in  the  world  must  not  consist  entirely  of  the  storage  in 
museums  of  shells,  and  birds,  and  insects  ;  and  the  Continent  of 
Africa  was  never  meant  by  the  all-bounteous  Creator  to  be  merely 
a  botanical  reserve,  or  an  entomological  museum." — Stanley. 

MANY  different  motives  have  reconciled  men 
to  the  inconveniences  of  travel  in  British 
East  Africa.  Krapf  believed  it  his  duty  to 
spread  the  Gospel  news  among  the  East  African  heathen, 
Fischer  was  a  man  of  science,  and  felt  himself  adequately 
rewarded  by  scientific  collections  and  anthropological 
discoveries.  Thomson  and  Teleki,  in  addition  to  their 
geographical  interests,  were  keen  sportsmen,  the  former 
referring  to  his  buffalo  adventure  as  "  one  of  those 
interesting  episodes  which  enliven  African  travel  and 
make  the  life  endurable."  But  while  the  geographers 
were  at  work  on  exploration,  a  school  of  men  was 
arising  whose  ideal  was,  in  the  best  sense  of  the  word 
political.  Their  aim  was  to  improve  the  condition  of 
the  African  native. 


104  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Samuel  Baker  was  the  first  of  these  East  African 
poh'tical  geographers.  As  a  young  man  he  found  his 
greatest  joy  in  the  kilHng  of  big  game,  and  sporting 
interests  led  him  to  Africa,  where  his  feats  entitle  him 
to  rank  as  the  greatest  of  the  East  African  Nimrods. 
He  visited  the  Nile  tributaries  of  Abyssinia  as  a  sports- 
man ;  his  work  there  made  him  a  geographer.  He 
went  to  the  Middle  Nile  to  hunt,  and  passed  thence 
to  the  Upper  Nile  to  explore.  There  he  found  the 
country  devastated  by  the  slave  trade,  and  he  realized 
the  pathos  of  savage  life.  He  accordingly  returned  to 
Europe,   resolved    to   devote    his   best  energies   to  the 

(rescue  of  the  helpless  agricultural  tribes  of  the  Eastern 
Soudan.     From_a  geographer  he  had  developed  into  a 
^statesman. 

The  Austrian  Mission  had  already  been  at  work  in 
the  Upper  Nile  basin,  but  its  results  were  disappointing. 
Baker  saw  that  such  efforts  were  premature.  "  Difficult 
and  almost  impossible,"  said  he,  "  is  the  task  before  the 
missionary.  The  Austrian  Mission  has  failed,  and  the 
stations  have  been  forsaken  ;  this  pious  labour  was  hope- 
less, and  the  devoted  priests  died  upon  their  barren 
field."  Missionaries  can  only  work,  with  reasonable  hope 
of  success,  where  natives  enjoy  security  against  attacks 
by  the  slaver  and  the  raider.  "  The  sower  knows  not 
who  will  reap,  thus  he  limits  his  crop  to  his  bare 
necessities."  Accordingly  Baker  declared  "  that  the 
first  step  necessary,  in  the  improvement  of  the  savage 


STANLEY   AND   THE   UGANDA   MISSION      105 

tribes  of  the  White  Nile  is  the  annihilation  of  the  slave 
trade.  Until  this  be  effected,  no  legitimate  commerce 
can  be  established,  neither  is  there  an  opening  for 
missionary  enterprise ;  the  country  is  sealed  and  closed 
against  all  improvement." 

But  Baker  also  realized  the  fact,  which  has  been 
overlooked  by  many  of  the  anti-slavery  advocates,  that 
to  suppress  slavery  without  establishing  anything  in  its 
place  would  be  useless,  even  where  it  would  be  possible. 
Slavery  is  so  woven  into  the  social  system  of  Eastern 
Africa,  that  its  removal  without  a  substitute  would  be 
the  industrial  ruin  of  the  country.  Intertribal  trade  is 
necessary  to  the  well  being  of  the  natives.  They  want 
iron  weapons  and  tools,  better  domestic  appliances,  and 
more  economical  methods  of  agriculture.  What  is 
wanted  for  the  salvation  of  Africa,  said  Baker,  is 
"  honest  trade."  "  If  Africa  is  to  be  civilized,  it  must 
be  effected  by  commerce,  which,  once  established,  will 
open  the  way  for  missionary  labour." 

Baker  therefore  offered  his  services  to  the  Khedive, 
and  returned  to  the  Upper  Nile  with  a  commission  to 
reorganize  the  Egyptian  provinces  in  the  Soudan, 
suppress  slave  raids,  and  introduce  better  administrative 
methods  than  those  of  the  ordinary  Pasha. 

Baker's  rule  in  the  Soudan,  however,  rare!)-  brought 
him  in  direct  contact  with  British  East  Africa,  His 
successor,  Gordon,  at  one  time  intended  to  annex 
Uganda  to  the   Egyptian  provinces,  and  sent  missions 


io6  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

there.  But  the  influence  of  both  men  on  British  East 
Africa  was  indirect.  The  real  foundations  of  European 
rule  in  Eastern  Equatorial  Africa  were  laid  by  H.  M. 
Stanley. 

Stanley's  work  in  Equatorial  Africa  began  in  1871, 
when  he  was  sent  by  the  New  York  Herald  to  discover 
whether  Livingstone  were  still  alive,  and,  if  so,  to  furnish 
him  with  fresh  supplies.  He  started  on  this  quest,  as  he 
himself  has  told  us,  with  feelings  of  indifference.  His 
first  impressions  on  meeting  Livingstone  were  undeni- 
ably those  of  disappointment,  and  for  some  time  he  was 
more  bored  than  interested.  He  listened  politely  to  an 
exposition  of  Livingstone's  theory  of  the  Central  Afri- 
can river  system.  According  to  this  theory,  the  river 
at  the  northern  end  of  Tanganyika  flowed  out  of  the 
lake.  The  Ujiji  Arabs,  however,  declared  that  it  flowed 
into  the  lake.  The  river  was  easily  accessible,  so  the 
practical  Stanley  resolved  to  go  and  see.  He  engaged 
guides,  arranged  an  expedition,  and  invited  Livingstone 
to  accompany  him  as  his  guest.  The  two  explorers 
travelled  together  round  the  lake  to  its  northern  end, 
and  found  that  the  Arabs'  statement  was  correct. 

This  short  journey  settled  a  great  deal  more  than  the 
flow  of  the  Ruzizi.  Round  the  camp  fires  at  night  Living- 
stone told  Stanley  the  story  of  his  life  and  wanderings, 
and  gradually  roused  in  the  young  journalist  a  deeper 
respect  for  abstract  knowledge  than  he  had  felt  before. 
Stanley  returned    to    the    coast,   leaving     Livingstone 


HENRY    M.    STANLEY,    AX    HIE     IIME    OV     HIS    EIKSl'    EXPLORATIONS 
IN    AFRICA. 


I 


STANLEY   AND   THE   UGANDA   MISSION      107 

to  continue  his  explorations  to  the  west  of  Lake  Tan- 
ganyika. Two  years  later  Livingstone  died,  leaving 
his  work  unfinished. 

Meanwhile,  the  interests  which  Livingstone  had 
roused  in  Stanley  were  growing.  After  Livingstone's 
funeral  in  Westminster  Abbey  in  1874,  Stanley  was 
fired  with  the  resolution  to  complete  the  work  in  which 
his  teacher  had  fallen.  Mr.  Gordon  Bennett  and  the 
Daily  Telegraph  gave  him  the  money,  and  he  was  soon 
back  on  the  East  Coast,  his  life  dedicated  to  African 
service. 

Stanley's  interests  were  twofold.  He  was  anxious  to 
solve  several  geographical  problems.  He  was  ready 
"  to  be,  if  God  willed  it,  the  next  martyr  to  geographical 
science."  But  he  was  still  more  anxious  to  ameliorate 
the  lot  of  the  African  native.  He  had  undertaken, 
nominally  as  his  second,  but  probably  as  his  main 
object,  "  to  investigate  and  report  upon  the  haunts  of 
the  slave  traders." 

Stanley  arrived  at  Zanzibar  on  this  mission  in  1874, 
he  spent  seven  weeks  in  organizing  his  caravan,  and  he 
left  Bagamoyo,  on  the  17th  of  November,  at  the  head 
of  a  force  of  356  men.  His  first  aim  was  to  sail  round 
the  Victoria  Nyanza  in  order  to  settle  the  question 
whether  it  were  one  lake  or  a  group  of  lakes.  He 
marched  to  the  southern  shore  of  the  Nyanza,  taking 
with  him  the  sections  of  a  boat,  which  he  launched 
on  the    lake  at  the  end   of  February,   1875.     On   the 


io8  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

8th  of  March  he  started  on  his  memorable  circum- 
navigation of  the  Victoria  Nyanza.  The  cruise  was  re- 
markably successful.  Stanley  proved  thereby  the  unity 
of  the  Victoria  Nyanza,  and  showed  that  no  river  of  a 
size  corresponding  to  the  Nile  flows  into  the  lake  ;  he 
saw  the  outlet  of  the  Nile  over  the  Ripon  Falls,  and  he 
heard  of  the  volcanoes  of  Masai-land — low  hills  which 
discharge  smoke  and  sometimes  fire  from  their  tops. 
Geographically,  therefore,  the  results  were  important ; 
but  politically,  they  were  more  important  still. 

To  understand  the  political  results  of  Stanley's 
voyage,  we  must  remember  one  ethnological  fact. 
South  of  a  line  across  Equatorial  Africa,  from  the 
Cameroons  on  the  west  to  the  mouth  of  the  Juba  on  the 
east,  the  natives  belong  to  the  group  of  negroes  known 
as  the  Bantu.  A  few  of  the  tribes,  such  as  the  Zulu 
and  their  offshoots  the  Mtabili,  have  acquired  an 
organized  military  system.  But,  as  a  rule,  the  Bantu 
live  in  independent  village  communities  ruled  by  petty 
village  chiefs  or  committees  of  elders.  The  villages,  or 
small  groups  of  villages,  are  isolated  and  usually  hostile 
to  their  neighbours  ;  and,  as  there  is  no  union  between 
the  independent  clans,  they  are  weak  and  at  the  mercy 
of  any  band  of  organized  slave  raiders  that  attack  them. 
While  Stanley  was  marching  from  Bagamoyo  to  the 
Victoria  Nyanza,  he  passed  through  typical  Bantu 
districts,  and  saw  no  opening  for  any  effective  help  till 
he   arrived    in    Uganda,   at    the   northern   end   of  the 


STANLEY   AND  THE   UGANDA   MISSION      109 

Victoria  Nyanza.  Here  he  found  a  more  hopeful 
condition  of  things. 

In  Uganda  the  basis  of  the  population  consists  of 
some  tribes  of  primitive  Bantu.  But  these  aborigines 
have  been  conquered  by  a  higher  race,  which  does  not 
belong  to  the  negro  stock,  and  is  allied  to  the  race  now 
dominant  in  Abyssinia.  The  conquerors  of  Uganda, 
the  Wahuma,  invaded  the  country  from  the  north-east, 
and  established  in  it  an  organized,  centralized  govern- 
ment. The  non-negro  Wahuma  have,  in  fact,  done 
for  Uganda,  what  the  Romans  and  the  Normans  did 
for  England. 

Speke  and  Stanley  have  both  collected  traditions  of 
the  settlement  of  the  Wahuma  in  Uganda.  According 
to  Stanley's  version,  the  first  king  was  Kintu,  who 
migrated  to  Uganda  in  about  the  thirteenth  or  fourteenth 
century.  He  took  with  him  his  wife,  a  cow,  a  goat, 
a  sheep,  a  banana  root,  and  a  sweet  potato.  He  found 
Uganda  uninhabited  and  so  settled  there.  His  wife 
gave  birth  annually  to  four  children  of  such  miraculous 
precocity  that  the  girls,  when  two  years  old,  gave  birth 
to  other  children,  who,  in  turn,  had  families  at  an  equally 
early  age.  Kintu's  sons  prepared  for  themselves  strong 
drink  from  the  banana,  and  under  its  influence,  indulged 
in  wild  debauchery.  At  length  they  threatened  to  kill 
their  parent.  Kintu,  distressed  at  the  wickedness  of 
his  family,  withdrew  to  the  spirit-land.  He  was  suc- 
ceeded by  his  son,  Chewa,  who  organized  a  search  for 


no  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

his  father,  which  continued  for  several  generations. 
Among  Chevva's  successors  was  Kimeia,  the  mighty 
hunter,  whose  feet  trod  holes  in  the  rocks  ;  he  was  a 
model  king,  and  made  Uganda  an  ordered  state.  After 
him  came  Nakwingi,  who  conquered  Unyoro,  and  the 
brave  Kamanya,  who  subdued  the  ferocious  Wakedi. 
Finally,  as  the  thirty-fifth  king  after  Kintu,  came 
Mtesa,  who  was  reigning  at  the  time  of  Stanley's  visit. 

During  his  march  to  the  Victoria  Nyanza,  Stanley 
had  experienced  the  usual  annoyances  of  travel  among 
the  northern  Bantu.  He  had  had  to  buy  food  for  his 
caravan  by  retail,  two  or  three  pounds  at  a  time,  and  to 
haggle  over  the  price  to  resist  extortion  ;  he  had  to  be 
ever  on  the  alert  to  protect  his  camp  from  the  attack 
of  thieves,  and  his  porters  from  being  speared  if  they 
loitered  behind  the  caravan.  During  his  voyage  round 
the  lake  he  had  a  desperate  encounter  with  the  people 
of  Uvuma,  then  the  pirates  of  the  Nyanza. 

On  Stanley's  entrance  to  Uganda  he  found  the  con- 
ditions strikingly  different  from  those  of  the  country  to 
the  south.  The  civility  of  the  natives,  their  ungrudging 
hospitality,  and  their  implicit  obedience  to  the  orders 
of  the  king,  showed  a  political  system  superior  to  any- 
thing among  the  unorganized  Bantu.  As  soon  as 
Stanley  entered  Uganda,  while  journeying  to  see  the 
king,  he  realized,  as  he  tells  us,  "  that  we  were  about 
to  become  acquainted  with  an  extraordinary  monarch 
and    an    extraordinary    people,   as   different    from   the 


STANLEY   AND  THE   UGANDA  MISSION      in 

barbarous  pirates  of  Uvuma  and  the  wild,  mop-headed 
men  of  Eastern  Usukuma,  as  the  British  in  India  are 
from  their  Afridi  fellow-subjects,  or  the  white  Americans 
of  Arkansas  from  the  semi-civilized  Choctaws." 

Stanley  had  been  to  some  extent  prepared  for  the 
contrast  between  Uganda  and  the  Bantu  countries  to 
the  north  by  the  accounts  of  his  predecessors.  But  he 
expected  trouble  from  the  king,  Mtesa,  whom  Speke 
and  Grant  had  described  as  a  vain,  dissipated,  blood- 
thirsty tyrant.  Stanley,  however,  was  welcomed  with  a 
friendly  greeting  and  a  princely  gift  of  food.  This 
cordial  reception  was  at  first  regarded  as  sufficiently 
explained  by  a  dream  of  the  king's  mother.  Mtesa  told 
Stanley  that  "  his  mother  dreamed  a  dream  a  few  nights 
ago,  and  in  her  dream  she  saw  a  white  man  on  this  lake 
in  a  boat  coming  this  way,  and  the  next  morning  she 
told  the  Kabaka  [the  king],  and  lo,  you  have  come." 

The  improvement  in  Mtesa's  behaviour,  however,  was 
not  due  solely  to  a  dream.  When  Speke  was  in  Uganda, 
it  was  the  rule  that  there  should  be  one  execution  daily, 
so  men  and  women  were  butchered  for  the  most  trivial 
offences.  To  touch  the  king's  clothes,  even  by  accident, 
to  look  upon  the  king's  wives,  to  expose  an  inch  of  leg 
when  sitting  on  the  ground,  or  to  disarrange  the  bark 
cloth  robe,  which  is  the  national  dress,  were  capital 
offences.  During  an  excursion  that  Speke  made  with 
Mtesa,  one  of  the  king's  many  wives  offered  her  husband 
some  fruit  she  had  plucked  off  a  tree  ;  for  her  audacity 


112  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

in  venturing  to  offer  the  king  food  the  woman  was 
ordered  to  immediate  execution,  and  her  Hfe  was  only 
saved  by  Speke's  intercession.  "  Nearly  every  day,"  says 
Speke,  "  incredible  as  it  may  appear  to  be,  I  have  seen 
one,  two,  or  three  of  the  wretched  palace  women  led 
away  to  execution,  tied  by  the  hand,  and  dragged  along 
by  one  of  the  body  guard," 

This  reign  of  passion  and  terror  was  at  an  end,  and 
Stanley  found  that  the  change  was  due  to  the  teaching 
of  a  Moslem  missionary,  Mulcy  bin  Salim.  Mtesa  was 
a  different  man  from  the  monster  described  by  Speke. 
"  The  king's  character,"  says  Speke,  "  was  a  mixture  of 
childish  frivolity  and  uncontrollable  passion."  Stanley 
found  him  a  dignified,  intelligent  king,  who  ruled  his 
country  with  justice,  and  had  learnt  to  curb  his  own 
capricious  will. 

Mtesa  was  described  in  Stanley's  first  despatch  from 
Uganda  to  the  Daily  Telegraph,  as  unlike  the  negro,  and 
resembling  "  the  Muscat  Arab  when  slightly  tainted 
with  negro  blood."  Stanley  was  captivated  at  once  by 
his  manner,  "  for  there  was  much  of  the  polish  of  a  true 
gentleman  about  it ;  it  was  at  once  agreeable,  graceful, 
and  friendly." 

In  a  more  detailed  subsequent  description,  Stanley 
tells  us  that  "  the  Kabaka  (king)  is  a  tall,  clean-faced, 
large-eyed,  nervous-looking,  thin  man,  clad  in  a  tarbush, 
a  black  robe,  with  a  white  shirt  belted  with  gold.  He 
has  very  intelligent  and  agreeable  features,  reminding 


STANLEY   AND   THE   UGANDA  MISSION      113 

me  of  some  of  the  faces  of  the  great  stone  images  at 
Thebes.  He  has  the  same  fulness  of  lips,  but  their 
grossness  is  relieved  by  the  general  expression  of  ami- 
ability, blended  with  dignity,  that  pervades  his  face,  and 
the  large,  lustrous,  lambent  eyes,  that  lend  it  a  strange 
beauty,  and  are  typical  of  the  race  from  which  I  believe 
him  to  have  sprung.  His  colour  is  of  a  dark  red  brown, 
of  a  wonderfully  smooth  surface." 

The  political  condition  of  Uganda  under  Mtesa  had 
improved,  and  Stanley  found  the  country  ruled  by  a 
feudal  system,  which,  in  comparison  with  the  isolated 
village  system  of  the  Bantu  tribes,  was  an  advanced 
civilization.  The  king's  word  was  law  throughout  his 
dominions  ;  roads  traversed  the  country  in  every  direc- 
tion ;  causeways  had  been  built  across  the  swamps ; 
justice  was  dispensed  through  a  regular  judicial  system, 
in  which  the  king,  aided  by  his  councillors,  acted  as 
the  supreme  judge ;  the  revenues  were  derived  from 
tribute  paid  by  subject  chiefs  ;  the  palace  was  protected 
by  a  guard  of  3,000  disciplined  warriors,  and  was  at- 
tended by  a  court  of  a  hundred  chiefs,  as  well  armed 
and  clad  as  the  Arabs  of  Zanzibar  and  Oman. 

Mtesa  had  an  army  of  150,000  soldiers,  and  a  navy  of 
325  canoes,  of  which  the  hundred  largest  carried  a  crew 
of  fifty  men  apiece. 

Stanley  at  once  grasped  the  possibilities  of  Uganda. 
He  saw  that  it  could  be  used  as  a  centre  for  the  civiliza- 
tion of  the  surrounding  countries.     His  first  idea  was  to 

I 


114  BRITISH    EAST   AFRICA 

civilize  the  country  by  trade.  "Oh,  for  the  hour,"  he 
exclaimed,  "when  a  band  of  philanthropic  capitalists 
shall  vow  to  rescue  those  beautiful  lands."  But  Stanley 
realized  that  Uganda  could  not  pay  commercially.  It 
had  no  Congo  connecting  it  with  the  East  Coast,  and 
it  yielded  no  sufficient  quantity  of  any  commodity 
valuable  enough  to  maintain  a  considerable  European 
trade. 

There  was  a  second  motive,  however,  to  which  an 
appeal  could  be  made.  The  religious  zeal  which  had 
civilized  the  rough  forests  of  the  north  could  carry  sal- 
vation to  the  malarial  swamps  of  the  Equator.  If, 
thought  Stanley,  Islam  could  have  wrought  so  great  an 
improvement  in  Mtesa  since  Speke's  visit,  Christianity 
could  do  yet  more  ;  Mtesa  might  be  "  the  possible 
Ethelbert,  by  whose  means  the  light  of  the  Gospel 
may  be  brought  to  benighted  Middle  Africa,"  if  only 
Europe  could  supply  an  Augustine. 

"  Mtesa  has  impressed  me,"  he  wrote,  "  as  being  an 
intelligent  and  distinguished  prince,  who,  if  aided  in 
time  by  virtuous  philanthropists,  will  do  more  for 
Central  Africa  than  fifty  years  of  Gospel  teaching,  un- 
aided by  such  authority,  can  do.  I  think  I  see  in  him 
the  light  that  shall  lighten  the  darkness  of  this  benighted 
region.  In  this  man  I  see  the  possible  fruition  of 
Livingstone's  hopes,  for  with  his  aid  the  civilization  of 
Equatorial  Africa  becomes  possible." 

Stanley  resolved  to  appeal  to  England  for  missionary 


STANLEY  AND  THE  UGANDA  MISSION      115 

help ;  and  to  secure  a  friendly  reception  to  any  mis- 
sionaries who  might  go  to  Uganda,  he  set  to  work  to 
replace  Mtesa's  faith  in  Islam  by  faith  in  the  doctrines 
of  Jesus  of  Nazareth. 

Stanley  translated  the  Gospel  of  St.  Luke,  and  wrote 
an  abridgement  of  the  Bible  in  a  language  Mtesa  could 
read.  In  his  business-like  way  he  then  proceeded  to 
convert  the  king.  He  told  Mtesa  the  story  of  Christ  so 
earnestly  and  effectively  that  the  king  renounced  Islam, 
ordered  the  Christian  sabbath  to  be  kept  throughout 
Uganda,  and  promised  to  build  a  church.  He  had  the 
Ten  Commandments,  the  Lord's  Prayer,  and  the  com- 
mandment, "  Thou  shalt  love  thy  neighbour  as  thyself," 
written  in  Arabic  upon  a  board,  and  hung  in  the 
Palace,  so  that  all  his  court  might  see  it  daily  ;  and 
as  a  practical  commentary  on  the  text,  he  pardoned 
some  condemned  rebels  at  Stanley's  request. 

Finally,  Mtesa  begged  Stanley  to  stay  in  his  country 
to  educate  the  people.  Stanley  knew  that  Mtesa's  con- 
version was  very  imperfect,  and  that  the  evil  habits  of 
thirty  years  could  not  be  cured  by  a  few  months'  work. 
To  make  the  conversion  complete  and  real  the  residence 
of  a  permanent  missionary  in  the  country  was  necessary. 
Stanley  could  not  accept  Mtesa's  invitation  for  himself, 
but  he  promised  to  persuade  some  English  missionaries 
to  settle  in  Uganda.  To  prepare  the  way  for  them,  and 
help  them  when  they  arrived,  he  left  behind  an  English- 
speaking  native  Christian,  who  had  been  trained  in  a 


ii6  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

mission  station  on  the  coast.  Then  he  sent  home  a 
glowing  description  of  Uganda  as  a  mission  field,  and 
an  impassioned  appeal  to  Christian  England  to  send 
out  a  suitable  missionary.  He  sketched,  moreover,  the 
sort  of  man  who  was  wanted. 

"  What  a  field  and  harvest  ripe  for  the  sickle  of 
civilization!  It  is  not  the  mere  preacher,  however,  that 
is  wanted  here.  The  bishops  of  Great  Britain  collected, 
with  all  the  classic  youth  of  Oxford  and  Cambridge, 
would  effect  nothing,  by  mere  talk,  with  the  intelligent 
people  of  Uganda.  It  is  the  practical  Christian  tutor, 
who  can  teach  people  how  to  become  Christians,  cure 
their  diseases,  construct  dwellings,  understand  and  ex- 
emplify agriculture,  and  turn  his  hand  to  anything — 
this  is  the  man  who  is  wanted.  Such  an  one,  if  he  can 
be  found,  would  become  the  saviour  of  Africa.  He  must 
be  tied  to  no  church  or  sect,  but  profess  God  and  His 
Son  and  the  moral  law,  and  live  a  blameless  Christian, 
inspired  by  liberal  principles,  charity  to  all  men,  and 
devout  faith  in  Heaven.  He  must  belong  to  no  nation 
in  particular,  but  to  the  entire  white  race." 

Stanley's  letter  was  entrusted  to  Lieutenant  Linant 
de  Bellefonds,  a  French  officer  in  the  Egyptian  service, 
whom  Gordon  sent  on  a  mission  to  Uganda  while  Stanley 
was  there.  Linant  was  killed  on  his  return  journey, 
but  the  letter  was  found  by  accident  and  sent  on  to 
England,  where  it  arrived  in  November,  1875.  It  was 
received   with   coldness   by  many  men,  such   as   Lord 


STANLEY   AND  THE   UGANDA   MISSION     117 

Lawrence,  who  were  of  great  influence  in  the  missionary 
world.  Stanley  was  unpopular,  and  was  distrusted  by 
English  society.  In  some  quarters  the  letter  was  treated 
as  a  joke ;  the  Saturday  Review  saw  the  humour  of  an 
alliance  between  the  Daily  Telegraph,  the  New  York 
Herald  and  Mr.  Stanley  on  the  one  side,  and  the  Church 
Missionary  Society  on  the  other. 

But  the  letter  arrived  at  a  time  when  Europe  was 
taking  an  especially  keen  interest  in  African  work.  A 
mission  settlement  for  freed  slaves  had  just  been  estab- 
lished on  the  eastern  coast  opposite  Mombasa.  Gordon's 
work  in  the  Soudan  was  being  watched  with  eager 
interest,  and  Stanley's  powerful  appeal  deeply  moved 
the  British  public.  A  great  meeting  was  held  in  Exeter 
Hall ;  Mtesa's  invitation  was  accepted  ;  the  necessary 
funds  were  soon  subscribed  ;  and  a  party  of  missionaries 
left  London  for  Uganda. 

The  first  Uganda  Mission  consisted  of  six  men,  under 
the  command  of  a  retired  naval  lieutenant,  Shergold 
Smith.  The  party  left  England  in  the  spring  of  1876.  It 
was  delayed  on  the  eastern  coast  of  Africa,  and  it  was  not 
until  May,  1 877,  that  four  members  of  the  party  reached 
Stanley's  old  camp  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  Nyanza. 
There  the  doctor  died,  and  O'Neill  was  left  to  super- 
intend the  building  of  a  native  boat.  Lieutenant  Smith 
and  the  Rev.  C.  T.  Wilson  crossed  the  lake  to  Uganda, 
where  they  were  warmly  welcomed  by  Mtesa.  Smith 
returned  to  bring  up  more  stores  and  men,  but  he  and 


ii8  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

O'Neill  were  killed  by  the  natives  of  Ukerewe,  an  island 
on  the  lake,  owing  to  a  dispute  over  the  purchase  of 
a  boat.  The  news  of  this  succession  of  disasters  dis- 
couraged the  friends  of  the  Uganda  Mission  at  home ; 
but  they  were  inspired  to  renewed  efforts  by  Mtesa's 
welcome,  the  faith  of  the  English  people,  and  the 
veteran  Krapf's  confident  assurance  of  success.  "  Though 
many  missionaries  may  fall  in  the  fight,"  wrote  Krapf, 
"  yet  the  survivors  will  pass  over  the  slain  in  the 
trenches,  and  take  this  great  African  fortress  for  the 
Lord." 

Four  more  missionaries  were  accordingly  sent  to 
Uganda  by  the  route  up  the  Nile.  In  the  meanwhile 
Wilson,  who  had  been  left  alone  by  Smith  in  Uganda, 
had  left  for  the  southern  end  of  the  lake,  as  he  did 
not  get  on  very  well  with  Mtesa.  Here  in  August,  1878, 
he  was  joined  by  A.  M.  Mackay,  the  last  member  of 
Shergold  Smith's  party,  and  together  they  returned  to 
Uganda,  where,  after  suffering  shipwreck  and  other  ad- 
ventures on  the  way,  they  landed  on  November  ist,  1878. 
Wilson  left  the  same  month  to  meet  the  missionaries 
who  were  coming  up  the  Nile,  and  Mackay  remained 
in  charge  of  the  Mission  station  at  Mtesa's  capital, 
Rubaga.  Mackay  soon  acquired  great  influence  over 
Mtesa,  and,  by  February  14th,  1879,  when  Wilson  re- 
turned with  three  of  the  recruits,  the  position  of  the 
Mission  had  been  greatly  strengthened.  Wilson  and 
Felkin  returned  at  once  to  England  with  some  envoys 


STANLEY   AND   THE   UGANDA  MISSION      119 

from  Mtesa,  leaving  Mackay,  Litchfield,  and  Pearson  to 
carry  on  the  evangelization  of  Uganda. 

The  English  Mission  was  now  well  established  ;  there 
were  three  missionaries  at  work ;  the  king  was  friendly, 
and  though  the  Mohammedan  party  were  jealous,  it 
could  do  nothing  against  the  missionaries  while  the 
king  was  on  their  side. 

The  situation  was  suddenly  changed  by  the  appear- 
ance of  a  new  and  unexpected  factor.  Stanley's  appeal 
to  Christian  Europe  to  evangelize  Uganda  had  been 
only  too  successful.  For  a  week  after  Dr.  Felkin  and 
his  colleagues  reached  Rubaga,  the  capital  of  Uganda, 
there  arrived  two  Catholic  missionaries  belonging  to  the 
order  of  the  White  Fathers  of  Algeria. 

The  newcomers  were  white  men  ;  they  were  Chris- 
tians ;  they  had  come  in  response  to  Stanley's  appeal. 
So  they  were  welcomed  by  Mtesa.  There  was  immediate 
friction  between  the  Catholic  and  Protestant  missionaries, 
which  culminated  in  a  deplorable  quarrel  in  Mtesa's 
presence  at  a  religious  service  that  was  being  conducted 
by  Mackay.  Pere  Lourdel  called  the  Protestant  Bible 
"  a  book  of  lies  " ;  Mackay  made  some  remarks  about 
the  Virgin  Mary  and  the  Pope.  Mtesa  was  bitterly  and 
genuinely  disappointed.  The  curse  of  Uganda  had 
been  faction  feuds,  in  which  religious  quarrels  have 
played  a  leading  part.  Apparently,  Mtesa's  main 
motive  in  wishing  to  Christianize  his  country  was,  by 
the  introduction  of  a  new  and  peace-teaching  religion. 


I20  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

to  oust  the  rest.  As  soon  as  he  found  that  the  Christian 
missions  divided  into  two  hostile  parties,  and  thus  in- 
tensified reh'gious  feuds  instead  of  healing  them,  Mtesa 
regarded  Christianity  as  useless  to  him.  "  Every  white 
man  has  a  different  religion.  How  can  I  know  what  is 
right  ?  "  asked  the  puzzled  king. 

Accordingly,  he  told  both  parties  of  missionaries  to 
return  to  Europe,  and  there  decide  which  was  the  true 
religion,  and,  when  they  had  settled  that  problem  be- 
tween themselves,  they  could  come  back  and  tell  him, 
and  he  would  believe  them.  But  until  then  he  had  no 
more  use  for  either  of  them. 

The  missionaries  were  not  expelled,  for  Mtesa  was 
still  faithful  to  his  promise  to  Stanley.  He  continued 
to  supply  them  with  food  and  to  protect  them.  But 
the  chance  for  the  Christianization  of  Uganda  had  been 
lost.  The  king  was  now  indifferent;  the  Mohammedans 
could  be  openly  hostile,  and  Christianity  made  no 
substantial  progress  during  the  rest  of  Mtesa's  rule. 

Luckily  for  the  missions,  however,  Mtesa  soon  after- 
wards quarrelled  with  the  Mohammedans.  They  in- 
censed the  king  by  refusing  meat  from  his  table,  because 
it  had  not  been  killed  according  to  Mohammedan  rites. 
The  fastidious  Mohammedans  declared  the  meat  was 
not  fit  for  dogs,  and  many  of  them  were  executed  for 
this  injudicious  expression  of  opinion.  Hence  the 
Christian  missions  gained  some  ground. 

The   Catholics   claim   to   have   secured   most  of  the 


STANLEY   AND  THE   UGANDA   MISSION      121 

converts,  and  so  the  native  hostility  was  mainly  directed 
against  their  mission.  Their  position  became  unbear- 
able, and  in  1882  they  withdrew  to  the  southern  shore 
of  the  Nyanza.  Mackay  and  two  other  members  of 
the  Protestant  mission  stayed  on,  but  they  had  to  act 
with  the  greatest  caution. 

In  1884  Mtesa  died,  and  was  succeeded  by  Mwanga 
a  son  chosen  owing  to  having  such  close  physical  re- 
semblance to  Mtesa,  that  his  paternity  was  free  from 
doubt.  Mwanga  was  jealous  of  the  Europeans,  and  re- 
solved to  get  rid  of  them.  He  arrested  the  missionaries, 
and  began  a  persecution  of  the  native  converts,  three  of 
whom  were  burnt  to  death  in  January,  1885.  The  per- 
secution, however,  was  at  first  intermittent,  and  the 
missionaries  were  soon  released. 

Next  year  matters  were  brought  to  a  crisis  by  the 
approach  of  Bishop  Hannington  along  that  road  to 
Uganda,  by  which,  according  to  native  tradition,  the 
future  ruler  of  Uganda  should  come.  Protests  against 
the  Bishop's  choice  of  this  route  were  made,  both  in 
England  by  Joseph  Thomson,  and  in  Uganda  by  the 
missionaries.  So  strong  was  the  feeling  in  Uganda,  that 
Mackay  promised  Mwanga  that  the  Bishop  should  not 
enter  Uganda  by  the  road,  but  by  canoe  across  the 
lake ;  and  he  sent  an  emphatic  message  to  this  effect 
to  the  Bishop.  The  warnings,  however,  were  disregarded ; 
it  is  possible  that  Mackay's  miscarried.  Hannington 
pushed   ahead    of    his    caravan   with   forty   men,   and 


122  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA  ^ 

reached  the  village  of  Lubwas,  on  the  eastern  bank  of 
the  Nile.  Here  he  was  detained  by  the  chief,  until  orders 
respecting  him  came  from  the  king.  They  came,  and 
Bishop  Hannington  and  his  forty  men  were  murdered 
on  October  22nd,  1885. 

This  event  closed  the  direct  eastern  road  to  Uganda 
for  some  years.  It  led  to  still  greater  difficulties  in  the 
position  of  the  missionaries  in  Uganda.  Mwanga  felt 
that  he  had  sinned  beyond  forgiveness,  and  the  perse- 
cution of  the  native  converts  was  renewed.  Missionary 
work  was  ^rendered  impossible,  and  all  the  Europeans 
left  Uganda,  except  Mackay,  who  remained  alone  in 
the  country  for  a  year.  In  July,  1887,  he  too  followed 
his  colleagues,  and  it  seemed  as  if  the  failure  of  the 
Uganda  Mission,  which  had  begun  work  ten  years 
before  with  brilliant  promise,  was  final  and  complete. 


I 


Chapter  VIII 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY  AND 
THE  STRUGGLE  FOR  WITU 

Hamlet.     Goes  it  against  the  main  of  Poland,  sir, 

Or  for  some  frontier  ? 
Captain.     Truly  to  speak,  and  with  no  addition. 

We  go  to  gain  a  little  patch  of  ground 

That  hath  in  it  no  profit  but  the  name. 

To  pay  five  ducats,  five,  I  would  not  farm  it  ; 

Nor  will  it  yield  to  Norway  or  the  Pole  . 

A  ranker  rate,  should  it  be  sold  in  fee. 
Hamlet.     Why,  then  the  Polack  never  will  defend  it. 
Captain.     Yes,  'tis  already  garrisoned. 
Hamlet.     Two  thousand  souls,  and  twenty  thousand  ducats 

Will  not  debate  the  question  of  this  straw. 

IN  the  last  chapter  we  have  seen  that  Stanley's  visit 
to  Uganda  in  1875  led  to  the  introduction  of  two 
rival  bands  of  missionaries.  Their  settlement 
altered  the  political  conditions  of  the  country,  for  the 
Protestants  were  armed  with  letters  from  the  British 
Foreign  Office  which,  they  claimed,  gave  them  a  semi- 
official position.  But  Stanley's  first  journey  across 
Africa   was  attended  by  more  immediately  important 


124  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

political  results  than  the  foundation  of  the  Uganda 
Mission.  It  was  the  direct  cause  of  the  chain  of 
circumstances,  which  led  to  the  division  of  tropical 
Africa  among  the  European  Powers.  This  partition  has 
had  such  a  profound  effect,  not  only  on  Africa,  but  on 
Europe,  that  Stanley's  journey  must  rank  with  Co- 
lumbus' voyage  to  America,  and  Vasco  da  Gama's 
discovery  of  the  Cape  route  to  India,  as  the  three 
geographical  achievements  that  have  most  deeply 
affected  the  politics  of  the  world. 

At  the  end  of  Stanley's  visit  to  Uganda,  he  returned 
to  his  camp  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  Victoria 
Nyanza.  Thence  he  turned  westward  to  a  region  where 
the  need  of  civilizing  influences  was  more  urgent  than 
in  Uganda.  He  arrived  on  the  banks  of  the  Lualaba, 
which  had  been  previously  reached  by  Livingstone  and 
Cameron.  It  was  still  unknown,  however,  whether  the 
river  was  the  head  stream  of  the  Congo  or  of  the  Nile. 
The  seventeenth  century  geographers  (see  e.g.  Sanson's 
map,  p.  48)  represented  it  as  the  upper  part  of  the 
Nile  ;  and  the  nineteenth  century  authorities,  under  the 
influence  of  Livingstone  and  Burton,  generally  accepted 
the  same  view.  Previous  efforts  to  settle  the  question 
by  following  the  Lualaba  to  the  sea  had  failed.  The 
difficulties  were  appalling,  but  Stanley  overcame  them 
all ;  he  left  the  last  of  his  three  European  comrades 
dead  upon  the  way,  and  with  the  remnants  of  his 
caravan  he  reached  the  Atlantic  at  the  mouth  of  the 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY     125 

Congo.  He  thus  settled  the  last  of  the  great  geo- 
graphical problems  connected  with  the  sources  of  the 
Nile,  and  the  river  system  of  Equatorial  Africa.  But 
the  political  results  were  even  more  important  than  the 
geographical.  Stanley  found  the  magnificent  water- 
way of  the  Congo  used  only  by  Arab  slavers  and 
their  allies  for  attacks  on  the  weak  and  industrious 
tribes.  He  saw  the  terrible  plight  of  the  Congo  natives, 
and  returned  home  to  organize  a  mission  for  their  pro- 
tection. Like  a  modern  Peter  the  Hermit,  he  preached 
a  crusade  through  Europe  and  America,  and  persuaded 
the  King  of  the  Belgians  to  join  him  in  the  adventure. 
An  International  African  Association  was  established, 
and  Stanley  returned  to  Africa  in  1879  to  found  the 
Congo  Free  State. 

The  Free  State  was  established  from  philanthropic 
motives.  "  I  am  charged,"  wrote  Stanley,  "  to  open, 
and  keep  open  if  possible,  such  districts  and  countries 
as  I  may  explore,  for  the  benefit  of  the  commercial 
world.  The  mission  is  supported  by  a  philanthropic 
society,  which  numbers  noble-minded  men  of  several 
nations.  It  is  not  a  religious  society  ;  but  my  in- 
structions are  entirely  in  that  spirit.  No  violence  must 
be  used,  and  wherever  rejected  the  mission  must  with- 
draw to  seek  another  field." 

In  that  spirit  the  organization  of  the  Congo  Free 
State  was  begun.  Stations  were  built,  missions  es- 
tablished, and  a  considerable  trade  sprang  up.     After 


126  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

five  years'  successful  work,  Stanley  returned  to  England 
for  a  rest,  leaving  the  country  ruled  by  a  band  of  young 
heroes,  such  as  the  American  Glave,  the  Englishman 
Deane,  and  the  Belgian  Coquilhat,  working  together 
in  a  spirit  of  self-sacrificing  devotion. 

The  fair  promise  of  those  early  years  led  to  a  very 
exaggerated  idea  of  the  commercial  value  of  the 
interior  of  Africa ;  and  this  view  had  wide-reaching 
results.  Germany  was  keenly  feeling  the  loss  of  her 
subjects  by  emigration  ;  her  statesmen  were  beginning 
to  realize  the  possibility  of  a  commercial  union  of  the 
British  Empire,  which  would  exclude  German  manu- 
factures from  the  British  Colonies.  Increasing  military 
expenditure  rendered  her  increasingly  dependent  on  her 
manufactures.  German  statesmen  and  commercial  men 
were  accordingly  anxious  to  found  a  colonial  empire 
of  their  own.  The  Monroe  doctrine  kept  them  out 
of  South  America ;  Asia  was  all  occupied  ;  Africa  only 
was  left.  Bismarck,  regarding  English  friendship  as 
essential  to  his  policy  in  Europe,  allowed  nothing  to  be 
done  that  might  jeopardize  his  relations  with  England. 
He  damped  the  ardour  of  the  German  colonial  party 
until,  after  some  fencing  with  Lord  Granville,  he  knew 
that  England  would  only  make  Platonic  protests  so 
long  as  English  colonies  were  not  directly  touched. 

As  soon  as  Bismarck's  mind  was  clear  on  this  point, 
he  allowed  a  step  to  be  taken  which  precipitated  the 
partition  of  Africa  among  the  European  Powers. 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY      127 

The  German  flag  was  hoisted  first  on  the  western  coast 
of  South  Africa,  and  then  on  the  eastern  coast,  opposite 
Zanzibar.     German  agents   had  repeatedly  visited  the 
eastern  coast,  between  1880  and  1885,  and  made  treaties 
with  various  chiefs  in  the  interior.     These  treaties  were 
unofficial   until  after    17th  February,    1885,   when    the 
German  Kaiser  granted  his  charter  of  protection  to  the 
Society  of  German  Colonization,  which  acquired  these 
treaty  rights.     England  at  once  protested  against  any 
step    which  would  interfere  with  the  independence  of 
the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar,  or  with  the  vested  commercial 
interests  of  the  many  British   Indian  merchants  who 
had  trading  stations  and   plantations  in  Zanzibar  and 
along  the   coast.      British   intervention  in   the  dispute 
between  Germany   and   Zanzibar  was  justified  by  the 
position  created  by  Lord  Canning's  award,  which  settled 
East  African  affairs  after  the  death  of  the  Sultan  Said 
Said  at  sea  in   1856.     Said's  sons  quarrelled  as  to  the 
division  of  their  heritage,  and  the  dispute  was  referred 
for  arbitration  to  Lord  Canning,  then  Viceroy  of  India. 
By  his  award,  Zanzibar  was  declared  independent  of 
Oman,  and   the   East    African    coast  was  assigned  to 
Zanzibar.     In  lieu  of  his  African  possessions  the  I  man 
was  awarded  an  annual  subsidy,  to  be  paid  by  India. 
This    payment  placed    Zanzibar  in    the  position  of  a 
subsidized    dependency    of    India.       Accordingly   the 
German  Government  declared  that  it  had  no  intention 
of  interfering  with   the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar,  and   that 


128  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

the  territories,  which  its  agents  had  acquired,  lay  lOO 
miles  further  inland  than  the  Sultan's  dominions.  The 
Sultan  replied  that  his  sphere  of  influence  extended  so 
far  inland  as  to  include  all  the  territory  in  question  ; 
that  the  chiefs  who  had  made  the  treaties  were  his 
subjects  ;  and  that  as  he  had  not  sanctioned  the  treaties 
they  were  null  and  void. 

British   influence   in   Zanzibar  was  at  this  time  all- 
powerful,  owing  to  the  consummate  tact  of  our  Consul- 
General,  Sir  John  Kirk.     His  influence  over  the  Sultan 
was  supreme,  and  he  was  able  to  induce  Said  Barghash 
to  accept  a  compromise,  which  secured  a  peaceful  escape 
from  an  awkward  position.     The  Sultan's  claims  were 
indefinite  ;  and  it  was  not  clear  to  how  much  territory 
he  had  a  just  title.     He  was  persuaded  to  allow  his 
boundaries  to  be  defined  by  an  international  agreement. 
After  a  commission  of  inquiry,  it  was  agreed  that  the 
dominions  of  the   Sultan   were  Zanzibar,  Pemba,  the 
Lamu   archipelago,  and   some   smaller  islands  ;  in  ad- 
dition to  a  ten  mile]  belt  along  the  coast  from  Tunghi 
Bay  to  Kipini  at  the  mouth  of  the  Ozi,  and  the  ports  of 
Kismayu,  Brava,  Merka  and   Magadoxo,  with  the  land 
for  ten  miles  around  each  of  them.     The  territory  be- 
hind the   Sultan's  ten-mile   slip  was  divided  into  two 
parts  ;  the  southern  portion  was  declared  to  be  under 
the  influence  of  Germany,  and  the  northern  was  assigned 
to  England. 

This  agreement  was  accepted  in   1886,  and  early  in 


ZA^z^BAR  natives:  gathering  cloves. 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY      129 

1887  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar  granted  a  concession  of 
all  his  territory  on  the  mainland,  that  lay  in  front  of 
the  British  sphere  of  influence,  to  the  British  East 
African  Association,  Said  Barghash  had  offered  a 
concession  of  the  whole  of  his  mainland  territories  to 
a  British  syndicate,  but  the  offer  was  rejected  at  the 
instance  of  the  British  Government.  But  this  limited 
concession  was  now  officially  approved,  and  it  was 
granted  on  25th  May,  1887.  The  Association  in  the 
following  year  was  reconstituted  as  the  British  East 
Africa  Company,  which  received  a  Royal  Charter  on 
3rd  September,  1888. 

In  March,  1888,  the  great  Said  Barghash  died.  He 
was  succeeded  by  Said  Khalifa,  who,  in  April,  1888, 
granted  a  concession  of  the  district  that  fronted  the 
German  sphere  to  a  German  East  African  Company. 
The  terms  of  the  concession  were  practically  identical 
with  those  under  which  the  British  East  Africa  Com- 
pany held  its  territories.  The  German  forces  arrived  to 
take  possession  in  August. 

The  annexation  was  necessarily  unpopular  among 
the  leading  natives,  but  probably  there  would  have 
been  no  serious  opposition  to  the  change  of  govern- 
ment but  for  an  unlucky  accident.  The  German 
Governor  of  Pangani  had  taken  with  him  some  dogs. 
The  day  he  landed,  one  of  these  wretched  poodles 
strayed  into  a  mosque ;  the  Governor  rushed  in  to 
take     the     dog     away,    knowing     how    outraged    the 

K 


130  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Mohammedans  would  be  by  this  most  unholy  pro- 
fanation of  their  mosque.  This  action  was  misunder- 
stood or  misrepresented.  The  news  spread  through 
the  town  that  the  Governor  had  marched  into  the 
mosque  with  his  dogs ;  the  population  rose  en  masse ^ 
and  the  Governor  was  expelled. 

Mr.  George  S.  Mackenzie  arrived  at  Mombasa  to 
undertake  the  administration  of  British  East  Africa 
at  about  the  same  time.  He  also  was  received  with 
suspicion  ;  but  by  the  presence  of  two  British  men-of- 
war  and  of  some  of  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar's  troops 
order  was  maintained. 

Mr.  Mackenzie,  with  sound  judgment,  allowed  the 
Sultan's  flag  to  be  retained,  and  the  Arab  Lewali  to 
keep  their  appointments  as  governors  of  the  coast 
towns.  Thus  the  native  suspicions  were  allayed,  and  the 
Company  peacefully  initiated  its  rule  in  its  capital,  the 
historic  city  of  Mombasa. 

The  administrator  of  the  British  East  Africa  Com- 
pany, immediately  on  his  arrival,  was  faced  by  two 
difficulties,  for  neither  of  which  was  the  Company 
responsible.  These  were  the  insurrections  in  German 
East  Africa,  and  the  injudicious  actions  of  the  British 
missionaries  in  the  stations  near  Mombasa. 

At  this  time  the  British  Government — possibly 
owing  to  its  reliance  on  German  help  in  Egypt — was 
behaving  with  great  consideration  to  the  German 
Colonial   party.     The  Germans   found    it  necessary   to 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY     131 

blockade  the  coast  of  German  East  Africa  to  enable 
them  to  suppress  the  rebellion  there.  It  was  mani- 
festly useless  to  blockade  the  southern  coast  so  long 
as  free  trade  was  allowed  immediately  to  the  north. 
So,  to  help  Germany,  the  English  Government  agreed 
to  blockade  its  own  coast  and  stop  the  trade  of  its 
own  subjects.  The  blockade,  of  course,  was  bitterly 
resented  by  the  native  traders,  who  objected  to  their 
trade  being  stopped  in  order  to  punish  the  subjects  of 
an  adjacent  country. 

The  east  coast  Arabs  were  also  aggrieved  by  the 
action  of  missionaries,  who  systematically  used  their 
stations  as  asylums  for  runaway  slaves.  This  question 
placed  the  Company's  administrator  in  a  very  un- 
comfortable dilemma.  The  British  East  Africa 
Company's  motto  was  "  Light  and  Liberty."  As  the 
administrator  of  a  Company  with  such  ideals,  Mr. 
Mackenzie  was  most  reluctant,  as  his  first  important 
official  act,  to  consign  again  to  slavery  a  number  of 
refugees,  some  of  whom  had  been  for  years  resident 
on  the  mission  stations.  On  the  other  hand,  to  have 
admitted  the  missionaries'  right  to  harbour  fugitive 
slaves  would  have  been  fatal  to  the  industrial  system 
of  British  East  Africa,  and  would  have  alienated  the 
Arab  support.  Sudden  interference  with  the  labour 
system,  on  which  all  the  coast  plantations  were  culti- 
vated, would  have  meant  the  commercial  ruin  of  the 
coastlands,  and  immediate  Arab  rebellion.     The  policy 


132  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

would  have  been  suicidal.  Mackenzie  accordingly 
decided  to  persuade  the  Arabs  to  grant  their  freedom 
to  all  the  escaped  slaves,  then  resident  at  the  mission 
stations,  on  payment  of  a  moderate  compensation. 
The  Arabs  agreed  to  this  arrangement,  while  the 
missionaries  promised  not  to  give  asylum  to  any 
future  refugees.  On  ist  January,  1889,  the  escaped 
slaves  were  assembled  at  Rabai,  and  by  the  payment 
of  ;^3,5oo  compensation,  the  British  East  Africa 
Company  generously  secured  the  freedom  of  1,422 
slaves. 

The  Company's  officers  by  this  action  gained  the 
goodwill  of  the  native  merchants  and  planters,  on 
whose  prosperity  depended  the  chance  of  the  country 
being  able  to  pay  its  way.  Mr.  Mackenzie  worked  in 
sympathetic  co-operation  with  the  Lewali  of  Mombasa, 
and  the  future  looked  propitious.  But  unfortunately 
the  Company's  energies  were  soon  withdrawn  from 
the  development  of  the  territory  already  acquired  to 
a  prolonged  and  ruinous  struggle  with  Germany  for 
the  comparatively  worthless  district  of  Witu. 

The  original  concession  granted  to  the  British  East 
Africa  Company  by  the  Sultan,  only  applied  to  the 
territory  between  the  Umba  River  on  the  south  and 
the  port  of  Kipini,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Ozi,  to  the 
north  ;  the  long  tract  of  coast  between  the  Ozi  and 
the   Juba,   and    the  islands   off  the   coast,  were   to   be 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY     133 

dealt  with  by  a  subsequent  agreement  Their  cession 
to  the  Company,  however,  had  been  verbally  promised 
by  Said  Barghash,  and  the  promise  had  been  con- 
firmed by  his  successor.  The  German  agreement 
with  England  in  1886  defined  the  southern  limit  of 
British  East  Africa,  and  across  that  frontier  line  the 
Germans  guaranteed  not  to  encroach.  There  was 
not,  however,  in  the  Anglo-German  agreement  any 
explicit  clause  restricting  the  Germans  from  operating 
in  the  territory  north  of  the  Tana  River,  which  river 
the  agreement  defined  as  the  northern  boundary  of 
the  British  sphere. 

Immediately  to  the  north  of  the  Tana,  in  the  angle 
between  that  river  and  the  coast,  was  the  independent 
state  of  Witu.  It  had  been  founded  by  a  Suahili 
outlaw,  named  Fumo  Bakari,  who  had  collected  a 
powerful  band  of  Suahili  ruffians.  Under  his  control 
Witu  became  an  East  African  Cave  of  Adullam,  where 
escaped  criminals  and  fraudulent  bankrupts  found  safe 
refuge.  Thence  these  miscreants  raided  the  planta- 
tions of  the  surrounding  villagers,  and  of  the  peaceful 
Pokomo  along  the   Tana. 

To  protect  the  coast  villages  from  the  "  Sultan "  of 
Witu  a  force  of  600  men  was  sent  from  Zanzibar  in 
1885  ;  but  as  some  German  traders  had  previously 
settled  in  Witu,  Bismarck  at  once  protested  against 
this  measure  as  likely  to  jeopardize  their  commercial 
interests.     The  country  was  at  the  same  time  declared 


134  BRITISH  EAST   AFRICA 

to  be  a  German  protectorate.  A  "  Witu  Company,"  with 
a  capital  of  i^25,ooo,  was  founded  in  1887  to  exploit 
the  country,  and  strong  efforts  were  made  to  secure 
a  German  footing  in  the  island  of  Lamu,  which  is  the 
natural  port  for  the  Witu  district  At  the  end  of  1888 
the  German  Consul-General  at  Zanzibar  made  a  formal 
demand  for  a  cession  of  the  island  of  Lamu.  The 
Sultan  refused,  and  immediately  (January,  1889)  offered 
Sir  William  Mackinnon,  as  representative  of  the  British 
East  Africa  Company,  a  lease  of  Lamu  and  the  ad- 
jacent islands.  The  German  Government  objected  to 
any  such  cession,  and  the  matter  was  referred  to  the 
arbitration  of  Baron  Lambermont,  who  was  then 
Foreign  Minister  to  the  King  of  the  Belgians.  His 
award  dismissed  the  German  claims  to  Lamu  and 
the  other  islands  of  the  Lamu  archipelago,  and 
affirmed  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar's  right  to  cede  them 
to  whomsoever  he  chose.  This  award  was  given  in 
August,  1889,  and  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar  at  once 
granted  a  concession  of  the  whole  of  his  territories 
north  of  the  Tana  to  the  British  East  Africa  Com- 
pany. As  this  gave  the  Company  the  land  between 
Witu  and  the  coast,  the  successful  administration  of 
Witu  by  Germany  was  rendered  impossible. 

The  indomitable  Germans  had  one  last  try  to  main- 
tain their  position  at  Witu  by  connecting  it  with  the  coast 
to  the  north  of  Lamu.  On  22nd  October,  1889,  Germany 
proclaimed  a  protectorate  over  the  whole  of  the  Sultan 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY      135 

of  Zanzibar's  territory  between  the  Juba  and  Witu  ; 
and  later  on  it  maintained  that  the  islands  of  Manda 
and  Patta,  which  are  situated  a  little  to  the  north  of 
Lamu,  were  part  of  the  Witu  protectorate,  and  there- 
fore under  German  control.  The  British  East  Africa 
Company  had  already  occupied  these  islands,  but 
the  British  Government  ordered  the  Company  to  with- 
draw its  agent  and  flag  until  its  rights  were  con- 
firmed. The  question  was  submitted  to  arbitration. 
The  award  affirmed  the  legality  of  the  concession 
under  which  the  Company  had  occupied  the  islands, 
and  repudiated  the  German  claims.  Accordingly,  in 
October,  1890,  the  Government  gave  the  Company 
permission  to  resume  occupation. 

This  award  rendered  the  German  occupation  of 
Witu  valueless,  and  the  German  Witu  Company  offered 
to  sell  its  rights  and  properties  to  the  British  Char- 
tered Company.  There  was  no  particular  reason  why 
the  British  Company  should  buy  them,  and  the 
negotiations  were  fruitless.  So  the  German  agents 
resolved  not  to  give  in  without  another  struggle. 
Their  aim  in  endeavouring  to  secure  Lamu  was  to 
gain  the  right  to  levy  customs  over  the  trade  of  the 
Tana  Valley,  which  finds  its  outlet  through  that  port. 
There  was,  however,  another  way  of  taxing  the  Tana 
trade.  Most  of  it  passes  through  the  Belesoni  Canal 
a  small  artificial  canoe  channel  which  connects  the 
Tana  and  the  Ozi.     This   interesting  canal  was   built 


136  BRITISH    EAST   AFRICA 

in  order  to  facilitate  the  trade  between  Lamu  and 
the  Upper  Tana.  The  mouth  of  the  Tana  is  ob- 
structed by  a  bar,  which  renders  its  navigation  diffi- 
cult ;  but  at  a  distance  (measured  in  a  straight  line) 
of  eight  miles  from  the  shore,  the  Tana  approaches 
within  two  miles  of  a  bend  of  the  Ozi.  The  estuary 
of  the  Ozi  is  not  only  about  twenty  miles  nearer 
Lamu  than  the  mouth  of  the  Tana,  but  it  offers  a 
safe  harbour  to  native  dhows. 

The  whole  of  the  commercial  produce  of  the  Tana 
Valley  is  carried  down  in  dug-out  canoes  or  "  mau," 
which  pass  through  the  Belesoni  Canal  to  Kau  and 
Kipini,  the  two  ports  on  the  Ozi  estuary.  There 
goods  are  transhipped  to  coasting  dhows,  which  carry 
their  cargoes  to  Lamu. 

It  was,  therefore,  as  easy  to  tax  the  Tana  trade  at 
the  Belesoni  Canal  as  at  Lamu.  The  Sultan  of  Witu 
accordingly  placed  a  custom  house  on  the  Canal,  and 
imposed  dues.  This  act  was  apparently  suggested  by 
the  German  traders.  Supported  by  them,  the  Sultan 
refused  to  remove  the  custom  house  when  ordered  to 
do  so  by  the  British  East  Africa  Company.  The 
Belesoni  Canal  was  clearly  within  the  territory  be- 
longing to  Zanzibar  ;  accordingly  the  Company  called 
on  the  British  Government  to  protect  the  territory  of 
our  vassal,  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar.  The  Government 
not  only  declined  to  interfere,  but  objected  to  action 
being  taken  by  the  Sultan,  as  any  such  course  would 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY      137 

lead  to  friction  with  Germany.  The  Company  ac- 
cordingly resolved  to  take  action  itself.  It  despatched 
a  body  of  troops  to  the  district,  under  Clifford 
Crauford  (late  Commissionet  at  Mombasa),  and  sent 
an  ultimatum  to  Witu,  demanding  the  removal  of 
the  custom  house  by  December  31st.  The  German 
Consul-General  advised  Fumo  Bakari  to  submit.  Ac- 
cording to  the  chief,  he  had  occupied  the  Canal  at 
the  request  of  the  Germans  and  on  a  promise  of 
assistance  from  them  ;  so  this  advice  showed  him  that 
he  had  no  chance  of  armed  support,  and  he  was  com- 
pelled to  obey. 

Thus  step  by  step  Germany's  opposition  to  the  ex- 
tension of  the  British  East  Africa  Company's  sphere 
of  influence  was  thwarted  by  the  power  of  the  Com- 
pany's local  forces  and  the  overwhelming  evidence  in 
favour  of  the  legality  of  its  position.  It  is  impossible, 
however,  to  read  the  tedious  correspondence  respecting 
the  ownership  of  these  northern  coastlands  without 
feeling  that  the  Company,  by  its  insistence,  secured 
for  the  empire  rights  which  the  Government  would 
have  allowed  to  pass  to  Germany  unquestioned. 

While  this  controversy  had  been  going  on  between 
the  Governments,  the  jingo  section  of  the  German 
Colonial  party  had  taken  a  step  which  was  practically 
an  appeal  to  arms.  It  despatched  an  expedition  across 
British  East  Africa,  which,  whatever  the  objects  of  its 
founders  may  have  been,  was  conducted  as  a  piratical  raid. 


138  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

News  of  this  undertaking  was  first  received  in 
October,  1888,  when  it  was  stated  that  Lieutenant 
Wissmann  and  Dr.  Carl  Peters  were  appointed  leaders 
of  an  expedition  which  was  to  march  up  the  Tana 
Valley  to  the  Upper  Nile,  with  the  object  of  securing 
a  German  route  from  the  eastern  coast  to  Emin's 
Equatorial  Province.  The  expedition  was,  nominally, 
for  the  relief  of  Emin  Pasha  ;  but  after  the  arrival  of 
the  news  in  January,  1889,  that  Stanley  had  rescued 
Emin,  who  was  on  his  way  back  to  the  coast,  the 
excuse  was  not  taken  seriously.  Wissmann,  having  re- 
ceived an  appointment  in  German  East  Africa,  Carl 
Peters  was  given  the  command,  and  left  Berlin  in 
February,  1889.  At  Aden  he  enlisted  one  hundred 
Somali,  who  were  taken  to  Bagamoyo,  in  German 
East  Africa.  The  German  Government  refused  to 
allow  Peters  to  pass  through  German  East  Africa, 
and  the  British  squadron  endeavoured  to  prevent  his 
landing  on  the  British  coast.  But  Peters  successfully 
ran  the  blockade  through  the  British  fleet,  and  landed 
at  Kwyhu  Bay  on  June  15th.  He  made  a  long  stay 
at  Witu  to  organize  his  caravan,  and  on  July  27th 
started  up  the  Tana  Valley.  Peters  at  once  displayed 
his  real  purpose ;  a  British  expedition  under  Mr.  J.  R. 
W.  Piggott,  who  was  the  first  Englishman  to  explore 
the  Tana  Valley,  had  negotiated  treaties  with  the  Tana 
tribes,  and  established  stations  on  behalf  of  the  British 
East  Africa  Company.     Peters  tore  up  the  treaties  when- 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY      139 

ever  he  could  find  them  ;  he  burnt  the  Company's  sta- 
tions ;  he  pulled  down  its  flag ;  he  attacked  the  Pokomo, 
one  of  the  most  peaceful  tribes  in  Africa,  and  compelled 
them  to  give  him  food  for  nothing.  He  left  behind 
him  a  trail  of  blood  and  desolation,  for  which  later 
travellers  had  to  suffer. 

As  soon  as  the  British  East  Africa  Company's  ad- 
ministrator heard  that  Peters  had  effected  a  landing, 
he  sent  an  expedition  to  the  Tana  Valley  to  stop 
him.  The  expedition  was  under  the  command  of  a 
young  shipping  clerk,  who  was  a  man  of  much  literary 
ability,  but  who — to  put  it  mildly — was  not  a  soldier. 
He  felt  that  his  force  was  too  weak  to  compel  the 
reckless  Peters  to  return,  and  so  allowed  him  to  pro- 
ceed unmolested.  He  followed  the  German  expedition, 
watching  it  from  a  respectful  distance,  until  his  caravan 
stumbled  across  a  raiding  party  of  Somali,  from  whom 
most  of  the  men  fled  in  dismay.  A  half-caste  Arab 
rallied  a  few  of  the  Zanzibari  escort,  and  defended  the 
stores  of  the  caravan  against  the  Somali  with  such 
courage  that  the  robbers  were  driven  off,  but  at  the 
cost  of  the  life  of  the  faithful  Arab.  After  this  in- 
cident, the  caravan  was  too  disorganized  to  be  of  any 
use  as  a  check  to  Peters,  and  it  returned  to  Mombasa. 
There  the  survivors  of  the  gallant  men,  who  defeated 
the  Somali  and  saved  the  caravan,  were  sentenced  to 
I  a  severe  flogging,  from  which,  however,  they  were 
saved  by  an  inquiry. 


140  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

The  collapse  of  the  British  expedition  left  Peters  free 
to  continue  his  march  unchecked.  He  displayed  magni- 
ficent courage  and  great  military  skill.  The  difficulties 
in  his  way  were  serious,  but  he  forced  his  way  through 
them  all.  He  marched  nearly  the  whole  length  of  the 
Tana  Valley,  and  then  across  the  Kikuyu  country  on 
to  the  plains  of  Laikipia.  There  he  was  opposed  by 
the  Masai,  but  in  two  hard-fought  battles  the  accurate 
fire  of  the  Somali  escort  broke  the  Masai  charge. 
As  the  prize  of  victory,  Peters  secured  big  herds  of 
cattle,  which  supplied  his  caravan  with  abundant  food. 
He  descended  to  Baringo,  hoisted  the  German  flag  at 
Njemps,  ravaged  Kamasia  and  entered  Uganda.  All 
along  his  route  Peters  had  annexed  the  country  in 
the  name  of  the  German  Empire.  In  Uganda  he 
negotiated  a  treaty  with  Mwanga,  in  the  interests  of 
Germany  {vide  p.  172),  and  then  hastened  home  by  the 
western  side  of  the  Victoria  Nyanza. 

On  his  return  to  the  coast,  however,  he  found  that 
his  labours  were  all  in  vain.  A  treaty  had  been  signed 
between  England  and  Germany,  by  which  the  latter 
withdrew  her  protectorates  over  Witu  and  the  territory 
to  the  north  of  the  Tana,  on  the  understanding  that 
England  should  secure  for  Germany  the  definite  cession 
of  the  territories  held  in  lease  from  the  Sultan  of 
Zanzibar,  and  in  exchange  for  the  retrocession  of 
Heligoland, 

This  treaty  of  ist  July,  1890,  closed  the  long  struggle 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY     141 

with  Germany  in  East  Africa.  It  left  the  British  East 
Africa  Company  in  undisputed  possession  of  the  whole 
of  the  vast  region  between  the  frontier  of  British  East 
Africa  on  the  south,  and  the  Juba  River  and  Abyssinia 
on  the  north.  The  Company  was  fairly  entitled  to 
this  territory,  which,  apart  from  its  action,  Germany 
would  have  been  allowed  to  annex  without  serious  pro- 
test. 

But  the  territory  soon  proved  a  useless  and  expensive 
encumbrance,  and  troubles  began  at  once. 

The  Sultan  of  Witu  had  granted  a  timber  concession 
to  a  German  syndicate,  and  in  August,  1890,  a  party  of 
eleven  Germans  landed  at  Lamu  to  work  it.  The  Sultan 
considered  that  the  Germans  had  led  him  into  conflict 
with  the  British,  and  had  left  him  in  the  lurch  when 
trouble  came  ;  he  was,  therefore,  very  angry  with  his 
former  allies.  The  timber  workers  were  warned  at  Lamu 
against  going  to  Witu ;  but  their  leader,  Kuntzel,  who 
had  once  been  on  very  friendly  terms  with  the  Sultan, 
was  confident  that  there  was  no  danger.  The  party 
arrived  in  Witu  on  September  14th,  and  there  was  a 
stormy  interview  between  the  Sultan  and  Kuntzel.  The 
latter  saw  that  it  was  useless  to  attempt  working  the 
concession  at  present,  and  decided  to  return  to  the  coast. 
The  gatekeeper  refused  to  let  the  Germans  out  of  the 
town,  and  Kuntzel,  fearing  treachery,  shot  the  man  and 
endeavoured  to  force  the  gate.  The  whole  party  was 
at  once  surrounded  ;  the  Germans  fought  with  magni- 


142  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

ficent  courage,  but  the  odds  were  overwhelming,  and 
only  one  man  escaped  to  tell  the  story. 

The  German  Government  called  on  England  to 
avenge  the  massacre,  and  a  naval  brigade  under 
Admiral  Sir  E.  Freemantle  marched  against  Witu. 
The  Sultan  assured  his  troops  that  Englishmen  could 
only  fight  at  sea,  and  under  this  impression  the  naval 
brigade  was  attacked  on  the  march,  when  the  Witu 
army  was  easily  routed.  The  brigade  forced  its  way 
to  an  old  Galla  village  on  a  hill  to  the  south  of  the 
town,  and  bombarded  it.  A  war  rocket  set  fire  to 
the  huts,  and  the  whole  town,  including  the  Sultan's 
palace,  was  soon  in  flames.  The  rebels  evacuated  the 
place  and  withdrew  into  the  forests  to  the  north, 
whence  they  have  long  continued  to  harass  the  country 
and  defy  the  British  authorities. 

To  hold  Witu  against  the  rebels,  the  town  was 
occupied  by  a  company  of  Indian  troops,  and  con- 
nected with  the  coast  by  a  road  and  a  telephone. 
The  garrison  easily  maintained  the  place  against  the 
natives ;  but,  economically,  the  country  has  been  a 
disappointment.  The  climate  is  deadly ;  the  trade 
dwindled  to  insignificance  ;  the  coffee  and  cotton 
plantations  were  a  failure,  and  the  expense  of  main- 
taining the  Indian  contingent  was  too  heavy  for  the 
British  East  Africa  Company  to  continue  in  a  country 
which  gave  such  poor  promise  of  commercial  success. 
After   the   angry   quarrel    for    its   possession,   and    the 


THE  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA  COMPANY     143 

sacrifices  made  for  it,  Witu  proved  a  white  elephant 
which  the  Company  could  not  afford  to  feed.  So  in 
1893  it  announced  its  intention  of  withdrawing  its 
garrison  and  abandoning  the  country.  The  Imperial 
Government  had  given  Heligoland  to  Germany  in 
return  for  Witu,  and  after  this  sacrifice  the  country 
could  not  be  allowed  to  go  derelict.  The  Government 
could  not  prevent  the  Company's  withdrawal ;  so  to 
save  the  friendly  natives  from  the  revenge  of  the  out- 
laws, and  the  loss  of  the  main  compensation  received 
for  Heligoland,  the  Government  took  over  the  admin- 
istration of  the  Witu  province. 


Chapter  IX 

THE  MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION 

"  Vita  havina  mato." 
"  War  has  no  eyes." 

— Zanzibari  Proverb. 

THE  leading  family  of  the  East  African  Arabs 
is  that  known  as  the  Mazrui  or  Mazaria. 
According  to  one  account  of  their  origin, 
the  Mazrui  are  descended  from  an  Arab  named  Ab- 
dulla,  who  emigrated  from  Oman,  the  south-eastern 
province  of  Arabia,  and  settled  in  Mombasa  at  the 
end  of  the  seventeenth  century.  According  to  another 
story,  the  clan  is  of  much  greater  antiquity,  and  is  de- 
scended from  some  Arabs  who  settled  on  the  coast 
before  the  advent  of  the  Portuguese.  Whichever  theory 
be  true,  the  Mazrui  have  been  the  leaders  of  the  east 
coast  Arabs  for  at  least  the  last  two  centuries. 

Early  in  the  eighteenth  century  a  Mazrui  chief 
Mahommad-bin-Othman,  was  appointed  Lewali  of 
Mombasa,  and  his  descendants  ruled  the  coast  as  the 
representatives  of  the  Iman   of  Oman   until   1750.     A 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     145 

political  change  then  occurred  in  Oman,  and  the  Yorabi 
dynasty  was  succeeded  by  that  of  the  Albusaidi.  The 
Mazrui  refused  to  acknowledge  the  new  dynasty,  and 
led  a  revolt  of  the  east  coast  Arabs  against  Oman. 
The  movement  was  successful,  and  successive  heads  of 
the  Mazrui  family  ruled  Mombasa  as  independent 
Sultans.  In  1806,  on  the  accession  of  Said  Said,  the 
fourth  member  of  the  Albusaidi  dynasty,  the  first 
serious  attempt  was  made  by  Oman  to  reconquer  its 
former  East  African  possessions.  A  long  war  ensued, 
in  which  the  Muscat  Arabs  gradually  gained  ground. 
They  defeated  the  Mazrui,  reconquered  the  east  coast 
islands,  and  prepared  to  attack  Mombasa.  At  this 
juncture  two  British  men-of-war,  which  were  engaged 
in  the  Admiralty  survey  of  the  coast,  entered  the 
harbour. 

Suliman,  the  Sultan  of  Mombasa,  appealed  to  the 
British  for  help,  and  a  treaty  was  negotiated,  by  which 
the  town  was  placed  under  British  protection.  This 
secured  the  Mazrui  a  respite.  Captain  Vidal's  action 
was,  however,  repudiated  by  the  British  Government, 
which  had  no  wish  to  interfere  between  the  friendly 
state  of  Oman  and  its  revolted  subjects.  The  treaty 
was  not  ratified,  and  the  English  flag  withdrawn. 

Mombasa  was  thus  abandoned  to  the  tender  mercies 
of  the  Muscat  Arabs.  It  made  a  stubborn  defence, 
and  capitulated  on  terms  in  1826;  twice,  however,  it 
revolted,  and  was   recaptured.     It   finally  fell  in   1837. 

L 


146  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

The  Sultan  Rashid  surrendered  on  conditions  which 
were  immediately  disregarded,  and  he,  the  last  inde- 
pendent Sultan  of  Mombasa,  with  several  of  his  prin- 
cipal supporters,  was  left  to  die  of  starvation  in  a 
dungeon  on  the  Persian  Gulf 

The  general  rank  and  file  of  the  Mazrui  were  pun- 
ished by  expulsion  from  Mombasa.  One  party,  under 
Rashid's  brother  Abdulla,  went  south  to  Gazi,  a  port 
on  the  coast  about  thirty  miles  from  Mombasa.  An- 
other branch  of  the  clan  settled  at  Takaungu,  a  small 
town  beside  the  estuary  of  the  Khilifi,  thirty  miles 
north  of  Mombasa.  Both  parties  formed  semi-inde- 
pendent states,  though  they  were  nominally  subject  to 
the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar. 

Rashid's  son,  Mbaruk,  had  been  taken  south  by  his 
uncle  in  the  flight  from  Mombasa,  and  on  succeeding 
Abdulla  as  head  of  the  Gazi  Mazrui,  he  resolved  to 
recover  the  complete  independence  of  the  coast  To 
secure  the  unity  of  the  whole  Mazrui  clan  in  the  fight 
for  "  Home  Rule,"  he  attempted  in  1865  to  conquer  the 
section  settled  at  Takaungu.  This  attack  was  defeated, 
owing  to  the  help  given  to  the  defenders  by  Sajd_Said» 
the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar,  who  now,  owing  to  Lord 
Canning's  award  was  suzerain  of  the  East  African 
coastlands. 

Mbaruk  retreated  sullenly  to  Gazi.  On  his  way 
south  he  called  at  the  mission  station  at  Ribe,  where' 
he  saw  New.     Apparently  he  intended  mischief,  as  he 


Vm;.\^ 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     147 

declined  to  accept  New's  hospitality ;  and  it  is  stated 
that  he  shortly  afterwards  formed  a  plot  to  capture 
the  missionaries,  who  took  shelter  in  Mombasa  until 
the  danger  was  past.  Mbaruk  then  thrice  rebelled 
against  Zanzibar.  He  was  defeated,  and  his  chief 
stronghold  Mwele  was  captured  after  an  eighteen 
days'  siege.  But  the  irrepressible  Mbaruk  escaped  to 
the  bush,  and  after  the  return  of  the  Zanzibar  forces 
he  avenged  the  invasion  of  his  country  by  looting 
Mombasa. 

In  his  old  age,  however,  Mbaruk  of  Gazi  had  settled 
down  to  a  peaceful  life.  He  lived  at  Gazi,  and  ruled 
the  province  as  the  vassal  to  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar. 
On  the  establishment  of  the  British  East  Africa  Com- 
pany, he  gave  its  representative  a  cordial  welcome  and 
invaluable  support,  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  his 
highest  ambition  was  to  spend  the  rest  of  his  days  at 
ease  and  in  peace. 

But  circumstances  were  too  strong  for  him,  and  he 
was  reluctantly  driven  to  head  a  formidable  rising 
against  British  rule,  and  finally  to  lead  an  exodus  from 
British  territory. 

We  have  already  seen  that  the  Company's  first  ad- 
ministrator, Mr.  George  S.  Mackenzie,  had  to  face  a 
strong  prejudice  against  European  rule,  owing  partly 
to  sympathy  with  the  national  insurrection  in  German 
East  Africa,  and  partly  due  to  an  old  quarrel  with  the 
missionaries.     Mackenzie,  however,  conquered  this  pre- 


148  BRITISH   EAST    AFRICA 

judice  by  tact,  and  a  sympathetic  appreciation  of  the 
natives'  view  of  British  policy. 

But  in  the  latter  period  of  the  British  East  Africa 
Company's  administration  its  rule  caused  great  local 
dissatisfaction.  The  first  cause  of  this  dissatisfaction 
was  the  conflict  between  the  natives  and  the  mission- 
aries. 

Krapf's  Mission  in  East  Africa  had  been  warmly 
welcomed  by  Said  Said,  who  was  then  the  Sultan  of 
Zanzibar,  and  the  local  authorities.  It  was  felt  that  the 
aim  of  the  missionaries  was  to  convert  the  heathen  to  a 
religion  which  had  many  points  in  common  with  Islam. 
The  Sultan  gave  the  missions  land  for  schools  and 
stations.  But  after  the  establishment  of  the  British 
East  Africa  Company's  rule,  the  Church  Missionary 
Society's  agents  at  Mombasa  devoted  their  energies 
mainly  to  proselytism  among  the  Mohammedans.  This 
action  was  not  surprising,  for  the  cultured,  educated 
Mohammedans  could  better  understand  the  truths  of 
Christianity  than  the  fetish-worshipping  Wanyika. 

As  the  missionaries  were  on  very  intimate  terms  with 
the  officials  of  the  British  East  Africa  Company — one 
of  the  Company's  administrators,  for  example,  serv^ed 
as  the  Missionary  Society's  Treasurer — the  Company 
was  regarded  as  partly  responsible  for  this  anti-Islam 
movement. 

A  second  factor  which  led  to  dissatisfaction  with 
the    Company's    rule   was    interference    with    slavery 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     149 

though  for  this  the  Company  itself  was  certainly  not 
to  blame.  Almost  immediately  after  the  establishment 
of  the  Company  in  Mombasa,  under  pressure  from  the 
British  Government,  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar,  Said 
Khalifa,  issued  a  decree  proclaiming  the  freedom  of 
all  slaves  who  entered  his  territory  overland.  This  law 
was  followed  by  another  enacted  by  his  successor,  Said 
Ali,  who  prohibited  the  sale  of  slaves  altogether.  The 
latter  decree  was  at  first  kept  secret  on  the  mainland 
by  the  Company's  administrator,  who  certainly  acted, 
or  allowed  his  subordinates  to  act,  in  defiance  of  it. 

But  however  strongly  the  Company's  local  agents 
were  opposed  to  the  measure,  and  however  ingeniously 
they  tried  to  evade  it,  they  could  not  help  ultimately 
obeying  it  in  the  towns  under  their  immediate  obser- 
vance. Hence  in  Mombasa,  Lamu,  and  Melindi,  the 
new  decrees  were  at  length  enforced,  with  disastrous 
consequences  to  the  industrial  system  of  the  coast.  In 
addition  to  the  economic  consequences  of  its  disturb- 
ance to  trade,  it  did  even  more  harm  by  the  blow  it 
struck  at  the  British  reputation  for  justice.  Sir  Arthur 
Hardinge,  in  the  course  of  a  judicial  and  masterly 
summary  of  the  causes  of  the  Mazrui  rebellion,  clearly 
expresses  the  shock  to  native  opinion  of  this  unfortunate 
interference.  "  To  the  native,  to  whom  the  European 
objections  to  slavery  and  slave-dealing  appear  as  fan- 
tastic and  unintelligible  as  do  the  socialistic  protests 
against  private  property  to  the  ordinary   Englishman, 


I50  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

this  upsetting  of  all  the  old  arrangements  sanctioned 
for  centuries  by  religion  and  native  public  opinion 
seemed  an  act  of  gratuitous  oppression,  and  shook  the 
confidence  which  other  circumstances,  such  as  the  sur- 
prising integrity  and  patience  of  our  magistrates,  had 
encouraged  in  the  justice  of  British  rule." 

For  these,  and  some  less  important  reasons,  the 
Company's  rule  was  unpopular  with  the  coast  Arabs. 
But  the  peace  was  kept,  for  it  was  well  known  along 
the  coast  that  the  Company  was  in  serious  difficulties, 
that  its  days  were  numbered,  and  that  the  coast  would 
shortly  be  again  ruled  from  Zanzibar.  A  conflict,  how- 
ever, broke  out  over  the  chieftainship  of  Takaungu  in 
the  spring  of  1895. 

The  Takaungu  branch  of  the  Mazrui  had  been 
founded  by  Hamis,  the  head  of  the  younger  branch 
of  the  clan.  Since  its  establishment  after  the  ex- 
pulsion from  Mombasa  in  1837,  and  throughout  the 
period  of  Mbaruk  of  Gazi's  long  conflict  with  Zanzibar, 
the  Takaungu  Mazrui  had  been  quietly  growing  in 
power  and  numbers.  Hamis  was  succeeded  by  his 
brother  Said,  who  was  followed  by  Rashid  and  Salim, 
two  sons  of  Hamis.  On  Salim's  death  in  February, 
1895,  his  nephew  Mbaruk  was  the  rightful  heir  to  the 
chieftainship.^  But  the  British  East  Africa  Company 
appointed  the  wrongful  heir,  Salim's  son  Rashid,  owing 


^  The   relationships   of  the   heads  of  the   Takaungu  clan  are 
shown  in  the  followinsr  table  :  — 


I 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     151 

to  his  greater  friendliness  to  the  British.  Mbaruk,  the 
son  of  Rashid,  who,  to  distinguish  him  from  the  chief 
of  Gazi,  is  usually  known  as  Mbaruk  of  Takaungu, 
appeared  to  submit  to  the  decision.  He  settled  at 
Gonjoro,  and  there  quietly  obtained  control  of  the 
1,200  armed  retainers  of  the  late  chief  A  crisis  re- 
sulted from  a  personal  quarrel  between  the  rightful 
chief  and  the  Company's  nominee  in  the  street  of 
Takaungu.  Mbaruk  withdrew  to  Gonjoro,  and 
threatened  armed  resistance.  The  Company's  puppet 
had  no  following  of  any  importance,  and  he  appealed 
for  help  to  England.  A  man-of-war  was  sent  to  the 
harbour  of  Khilifi,  three  miles  north  of  Takaungu,  and 
Sir  A.  Hardinge  accompanied  it  in  the  hope  that  he 
might  arrange  matters  peaceably.  As  his  influence  with 
the  Arabs  is  great,  the  dispute  might  have  been  settled 
but  for  an  accident.  Hardinge  went  to  Gonjoro  with 
a  small  escort  of  Zanzibari  and  men  from  the  warship. 
Gonjoro  was  found  to  be  deserted,  and  Mbaruk  was 
in  camp  on  the  adjacent  hills.  One  of  the  natives  was 
sent  to  the  British  camp,  where  he  was  challenged  by 


I.  Hamis 

1 

2.  Said. 
1 

1 

3.  Rashid  I. 

1 

1 
4.  Salim. 

1 

1 
Mbaruk  of 

1 
5.   Rashid  II. 

Takaungu  :  the 

Appointed  by  B.  E. 

legitimate  successor 

A.  Co.  after  the  death 

to  Salim. 

of  his  father  Salim. 

152  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

the  sentries,  who  tried  to  stop  him.  A  gun  went  off 
in  the  scuffle  ;  Mbaruk's  men  thought  their  envoy  had 
been  treacherously  shot,  and  immediately  opened  fire. 

Owing  to  this  misunderstanding,  the  disastrous 
Mazrui  rebellion  was  begun.  Mbaruk  was  easily  de- 
feated at  Gonjoro,  and  fled  to  Sokoki,  a  village  in  the 
forests  to  the  north.  His  brother  Aziz  immediately  at- 
tacked Tanganyika,  a  neighbouring  trading  settlement, 
inhabited  by  many  Indian  merchants,  and  looted  the 
bazaar.  Aziz  was  expelled  by  a  force  of  Zanzibari, 
and  Sir  Lloyd  Matthews  pursued  Mbaruk,  who  was  soon 
expelled  from  Sokoki.  He  fled  south,  and  took  refuge 
with  his  kinsman  Mbaruk  of  Gazi. 

It  was  while  affairs  were  in  this  disturbed  condition 
that  the  rule  of  the  British  East  Africa  Company  came 
to  an  end.  The  Company  had  failed  to  make  the  coun- 
try pay  working  expenses,  or  offer  any  hope  that  it 
would  do  so  in  the  near  future,  and  it  was,  therefore, 
obliged  to  resign  its  charter.  The  causes  of  the  Com- 
pany's failure  were  manifold,  but  the  chief  factor  was  an 
absorption  in  political  and  philanthropic  schemes,  which 
necessitated  an  expensive  administration,  and  was 
accompanied  by  neglect  of  the  economic  development 
of  the  country.  The  career  of  the  Company  had  been 
disinterested  and  honourable,  but  its  ideals  were  im- 
practicable with  the  resources  at  its  disposal.  Its  high 
motives  were  forgotten  in  the  obloquy  of  failure,  and 
its  end  was  marked  by  unmerited  insult  and  contempt. 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     153 

The  transfer  of  the  administration  from  the  Company 
to  the  Imperial  Government  was  completed  at  Mombasa 
on  8th  and  9th  July,  1895.  Sir  Arthur  Hardinge  landed 
to  take  charge  of  the  country  on  behalf  of  the  Foreign 
Office,  and  he  was  immediately  confronted  by  the 
dispute  over  the  chieftainship  of  Takaungu. 

He  at  once  warned  Mbaruk  of  Gazi  that  Mbaruk  of 
Takaungu  was  a  rebel,  and  asked  for  his  surrender. 
Mbaruk  of  Gazi  came  in  person,  professed  the  utmost 
loyalty,  and  begged  for  time.  Sir  Arthur  Hardinge's 
demand  had  placed  Mbaruk  of  Gazi  in  a  very  awkward 
position.  He  had  no  particular  reason  for  gratitude 
either  to  England  or  to  Zanzibar.  His  father  had  been 
abandoned  by  England  to  the  Muscat  Arabs,  and,  in 
consequence,  died  a  horrible  and  treacherous  death. 
The  rule  of  the  British  East  Africa  Company  had  been 
accompanied  by  an  interference  with  slavery,  which  had 
wrought  the  commercial  ruin  of  the  coast  plantations. 
Nevertheless,  Mbaruk  had  loyally  supported  the  Com- 
pany ;  he  had  helped  to  suppress  a  rebellion  at  Mombasa, 
to  crush  a  rising  in  Taita,  and  to  protect  the  Tana  mis- 
sions against  the  Witu  rebels.  His  interests  now  were 
all  on  the  side  of  peace.  He  was  an  old  man,  his  father 
having  died  in  1837.  He  had  a  subsidy  from  the 
Government  of  1900  rupees  a  month  for  the  administra- 
tion of  his  district  ;  and  his  own  residence  on  the  coast 
at  Gazi,  where  he  lived  in  dignity  and  comfort,  was  at 
the  mercy  of  the  British  gun-boats.     He  had  the  alterna- 


154  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

tives  of  surrendering  his  kinsman,  and  living  his  last 
days  in  comfort  and  dignity  as  the  prince  of  the  south- 
eastern corner  of  British  East  Africa  ;  or  of  refusing  the 
demand,  in  which  case  his  highest  possible  position  was 
that  of  an  outlaw  chief,  in  the  back  bush  of  the  coast- 
lands  and  in  the  Nyika. 

He  knew,  however,  that  Mbaruk  of  Takaungu  had 
been  driven  to  rebellion  by  an  act  of  injustice,  and  he 
was  bound  to  his  cousin  both  by  blood  and  the  Arab 
obligations  of  hospitality.  So  a  direct  obedience  to  the 
British  demand  seemed  to  him  dishonourable.  He 
wrote  a  pathetic  appeal  for  peace. 

"  I  do  not  want  war  against  the  Government  at  all. 
I  want  peace  for  myself  and  all  my  people,  and  my  son 
Mbaruk.  If  anything  happens  I  am  responsible.  .  .  . 
If  you  do  not  want  to  give  me  peace,  I  want  permission 
to  send  a  telegram  and  to  wait  for  the  reply.  I  will 
abide  by  any  reply  I  receive.  This  is  what  I  want  from 
you.  I  want  peace  from  the  Government,  and  this  is 
not  a  great  thing  for  them  to  do,  and  to  give  me  the 
time  for  a  reply  from  England.  Alia,  halla ;  alia, 
halla.  I  want  peace  ;  I  do  not  want  war  with  the  Govern- 
ment. I  am  not  able  at  all  to  fight.  I  have  never  done 
this  when  I  was  in  the  Company's  service,  and  now  also 
I  cannot  do  it.  I  want  to  be  just  like  before.  Do  not 
you  drive  me  to  make  trouble  with  the  Government. 
Alia,  halla  ;  alia,  halla.     This  is  what  I  want  from  you. 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     155 

The  rest  is  for  you.     I  will  obey  the   order.     Give  my 

salaams   to    General    Matthews,  the   Admiral,  and   Mr. 

Piggott. 

(Signed)    "  Mbaruk-bin-Rashid." 

A  week  after  Mbaruk's  visit  to  Mombasa  the  fighting 
broke  out  again.  Aziz,  a  brother  of  Mbaruk  of 
Takaungu,  had  vowed  not  to  shave  until  he  had 
avenged  his  brother's  wrongs.  He  quietly  collected 
men,  and  suddenly  attacked  Takaungu.  He  forced  his 
way  into  the  town,  and  seized  the  mosque.  Thence 
he  attacked  the  cantonments,  which  were  occupied  by  a 
force  of  Zanzibari  under  Captain  Raikes.  The  garrison 
made  a  gallant  resistance,  repelled  the  attack,  and 
captured  the  mosque.  The  rebels  were  finally  driven 
from  the  town,  but  not  until  they  had  looted  and  burnt 
most  of  it.  Aziz  withdrew  to  Sokoki,  whence  he  was 
driven  by  a  naval  brigade.  He  then  fled  south  to  join 
his  brother  at  Gazi. 

After  this  renewal  of  rebellion  Mbaruk  of  Gazi  offered 
to  allow  the  authorities  to  seize  the  rebel  chiefs,  but 
refused  himself  to  take  any  part  in  the  proceedings. 
Sir  Arthur  Hardinge  and  a  powerful  force  left  Mombasa 
to  effect  the  arrests.  The  expedition  arrived  too  late  ; 
the  rebels  had  heard  of  its  approach  and  fled  to  Mwele, 
a  stronghold  some  three  days'  march  inland.  As 
the  naval  brigade  approached,  Mbaruk  of  Gazi  was 
persuaded    to   throw  in   his    lot   with  the    rebels.     He 


156  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

abandoned  Gazi,  and  retreated  to  Mwele.  The  port  of 
Wanga  was  immediately  attacked  by  the  natives,  and 
the  bazaars  looted. 

An  ultimatum  was  then  sent  to  Mbaruk,  demanding 
the  surrender  of  the  rebel  chiefs  within  a  fortnight.  At 
the  end  of  this  time  a  naval  brigade,  under  Admiral 
Rawson,  marched  inland  to  Mwele,  which  was  taken, 
after  what  the  official  despatch  describes  as  "  two  hours' 
hard  fighting." 

Mbaruk  of  Takaungu  and  Aziz  fled  at  the  beginning 
of  the  fight ;  but  the  gallant  old  Mbaruk  of  Gazi  only 
escaped  after  the  British  had  entered  the  boma,  and 
Zahran-bin-Rashid,  the  commander  of  his  forces,  had 
been  shot  through  the  head  by  a  Soudanese  at  the  main 
gate. 

Mbaruk  withdrew  into  the  bush,  and  for  the  rest  of 
1895  maintained  a  guerilla  warfare,  which  caused  con- 
fusion through  the  whole  country,  from  Melindi  on  the 
north  to  the  German  frontier  on  the  south. 

At  first  the  rebels  scored  some  considerable  successes. 
On  the  1 6th  October,  in  an  attack  on  a  stockade  at 
Mgobani,  near  Gazi,  Captain  Lawrence  was  killed  and 
his  force  scattered.  A  month  later  the  rebels  attacked 
Mazeras,  a  station  ten  miles  from  Mombasa,  where  the 
British  East  Africa  Company  had  begun  a  small  silver- 
lead  mine.  They  also  attacked  Rabai,  and  captured  a 
camel  caravan,  which  was  under  an  escort  of  Beluchi,  on 
the  Uganda  Road  ;  they  killed  the  jemadar  in  command, 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     157 

but  for  some  reason  they  only  carried  away  20  out  of  the 
700  loads  captured. 

The  rebellion  was  at  first  confined  to  the  Mazrui 
chiefs.  But  their  success  soon  gained  for  the  rebels 
adherents  among  the  Suahili  chiefs  and  the  native  tribes 
who  had  kept  aloof  at  first,  as  the  quarrel  was  over  an 
infringement  of  the  Arab  rules  of  succession.  The 
country  between  Mombasa  and  Takaungu  is  under 
the  influence  of  a  Suahili  chief,  whose  principal  town 
is  on  the  Mtwapa  river,  seven  miles  north  of  Mom- 
basa. The  chief  was  believed  to  be  secretly  aiding  the 
Mazrui,  and  he  was  summoned  to  Mombasa  to  answer 
for  his  conduct.  Though  he  was  an  old  man,  eighty 
years  of  age,  he  declined  to  obey,  and  openly  joined 
the  rebels. 

This  was  the  signal  for  a  general  rising  of  the  East 
Coast  natives,  and  practically  the  whole  of  the  British 
East  African  coast  lands  were  in  rebellion,  and  the 
British  power  confined  to  the  coast  ports. 

The  situation  was  now  very  serious,  as  it  had  quite 
outgrown  the  power  of  the  local  forces.  The  naval 
brigade  could  carry  any  position  it  attacked,  but  its 
movements  were  necessarily  slow.  It  could  not  follow  up 
a  success,  so  as  to  inflict  serious  loss  upon  the  rebels,  and  it 
could  not  defend  friendly  villages  from  attack.  An  Indian 
contingent  was  therefore  called  for.  Three  hundred  men, 
under  Captain  Barrett  and  Lieutenant  Scott,  landed  on 
30th    December,    1895.     The  first  duty   of  the    Indian 


158  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

contingent  was  to  clear  the  immediate  neighbourhood 
of  Mombasa.  A  fortnight  after  its  arrival  it  attacked 
Mtwapa.  The  landing  was  steadily  resisted,  and  there 
was  a  three  hours'  engagement  between  the  boats  and 
the  natives  on  shore.  The  rebel  casualties  numbered 
eighteen,  and  two  of  the  attacking  force  were  wounded. 
The  rebels  then  withdrew  to  a  boma,  some  miles  to  the 
north.  The  Indian  troops  followed  in  pursuit  next  day. 
The  column  was  purposely  misled  by  the  guides  ;  it 
marched  for  twenty-two  hours  across  waterless  country, 
and  finally  arrived  at  a  village  on  the  shore,  where  all  the 
wells  had  been  filled  in.  Luckily,  near  the  village  there 
is  a  cocoa-nut  plantation,  which  saved  the  force  from  dis- 
aster. The  milk  of  the  nuts  staved  off  thirst  starvation 
until  water  could  be  found.  The  pursuit  was  abandoned, 
and  the  contingent  returned  directly  to  Mombasa. 

The  rebels  followed  the  retreating  column,  and  on 
2ist  January  actually  attacked  Freretown;  but,  owing  to 
the  defence  of  the  Indian  and  Soudanese  troops,  the 
attack  was  repelled. 

A  second  expedition  against  the  rebel  boma  to  the 
north  was  then  organized.  It  was  successfully  accom- 
plished, and  a  small  garrison,  under  a  sepoy  officer, 
established  in  the  district.  The  safety  of  Mombasa 
and  its  adjacent  mission  stations  was  thus  secured. 

Two  columns  were  then  organized  to  march  through 
the  country  and  disperse  the  rebels.  The  northern 
column  was  sent  out  to  drive  the  rebels  southward,  and 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     159 

prevent  the  rebellion  spreading  among  the  northern 
coast  tribes.  The  rebels,  however,  succeeded  in  eluding 
the  column,  and,  while  it  was  working  south,  they  fell  on 
Melindi,  burnt  400  houses  in  the  town,  looted  some 
Indian  shops,  and  killed  several  people. 

This  success  broke  the  confidence  of  the  Giriama,  the 
most  powerful  tribe  on  the  coast  of  British  East  Africa. 
They  had  previously  held  aloof  from  rebellion,  but  now 
made  a  demonstration  against  the  village  of  Sandia. 
Had  they  done  more  the  consequences  would  have  been 
disastrous.  But  Sir  A.  Hardinge  held  a  conference  with 
the  Giriama  elders,  and  they  swore  fidelity  on  their 
sacred  animal,  the  hyena. 

The  southern  column  had  meanwhile  been  operating 
against  Mbaruk,  and  chasing  him  from  post  to  post. 
His  country  was  devastated,  and  his  chief  villages 
destroyed.  But  his  forces  were  not  seriously  injured, 
and,  as  soon  as  the  column  began  its  return  march  to 
the  coast,  they  harassed  the  rearguard.  The  southern 
column  then  invaded  Shimba,  a  hilly  country  south 
of  Mombasa.  A  station  was  established,  and  an 
Indian  garrison  left  under  the  command  of  Lieutenant 
Scott.  Although  the  rebels  had  been  twice  defeated 
(2nd  and  6th  of  March),  no  sooner  had  the  main  force 
returned  to  Mombasa  than  the  post  was  attacked. 

The  Shimba  expedition  was  undertaken  at  the  be- 
ginning of  March,  and  it  showed  that  the  forces  avail- 
able were  still  insufficient  to  cope   with  the  rebellion. 


i6o  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

The  civil  authorities  had  already  realized  this  fact, 
and  an  Indian  regiment  was  on  the  way  to  Mombasa. 
It  landed  on  March  15th,  and  its  commander,  Colonel 
Pearson,  at  once  began  a  systematic  campaign  to 
separate  the  different  rebel  centres,  and  crush  them 
in  detail.  His  plan  of  campaign  was  to  establish  a 
chain  of  forts  westward  from  Mombasa  along  the 
Uganda  Road,  and  another  chain  along  the  southern 
frontier.  So  soon  as  these  stations  were  fairly  estab- 
lished, Colonel  Pearson  advanced  to  attack  Mbaruk's 
main  force,  which  was  assembled  in  the  Kamari 
Forest,  and  to  clear  the  whole  country  between  the 
Uganda  Road  and  the  German  frontier.  On  April 
4th  the  columns  were  ready  to  storm  Mweni,  a  village 
in  the  Kamari  Forest.  The  advance  was  begun  at 
2  a.m.,  the  village  was  reached  before  dawn,  and 
triumphantly  carried  by  storm.  Its  garrison  was 
found  to  consist  of  one  cripple,  an  old  woman.  This 
battle  was  typical  of  the  rest.  Colonel  Pearson's  force 
was  too  powerful  for  any  opposition  to  be  offered  ; 
he  sent  out  numerous  divisions,  which  scoured  the 
country,  chasing  the  rebels  from  village  to  village, 
and  destroying  the  plantations.  At  length  Mbaruk 
saw  the  struggle  was  hopeless.  So  he  and  his  men 
crossed  the  frontier  into  German  territory.  They  at 
once  surrendered  (April  20th)  to  Major  von  Wissmann, 
who  gladly  received  the  refugees  and  settled  them  in 
Usaramo,  a   fertile  but  then   uninhabited  district. 


*    11'    ! 


^4\ 


f!;:PI^;;l 


''I'll  '   ■  '  I  ^^3^'''^ 

'Sir-  ■^i^'E?*-* 


MAZRUI  REBELLION  AND  EMIGRATION     i6i 

By  the  end  of  April  the  Mazrui  rebellion  was  thus 
at  an  end.  But  the  victory  was  gained  at  the  cost  of 
wholesale  devastation  and  disorganization.  The 
greatest  loss,  however,  was  the  emigration  of  the 
most  intelligent  and  profitable  section  of  the  East 
Coast  natives,  a  heavy  price  in  a  country  whose  main 
need  is  population. 

A  village  elder  was  asked  whether  his  people  had 
suffered  much  by  the  war.  "  Alas  ! "  he  replied,  "  when 
two  elephants  meet  in  conflict,  what  becomes  of  the 
grass  beneath  their  feet  ?  " 


M 


Chapter  X 

HOW   THE    MISSIONARIES   RETURNED   TO 
UGANDA 

"  Watu  waliambiwa  '  Kakaeni '  ;  hawa  kuambiwa  '  Kashin- 
daneni.' " 

"  People  were  told  '  Go  and  dwell ' ;  they  were  not  told  '  Go 
and  struggle  together  for  the  mastery.' " 

— Suahili  Proverb  ( W.  E.  Taylor). 

IT  is  now  time  to  turn  from  the  coast  lands  to 
the  progress  of  events  in  the  interior.  We  have 
seen  in  a  previous  chapter  what  keen  interest 
in  the  hinterland  was  aroused  by  Stanley's  appeal 
for  missionaries  to  Uganda,  and  how,  in  response  to 
that  appeal,  parties  of  Protestant  and  Catholic  mis- 
sionaries entered  the  country.  By  their  quarrels  they 
lost  Mtesa's  confidence,  and  the  missions  made  no 
effective  progress  during  his  lifetime. 

Mtesa  died  in  1884,  and  his  successor,  Mwanga, 
being  bound  by  no  pledges  to  the  missions,  prepared 
to  suppress  them.  He  began  fitfully  to  persecute  the 
native  converts,  and  to  harass  the  missionaries. 
Mwanga's    murder   of    Bishop    Hannington,   who   was 


THE  MISSIONARIES  RETURN  TO  UGANDA  163 

approaching  Uganda  by  a  road  which  native  super- 
stition closed  to  Europeans,  led  to  more  active 
measures  against  the  missionaries.  Their  position 
became  so  precarious  that  they  all  withdrew  and 
established  stations  at  the  southern  end  of  the 
Victoria  Nyanza,  to  await  a  more  favourable  oppor- 
tunity for  work  in  Uganda. 

In  1888  Mwanga  prepared  for  a  general  massacre 
of  all  his  Christian  and  Mohammedan  subjects.  They 
were  to  be  deported  to  an  uninhabited  island,  and 
there  left  to  starve.  The  primitive  paganism  was  to 
be  re-established  as  the  universal  religion  of  Uganda. 
News  of  the  project  leaked  out.  The  two  threatened 
parties  joined  forces.  They  rebelled  suddenly  and 
successfully.  Mwanga  fled,  and  his  brother,  Kiwewa, 
was  proclaimed  king  in  his  stead.  The  victors 
promptly  quarrelled  over  the  division  of  the  spoil. 
The  Christians  were  the  weaker  party,  so  they  fled  to 
the  province  of  Ankori  ;  and  Kiwewa  reigned  as  the 
nominee  of  the  Mohammedans.  He  quarrelled  with 
his  supporters,  and,  in  a  fit  of  rage,  killed  the  Moham- 
medan leader,  Mujasi,  with  his  own  hands.  In  re- 
venge for  this  murder  the  Mohammedans  stormed  the 
palace.  Kiwewa  escaped  to  the  tomb  of  his  father 
Mtesa,  but  he  was  denied  sanctuary  there,  and  fled 
from  Uganda.  The  Mohammedans  then  placed  upon 
the  throne  Kalema  (or  Karema),  a  third  son  of 
Mtesa. 


i64  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

While  these  events  were  happening  in  Uganda, 
Mwanga  had  not  been  idle.  He  had  taken  refuge  in 
the  French  mission  station  at  Bukumbi,  on  the 
southern  side  of  the  lake.  He  professed  repentance 
of  his  sins,  and  conversion  to  the  Roman  Catholic 
faith.  He  was  forgiven  by  the  Fathers,  and  insti- 
gated by  them  to  attempt  the  recovery  of  his  throne. 
The  Protestant  missionaries,  distrusting  Mwanga's  sin- 
cerity, and  fearing  that  his  murder  of  their  Bishop 
would  permanently  estrange  him  from  their  side, 
either  strongly  opposed  the  scheme  or  remained 
neutral.  The  native  Protestants,  however,  rallied  to 
Mwanga,  and  joined  in  a  general  appeal  to  him  to 
return. 

Mwanga's  main  difficulty  was  his  poverty  in  arms 
and  ammunition.  The  supplies  he  had  previously 
collected  were  all  in  the  hands  of  his  foes.  The  im- 
portation of  war  material  into  Equatorial  Africa  for 
sale  to  natives  was  forbidden  by  the  Berlin  Act ;  and 
at  that  time  this  regulation  was  being  rigorously  en- 
forced by  both  the  Germans  and  the  British. 

Without  weapons  nothing  could  be  done.  So 
Mwanga  and  his  allies  called  to  their  aid  an  ex- 
missionary  of  the  name  of  Stokes.  This  famous 
trader  played  such  an  important  part  in  the  struggle 
for  Uganda  that  some  notice  of  him  is  necessary, 
Stokes  was  a  man  who  had  an  exceptionally  interest- 
ing career.     He  went  to  East  Africa  on   the   staff  of 


THE  MISSIONARIES  RETURN  TO  UGANDA   165 

the  Church  Missionary  Society,  and  he  was  sent  in- 
land to  the  country  of  the  Wanyamwezi.  He  was  an 
industrious  man,  and  undertook  trading  as  well  as 
his  official  work.  To  strengthen  his  influence  among 
the  tribe,  he  entered  into  a  domestic  alliance  with  the 
daughter  of  a  leading  Mnyamwezi  chief.  His  trade 
prospered.  His  methods  were  astute,,and  white  ivory 
was  not  the  only  product  in  which  he  is  said  to  have 
dealt.  Stokes'  English  wife  died,  and  he  subsequently 
took  his  Mnyamwezi  concubine  to  Zanzibar,  and  there 
formally  married  her.  This  proceeding  was  against  the 
rules  of  the  Church  Missionary  Society.  According 
to  Mr.  Inderwick,  who  appeared  as  counsel  for  that 
Society  in  some  subsequent  proceedings  in  the  Probate 
Court,  since  Stokes'  marriage  with  a  heathen  woman 
was  deemed  inconsistent  with  his  position  as  a  mis- 
sionary, his  connection  with  the  Missionary  Society 
came  to  an  end.  The  Church  Missionary  Society 
was  probably  glad  of  an  excuse  to  dismiss  Stokes  ; 
but  the  devil  must  have  smiled,  when  Stokes  was  ex- 
pelled from  the  missionary  service  for  the  most  honour- 
able incident  in  his  record. 

Stokes  continued  trading,  and  one  of  his  enter- 
prises was  his  alliance  with  Mwanga  and  the  French 
priests  for  the  invasion  of  Uganda  in  1889.  His  sub- 
sequent career  may  be  briefly  related.  As  Unyamwezi 
was  included  in  German  East  Africa,  Stokes  took 
service  as  an  officer  of  the  German    Government.     In 


166  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

1894  he  started  with  a  caravan  of  1,000  armed  men 
to  found  a  station  in  the  country  to  the  north-west  of 
German  East  Africa.  He  suggested  to  the  British 
authorities  that  he  should  be  allowed  to  capture 
Wadelai  ;  but  his  offer  was  emphatically  rejected. 
Sir  Henry  Colvile,  who  was  then  the  Administrator 
of  British  East  Africa,  informed  Stokes  by  letter  (June, 
1894)  that  he  regarded  those  "  1,000  armed  men  with 
uneasiness,"  and  remarked,  "  I  wish  to  warn  you  that 
I  can  only  treat  any  unauthorized  warlike  operations 
as  acts  of  piracy." 

Stokes  halted  on  the  British  frontier,  where  he  had 
an  acrimonious  correspondence  with  the  British  officer 
instructed  to  watch  his  proceedings.  The  officer  told 
Stokes  that  he  could  not  "  entertain  any  negotiations 
with  a  large  armed  force,  which  has  looted  and  mur- 
dered in  British  territory."  He  therefore  abandoned 
the  idea  of  entering  British  East  Africa,  and  marched 
into  the  Congo  Free  State.  He  went  westward  to 
join  his  ally,  Hamadi-ben-Ali,  better  known  as  Kibonge, 
who  had  murdered  Emin  Pasha,  and  was  then  in  re- 
bellion against  the  Free  State.  Stokes  wrote  to  him, 
"  My  dear  Kibonge,  send  me  an  intelligent  messenger, 
and  one  who  is  well  acquainted  with  the  truth.  I  can 
help.  Do  not  be  afraid  of  being  killed.  You  shall 
not  die.  If  you  have  need  of  me,  send  me  a  mes- 
senger quickly,  and  I  will  immediately  come  to  you." 
Kibonge's   reply,   appealing    to   Stokes   for   immediate 


THE  MISSIONARIES  RETURN  TO  UGANDA   167 

help  against  the  Belgians,  came  too  late.  Kibonge 
was  captured  and  hung  for  the  murder  of  Emin  Pasha. 
Stokes,  hastening  to  Kibonge's  aid  with  a  small  ad- 
vanced party,  was  arrested  by  Captain  Henry.  In  his 
possession  were  found  the  piracy  threat  of  Sir  Henry 
Colvile,  and  letters  proving  both  Stokes'  complicity  in 
the  Arab  Congo  rebellion  and  his  trade  in  arms  with 
the  rebels.  Stokes  was  court-martialled  and  hung  at 
Lindi  by  Major  Lothaire,  on  15th  January,  1895. 

Lothaire's  conduct  of  the  trial  was  irregular,  as  it 
included  several  technical  errors.  The  most  serious 
was  the  inconsistency  that  Stokes  had  been  refused 
right  of  appeal  as  a  soldier,  and  then  was  hung  instead 
of  being  shot.  Lothaire  was  accordingly  tried  for 
murder  at  Boma  and  acquitted.  Captain  Arthur,  the 
British  representative  at  the  trial,  in  his  official  report 
concluded  that  Lothaire  had  "  displayed  undue  haste 
and  precipitation  in  the  trial  and  execution  of  Mr. 
Stokes,"  but  that    Lothaire  was  "  rightfully  acquitted." 

After  this  brief  sketch  of  Stokes'  career,  it  will  be 
understood  that  Mwanga  could  not  have  applied  to  a 
more  suitable  agent.  Stokes  was  the  leading  expert  in 
the  illicit  gunpowder  trade,  and  with  his  cosmopolitan 
sympathies  was  equally  ready  to  help  English,  Germans, 
French,  Waganda,  and  Arabs.  He  undertook,  accord- 
ing to  his  own  account,  in  return  for  between  seventeen 
and  eighteen  tons  of  ivory  (worth  more  than  ;^20,ooo), 


i68  BRITISH  EAST   AFRICA 

to  supply  Mwanga  and  the  French  party  with  the 
necessary  arms  and  ammunition.  The  time  seemed 
favourable  for  the  attempt,  as  Kalema's  rule  was  un- 
popular in  Uganda.  Kalema  had  heard  of  the  projected 
invasion,  and  of  a  plot  in  the  capital  for  his  deposition  ; 
and,  as  it  is  the  rule  in  Uganda  that  the  king  must  be 
a  member  of  the  hereditary  royal  family,  Kalema  did  his 
best  to  render  himself  indispensable  by  a  massacre  of 
his  relatives.  Then  he  slew  the  old  Katikiro,  whom 
Emin  had  described  as  "the  one  gentleman  in  Uganda" 
who,  through  all  the  religious  changes  in  his  country, 
had  remained  a  firm  adherent  of  the  national  pagan- 
ism. 

These  savage  acts  horrified  many  of  Kalema's  sup- 
porters, and  facilitated  the  return  of  the  exiled  king. 
Mwanga  sailed  from  Bukumbi  in  Stokes'  boat,  landed 
at  the  mouth  of  the  Kagera  River,  and  raised  the 
standard  of  civil  war.  He  was  defeated,  and  fled  to 
the  Sesse  Islands,  where  he  was  welcomed  by  the 
inhabitants.  As  their  canoes  were  supreme  on  the  lake, 
Mwanga  was  safe.  With  the  aid  of  the  Wa-Sesse 
Mwanga  captured  Bulingugwe,  a  small  island  seven 
miles  from  Rubaga,  the  capital  of  Uganda.  A  further 
attempt  on  the  mainland,  though  temporarily  successful, 
ultimately  failed.  Stokes  was  sent  down  to  the  coast 
for  more  arms  and  ammunition,  while  Mwanga  main- 
tained his  position  at  Bulingugwe,  Here  the  king  was 
joined    by    some    of    the    English    missionaries,    and 


THE  MISSIONARIES  RETURN  TO  UGANDA   169 

members  of  both  missions  endeavoured  to  gain  Euro- 
pean assistance  for  Mwanga. 

With  the  irony  of  fate,  which  in  East  African  history 
is  especially  malicious,  both  parties  invited  into  Uganda 
the  force  to  which  ultimately  it  was  most  bitterly 
opposed.  Mackay  appealed  to  Emin  to  bring  in  thej 
Soudanese,  the  very  step  for  which  later  on  the  Pro- 
testants so  bitterly  denounced  Lugard.  The  Catholics, 
with  Mwanga's  authority,  did  their  best  to  persuade  the 
British  East  Africa  Company  to  occupy  Uganda.  One 
of  the  Company's  exploring  caravans,  under  Mr.  F.  J, 
Jackson,  during  the  summer  of  1889  reached  the  eastern 
coast  of  the  Nyanza.  Pere  Lourdel  wrote  to  Mr. 
Jackson  to  say  that  Mwanga  "  offers  you,  in  addition  to 
the  monopoly  of  commerce  in  Uganda,  a  present  of  one 
hundred  frasila  of  ivory,  which  he  will  give  you  when  he 
is  returned  to  the  throne.  He  also  takes  upon  himself 
the  provisioning  of  your  men,  and  accepts  your  flag. 
For  our  part,  we  Catholic  missionaries  shall  be  very 
glad  and  very  grateful  to  take  advantage  of  the  pro- 
tection which  you  will  be  able,  I  hope,  to  grant  to  the 
missionaries  and  Christians  of  this  country,  if  you 
succeed  in  driving  out  the  Mussulman." 

Neither  appeal  was  successful.  Emin  did  not  get  his 
invitation  (dated  25th  August,  1889)  until  June,  1890; 
while  Jackson  had  been  ordered  not  to  enter  Uganda, 
as  the  Company  feared  to  compromise  the  missionaries 
since  Mwanga  might  think  the  caravan  had  been  sent 
to  punish  him  for  the  death  of  Hannington. 


170  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Jackson's  orders  were  so  positive  that  not  even  the 
offer  of  a  trade  monopoly  in  Uganda  could  tempt  him 
to  enter  the  country,  and  he  continued  his  geographical 
explorations  to  the  north-east.  Mwanga  therefore  had 
to  wait  until  January,  1890,  when  Stokes  came  back 
from  the  coast  with  supplies.  The  war  was  then  at  once 
renewed ;  the  Catholic  and  Protestant  Waganda  swore 
fidelity  to  each  other,  if  they  were  victorious,  and  an 
immediate  attack  on  Kalema  was  made.  The  rival 
forces  met  at  Bulwanyi  on  the  nth  February;  the 
Mohammedans  were  routed,  and  Mwanga  re-entered 
the  capital  in  triumph.  Kalema  fled  to  Unyoro,  where 
he  subsequently  died  of  smallpox. 

Both  parties  of  missionaries  at  once  returned  to 
Uganda.  According  to  Mackay,  Pere  Lourdel  stated 
that  the  Protestant  missionaries  were  not  to  be  allowed 
to  return,  as  they  had  refused  to  help  Mwanga  when  in 
exile.  This  decision,  if  ever  made,  was,  however,  never 
enforced  ;  but  the  king  was  no  doubt  prejudiced  against 
the  Protestants,  as  he  had  murdered  their  bishop,  and 
they  had  refused  to  take  part  in  his  war.  He  felt, 
however,  too  insecure  to  dispense  with  the  help  of  either 
of  the  Christian  parties,  and  permitted  the  English 
mission  to  re-occupy  its  former  station. 

In  February,  1890,  there  were  therefore  four  parties 
in  Uganda — Catholic,  Protestant,  Mohammedan,  and 
Pagan.     The  Catholics  were  supreme  at  Court,  owing 


THE  MISSIONARIES  RETURN  TO  UGANDA    171 

to  the  leading  share  they  had  taken  in  Mwanga's 
restoration,  and  because  the  king  was  nominally  a 
member  of  their  Church.  The  Protestants  distrusted 
the  king,  and  were  jealous  of  the  Catholic  supremacy. 
The  Mohammedans,  under  Kalema,  were  still  powerful, 
owing  to  their  military  organization ;  but  numerically 
they  were  weak,  and  they  were  under  the  cloud  of 
recent  defeat.  Finally,  there  was  the  old  Pagan  party, 
with  which  in  his  heart  Mwanga  most  warmly  sympa- 
thised. To  add  to  the  complication,  an  expedition 
under  Carl  Peters  suddenly  arrived  at  the  capital,  and  l 
negotiated  a  political  treaty  with  Mwanga  in  the 
interests  of  Germany. 

Peters,  during  his  raid  across  Northern  British  East 
Africa,  reached  Kavirondo,  and  during  Jackson's 
absence  visited  the  British  East  Africa  Company's 
camp  there.  The  Somali  in  charge  showed  Peters  the 
letter  in  which  Pere  Lourdel  appealed  to  Jackson  to 
enter  Uganda  and  help  Mwanga.  Peters  saw  his 
chance. 

He  at  once  wrote  to  Mwanga  and  the  missionaries, 
offering  his  aid,  and  marched  to  Uganda.  He  crossed 
the  Nile  on  February  20th,  1890.  He  was  met  by  a 
letter  from  Mwanga,  written  by  the  Rev.  E.  C.  Gordon, 
in  which  he  was  invited  to  Mengo,  where  he  was  wel- 
comed by  the  king  and  the  missionaries. 

Peters'  idea  was  to  make  Uganda  and  the  Upper  Nile 
into  a  neutralized  state,  like  that  of  the  Congo.     It  was 


172  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

to  be  open  to  all  Europeans  alike.  This  policy  was  of 
course  acceptable  to  the  French  Fathers,  and  they 
supported  it  warmly.  A  treaty  was  signed  on  ist 
March,  1890,  between  Peters,  on  behalf  of  the  German 
Emperor,  and  Mwanga,  by  which  the  latter  accepted 
"  the  decrees  of  the  Berlin  Treaty  (Congo  Act)  of 
February,  1885,  so  far  as  they  have  reference  to 
Buganda  and  its  tributary  countries.  He  throws  open 
these  countries  to  the  subjects  of  His  Majesty  the 
German  Emperor,  as  to  all  other  Europeans.  He 
guarantees  to  the  subjects  of  His  Majesty  the  German 
Emperor,  as  to  all  other  Europeans  who  may  wish  to 
avail  themselves  of  it,  entire  freedom  of  trade,  and  the 
right  of  travel  and  settlement  in  Buganda  and  all 
tributary  states." 

The  English  missionaries  protested  against  the  treaty, 
on  the  ground  that  Mwanga  had  already  accepted  the 
British  protectorate.  But  the  king  replied  that  he  had 
only  offered  to  do  so  if  Jackson  helped  to  restore  him 
to  the  throne.  As  he  had  not  been  helped  by  the 
British,  he  would  not  give  them  the  monopoly  he  had 
conditionally  offered.  He  now  preferred  to  remain 
independent,  and  welcome  alike  Germans,  French,  and 
English. 

The  time  when  the  neutralization  of  Uganda  had 
been  possible  was,  however,  now  past.  Mwanga  was 
not  unreasonable  in  considering  that  his  offer  had  been 
rejected,  and  had  therefore  lapsed.     But  an  agreement 


THE  MISSIONARIES  RETURN  TO  UGANDA   173 

had  been  already  signed  in  Europe  between  England 
and  Germany,  which  placed  Uganda  in  the  British 
sphere.  On  Peters'  return  to  the  coast,  he  found  that 
his  treaty  was  invalid. 

The  British  East  Africa  Company  was  therefore  at 
liberty  to  occupy  and  administer  Uganda.  Jackson 
accordingly  crossed  the  Nile,  and  reached  Mengo  on 
14th  April,  1890.  He  signed  a  treaty  with  Mwanga,  by 
which  the  king  bowed  to  the  Anglo-German  agreement, 
»and  Uganda  was  definitely  included  in  British  territory. 
Jackson  shortly  afterwards  returned  to  the  coast,  leav- 
ing his  comrade,  Ernest  Gedge,  as  the  Company's 
representative. 

Gedge  had  a  very  uncomfortable  position.  The  king 
would  have  preferred  the  neutralization  arrangement 
made  with  Peters,  and  Gedge  was  personally  unpopular 
with  both  the  missionary  parties. 

The  country  was  simmering  with  discontent  and 
faction  jealousy,  and  a  renewal  of  civil  war  seemed 
imminent.  A  strong  man  was  wanted  in  Uganda  ;  and, 
luckily  for  the  British  interests,  the  right  man  to  deal 
with  the  situation  was  rapidly  approaching. 

On  December  i8th,  1890,  a  badly  equipped  caravan 
of  some  two  hundred  and  seventy  men  marched  into 
Rubaga  under  the  command  of  Captain  F.  D.  Lugard. 


Chapter  XI 
HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA 

"Mother  earth!  are  the  heroes  dead? 

Do  they  thrill  the  souls  of  the  years  no  more  ? 
Are  the  gleaming  snows  and  the  poppies  red 
All  that  is  left  of  the  brave  of  yore  ? 

"  Are  there  none  to  fight  as  Theseus  fought — 
Far  in  the  young  world's  misty  dream  ? 
Or  to  teach  as  the  grey-haired  Nestor  taught  ? 
Mother  earth  !  are  the  heroes  gone  ?  " 

IN  1885  Captain  (now  General  Sir)  F.  D.  Lugard, 
D.S.O.,  was  entitled  to  long  leave  from  his 
regiment,  and  he  resolved  to  devote  it  to  work 
in  Africa  as  a  volunteer  military  missionary.  It  was 
his  ambition,  to  use  his  own  words,  "to  embark  in  some 
useful  undertaking  in  Africa — if  possible,  in  connection 
with  the  suppression  of  the  slave  trade."  So,  with 
;^50  in  his  pocket,  he  sailed  from  Gibraltar  to  Naples, 
where  he  offered  his  services  to  the  Italians  in  their 
Abyssinian  enterprise.  Finding  no  opening  there,  he 
proceeded  to  Egypt,  but  the  Egyptian  Soudanese 
policy  was  closed,  and  again  Lugard's  services  were 
rejected.      His   money  was  running   low,  and    he  felt 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   175 

doubtful  whether  it  would  suffice  to  take  him  to  any 
field  where  he  could  be  of  use.  So  he  travelled  down 
the  Red  Sea  as  a  deck  passenger  on  an  Italian  timber 
ship.  He  herded  with  Arab  coolies  and  Neapolitan 
roughs,  slept  on  deck  among  the  timber,  and  had  his 
meals  of  broken  victuals  with  the  Italian  cook  in  the 
galley  beside  the  engines.  He  landed  at  Massowah, 
and  again  offered  his  services  to  the  Italians  ;  but  he 
was  again  refused.  He  crossed  to  Aden,  took  ship  to 
Quilimane,  and  went  up  the  Zambesi  to  help  the 
African  Lakes  Company  in  its  fight  with  the  Nyasa 
slavers.  His  services  were  here  enthusiastically  ac- 
cepted, and  he  spent  twelve  months  in  the  campaign. 
Peace,  however,  was  proclaimed  before  the  slavers  had 
been  completely  suppressed,  and  Lugard  returned  to 
England  to  recover  from  a  severe  wound.  In  Novem- 
ber, 1889,  he  was  back  again  on  the  East  Coast,  and 
Mr.  G.  S.  Mackenzie,  the  administrator  of  the  recently- 
established  British  East  Africa  Company,  offered  him 
a  post  on  his  staff. 

Lugard  urged  the  Company  to  establish  a  number 
of  small  trading  stations,  which  should  be  gradually 
extended  inland,  from  a  base  on  the  sea.  Thus  an 
effectively  occupied  and  administered  wedge  would  be 
thrust  into  the  interior.  The  policy  was  approved, 
and  Lugard  was  commissioned  to  carry  it  into  effect. 
He  founded  a  chain  of  posts  from  Mombasa  to  the 
fort  at  Machakos,  which  subsequently,  under  the  care 


176  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

of  its  superintendent,  Mr.  J.  Ainsvvorth,  became  the 
most  successful  and  best  administered  station  in  British 
East  Africa. 

In  May,  1890,  Lugard  was  back  at  Mombasa,  where 
he  set  to  work  on  a  scheme  for  the  organization  of 
the  freed  slaves  on  the  coast.  There  had  been  a 
deplorable  feud  between  the  Arabs  and  the  missionaries 
on  the  slavery  question.  The  missionaries  insisted  on 
using  their  stations  as  asylums  for  fugitive  slaves,  and 
this  proceeding,  which  was  illegal  while  the  coast  was 
under  Arab  law,  naturally  roused  the  enmity  of  the 
leading  Arab  landowners.  Lugard,  in  spite  of  his 
very  advanced  views  on  the  slavery  question,  realized 
that  the  commercial  prosperity  of  the  coast  planters 
is  essential  to  the  prosperity  of  British  East  Africa, 
and  that  some  allowance  should  be  made  for  the  Arab 
point  of  view.  He  treated  the  slave-owners  with  such 
tact  that  he  secured  the  enthusiastic  co-operation  of 
the  Lewali  of  Melindi  and  some  other  leading  Arabs 
in  a  plan  for  the  solution  of  the  freed-slave  difficulty. 
His  work  was  interrupted  by  sudden  orders  to  go 
inland  and  found  a  station  at  the  important  caravan 
centre  of  Ngongo  Bagas.  He  started  with  a  caravan 
of  150  men  and  a  party  of  comrades,  who,  inspired 
by  Lugard's  enthusiasm,  all  made  their  mark  in  East 
African  history.  The  second  in  command  was  George 
Wilson,  who  ruled  Uganda  in  the  troubled  time  of  the 
mutiny.     F.  de  Winton,  who  died  in  Toru,  and  Grant, 


Photo  byl 


yUUicll  &■  Fry. 


GEN.    !•".    D.    LUC.AKU. 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA    177 

now  the  senior  resident  and  one  of  the  most  experi- 
enced officers  in  Uganda,  were  both  on  Lugard's  staff. 
The  famous  Somali,  Dualla  Idris,  was  the  headman  of 
the  caravan,  and  Shukri  Aga,  one  of  Gordon's  Soudan- 
ese officers,  who  had  returned  to  the  coast  with  Stanley 
and  Emin,  was  in  charge  of  the  escort.  Lugard's  force 
was  soon  reduced  by  the  desertion  of  a  third  of  the 
men,  but  it  was  raised  to  450  by  fresh  instalments. 
It  reached  Machakos,  and  Lugard  advanced  some  fifty 
miles  further  to  the  north-west,  where  he  built  a  new 
station  among  the  Kikuyu  at  Dagoreti.  But  his 
work  was  interrupted  by  the  arrival  of  orders  to 
proceed  in  hot  haste  to  Uganda,  as  Stokes  "  was  con- 
veying very  large  consignments  of  arms  and  powder" 
to  that  country,  and  it  was  necessary  to  put  a  stop 
to  this  illegal  and  iniquitous  trade. 

Wilson  was  left  at  Dagoreti  ;  but  the  Kikuyu  were 
troublesome,  and  his  supplies  of  ammunition  were 
kept  back  from  him  by  an  officer  nearer  the  coast. 
Wilson  had  to  abandon  the  station,  which  was  at  once 
looted  and  burnt  by  the  natives  ;  he  cut  his  way  back 
to  Machakos,  where  he  obtained  supplies  of  ammu- 
nition, returned  to  Dagoreti,  and  rebuilt  the  station. 

Meanwhile,  Lugard  was  hastening  by  forced  marches 
to  Uganda.  As  the  country  was  now  part  of  the 
British  Protectorate,  he  maintained  his  right  to  enter 
without  permission.  So  he  marched  straight  to  the 
capital  without  waiting  for  the  king's  gracious  leave. 

N 


178  BRITISH  EAST   AFRICA 

He  reached  Mengo  on  December  i8th,  1890,  and  found 
to  his  great  relief  that  he  had  won  the  race  with 
Stokes.  Lugard's  instructions  from  Sir  Francis  de 
Winton,  who  was  the  Administrator  of  British  East 
Africa,  warned  him  that  "  Mwanga's  hope  is  Stokes, 
who  has  promised  to  bring  him  large  quantities  of 
ammunition,  powder,  and  breech-loading  cartridges. 
With  these  Mwanga,  it  is  believed,  is  going  to  arm 
the  Roman  Catholics,  and  drive  the  Protestants  out." 
But  Stokes  had  not  yet  arrived,  and  the  king's  position 
was  still  somewhat  insecure,  as  he  was  dependent  on 
his  Christian  supporters ;  hence  Lugard  was  in  a 
position  to  make  the  king  agree  to  a  formal  treaty, 
which  was  signed  on  December  26th. 

Lugard,  however,  soon  found  that  he  had  entered 
a  hornets'  nest,  owing  to  the  hostility  of  the  four 
factions  —  Mohammedan,  Protestant,  Catholic,  and 
Pagan.  The  Catholics,  having  aided  Mwanga's  rest- 
oration, were  naturally  in  favour  at  Court,  and  re- 
gretted Lugard's  arrival. 

The  Protestants  welcomed  him,  as  they  expected 
him  to  throw  in  his  lot  with  them  against  the  Catholics. 
Lugard,  however,  had  no  intention  of  taking  sides 
with  one  religious  party  against  the  rest.  As  the 
representative  of  the  British  East  Africa  Company,  he 
considered  himself  responsible  for  the  administration 
of  the  whole  country,  and  felt  it  was  his  duty  to  see 
that  all  parties  had  fair  play.     His  predecessor,  Gedge, 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   179 

who  had  been  left  behind  by  Jackson,  had  tried  the 
same  poHcy,  and  secured  the  ill  will  of  both  parties 
of  European  missionaries.  Lugard  was  soon  to  suffer 
the  same  fate.  His  arrival  threatened  the  Catholic 
supremacy,  and  if  he  could  establish  the  British  East 
Africa  Company  in  Uganda  the  French  Fathers'  plan 
of  an  International  Free  State  would  be  shattered. 
The  Protestant  missionaries,  on  the  other  hand,  were 
disappointed  that  Lugard  did  not  at  once  take  their 
view  of  the  position. 

The  tension  was  eased  for  a  while  by  the  arrival  of 
*  Bishop  Tucker,  who  reached  Uganda  at  the  end  of 
December  with  some  new  recruits.  He  had  left  the 
coast  with  seven  missionaries,  but  the  treacherous 
East  African  climate  had  killed  three  of  them,  had 
completely  shattered  the  health  of  a  fourth,  and  re- 
duced the  remaining  three  to  so  weak  a  state  that  on 
entering  Uganda  they  were  unable  to  walk  from  the 
.  lake  shore  to  the  mission  station.  The  Bishop,  with 
his  usual  fairness  and  common  sense,  at  once  entered 
into  an  agreement  with  Lugard  as  to  the  policy  of 
the  Church  Mission.  But  the  Bishop's  stay  was  short ; 
he  could  only  remain  for  a  month,  and  so  soon  as  he 
had  left  the  country  his  subordinates  repudiated  the 
agreement. 

At  the  end  of  January  the  British  East  Africa  Com- 
pany's forces  in  Uganda  were  strengthened  by  the 
arrival  of  Captain  Williams  with  seventy-five  Soudanese, 


i8o  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

lOO  Zanzibar!,  and  a  Maxim  gun.  Stokes  arrived  a 
week  later.  Lugard  immediately  protested  that  Stokes' 
powder  trade  was  illegal  and  immoral,  and  insisted 
that  it  must  cease.  Stokes  replied  by  explaining  that 
he  made  a  profit  of  ;^250  on  every  load  (60  lb.)  of 
arms  and  ammunition  that  he  sold.  Lugard  did  not 
take  the  hint,  and  Stokes,  finding  that  he  had  mis- 
taken his  man,  promised  to  place  all  his  powder  in 
Lugard's  keeping  ;  but  this  promise  he  forgot  to  fulfil 
and  soon  got  the  ammunition  safely  out  of  Lugard's 
reach. 

Lugard's  next  care  was  to  reconcile  the  two  Christian 
factions.  The  hostility  between  them  was  bitter,  but 
it  was  kept  in  control  by  fear  of  a  common  enemy, 
for  the  Mohammedans  and  Pagans  were  still  powerful, 
and  might  at  any  time  renew  the  war  against  the 
Christians,  and  perhaps  overthrow  the  king  and  his 
allies. 

As  a  first  step  in  the  policy  of  uniting  the  Christian 
j  parties,  Lugard  persuaded  them  both  to  join  in  an 
expedition  against  the  Mohammedan  faction  in  Uganda. 
The  alliance  was  not  harmonious,  and  the  preparations 
for  the  campaign  were  marred  by  continual  quarrels. 
It  had  been  agreed  between  the  two  parties  that  the 
commander  of  the  Uganda  army  should  be  alternately 
Protestant  and  Catholic.  The  Protestants  claimed 
that  it  was  their  turn  for  the  command.  But  the  king 
denied  that  what  the  Protestants  put  in  as  the  previous 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   i8i 

war  with  a  Catholic  in  command  was  a  war  at  all ;  so 
he  decided  that  it  was  the  Catholics'  turn  to  nominate 
the  commander-in-chief.  These  little  matters  having 
been  arranged,  on  April  8th  the  combined  forces 
marched  against  the  Mohammedans.  Lugard  crossed 
the  Kanyongoro  River  by  a  clever  stratagem.  He 
pretended  to  camp,  but  crossed  the  river  at  night  and 
attacked  and  routed  the  Mohammedans  at  dawn  on 
May  7th.  He  was  anxious  to  follow  up  the  victory 
by  a  pursuit  of  the  fugitives  and  an  advance  on  the 
capital  of  Kaberega,  the  king  of  Unyoro.  The 
Waganda,  however,  had  had  enough  of  the  war,  and 
would  not  join  in  the  pursuit,  so  that  the  fruits  of 
the  victory  were  lost. 

The  two  Christian  parties,  being  thus  relieved 
of  the  common  enemy,  quarrelled  with  greater  fury 
than  before.  Many  of  the  disputes  were  over  triviali- 
ties. The  main  quarrel,  however,  was  respecting  the 
right  of  the  native  chiefs  to  change  their  religion. 
That  any  pagan  or  Mohammedan  could  become  a 
Christian  was  admitted  ;  but  the  question  at  issue  was 
whether  any  Protestant  chief  could  turn  Catholic,  or 
vice  versd.  With  the  characteristic  irony  of  Uganda 
politics,  the  Catholics  were  for  "complete  religious 
liberty,"  and  the  Protestants  were  against  it,  as  they 
said  {vide,  e.g.,  p.  190)  the  people  did  not  understand 
it,  and  that  it  was  useless  to  give  it  to  them.  Lugard 
reported  that  "  the  Catholics  behaved  very  well  ;  they 


i82  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

said  they  were  in  favour  of  complete  freedom  of 
creed."  The  Protestants,  on  the  other  hand,  said 
that  the  question  was  really  political  and  not  re- 
ligious ;  that  the  chiefs  wanted  to  change  simply 
because  Catholicism  was  in  fashion  at  court ;  and,  as 
there  had  been  a  division  of  the  chieftainships  between 
the  two  sects,  if  men  were  allowed  to  change  it  would 
upset  the  recent  agreement  and  balance  of  power. 

On  the  view,  to  use  Sir  Gerald  Portal's  phrase, 
that  the  race  for  converts  in  Uganda  was  synonymous 
with  a  race  for  political  power,  there  is  no  doubt 
much  to  be  said  for  the  Protestant  position.  But  to 
those  who  look  upon  missionaries  as  spiritual  teachers 
the  Protestant  contention  is  revolting.  That  mission- 
aries, sent  to  preach  the  gospel  that  "the  truth  shall 
make  you  free,"  should,  at  the  end  of  the  nineteenth 
century,  demand  that  a  man  should  forfeit  his  position 
and  estates,  because  he  had  changed  the  sect  of 
Christianity  to  which  he  belonged,  appears  simply  in- 
credible. It  is  therefore  advisable  to  state  the  Protest- 
ant position  in  the  words  of  one  of  the  most  respected 
and  most  tolerant  members  of  the  Church  Missionary 
Society  in  Uganda.  The  Rev.  R.  H.  Walker,  in  a 
letter  dated  14th  July,  1891,  to  the  Church  Missionary 
Intelligencer,  explains  the  Protestant  case  as  follows  : — 

"  Now  many  want  to  leave  the  Protestant  party, 
and  to  join  that  of  the  king,  because  they  get  more 
honour  by  doing  so.     The  Protestants  agree  to  their 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   183 

leaving  and  becoming  Catholics,  but  say,  of  course, 
they  leave  their  offices  or  territories  behind  them 
when  they  change  parties.  Some  consider  it  unfair 
to  make  a  man  give  up  his  position  in  the  country 
because  he  changes  his  religion.  The  Catholics  fall 
in  with  this,  as  it  will  increase  the  power  of  their 
party  in  the  land." 

In  this  controversy  Lugard  sided  with  the  Pro- 
testants on  the  ground  that  the  whole  struggle  be- 
tween the  two  parties  was  political  and  not  religious. 
He  declined  to  speak  of  them  as  Catholic  and 
Protestant,  but  as  French  and  English,  although  the 
"  French "  Bishop  was  a  German,  and  one  of  the 
"  French "  priests  (Pere  Gaudibert)  was  an  English- 
man. 

Lugard's  decision  for  a  while  led  to  a  decrease  in 
avowed  defections  to  the  Catholic  cause.  But  he  saw 
quite  clearly  that  the  Catholics,  or,  as  he  called  them, 
the  Wa-Fransi  {i.e.,  the  French),  were  rapidly  gaining 
overwhelming  strength.  The  refusal  of  Jackson  and 
the  English  missionaries  to  help  Mwanga  during  his 
war  of  restoration  had  thrown  him  into  the  hands 
of  the  Cathdlics,  and  the  Protestants  were  steadily 
losing  in  numbers  and  power. 

Lugard  foresaw  that,  as  soon  as  the  Catholics  were 
sufficiently  sure  of  their  position,  they  would  endeavour 
to  expel  the  Protestants.  Even  if  the  Company  could 
afford  to  send  further   reinforcements    from    the  coast 


i84  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

they  could  not  arrive  in  time ;  and,  to  hold  Uganda 
against  the  Catholics,  Lugard  knew  to  be  impossible 
with  the  forces  at  his  disposal. 

While  Lugard  was  puzzling  over  the  best  course 
to  adopt,  it  occurred  to  him  that  somewhere  to  the 
west  of  Uganda  there  was  a  body  of  Emin  Pasha's 
old  Egyptian  troops,  who  might  be  called  to  the  rescue. 
They  were  part  of  the  force  which  had  held  the  Equa- 
torial Soudan  against  the  Mahdists,  and  had  been  left 
behind,  when  Emin  and  Stanley  withdrew  from  the 
Soudan. 

It  is  true  that  Selim  Bey,  Emin's  most  trustworthy 
officer,  had  been  sent  to  bring  these  people  to 
Kavalli's,  and  Stanley  had  waited  for  them  as  long  as 
he  had  felt  justified.  He  allowed  Selim  what  he 
thought  ample  time,  and  it  might  have  been  ample  for 
Stanley,  But  Selim  Bey  was  not  a  Stanley,  and  he 
did  not  keep  his  appointment.  Stanley  accused  him  of 
intentional  delay  ;  and,  as  some  of  the  other  Soudanese 
officers  had  been  guilty  of  treachery  to  Emin,  Lugard 
hesitated  about  bringing  Selim  and  his  men  into 
Uganda.  But  Shukri,  the  head  of  the  Soudanese 
with  Lugard,  was  positive  that  Selim  had  done  his 
best,  and  that  the  garrisons  around  Wadelai  had  been 
so  scattered  that  it  was  impossible  to  collect  them  in 
the  time  allowed.  Shukri  Aga  insisted  most  strongly 
that     Selim     Bey   was,    and    always   had    been,   loyal ; 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   185 

that  he  had  been  most  eager  to  accompany  the  "  relief 
expedition "  to  the  coast,  but  would  not  desert  his 
men.  He  had  appealed  for  a  little  longer  time,  but 
before  he  reached  Kavalli's  the  "  Emin  Expedition " 
had  left  for  the  coast  and  Selim  and  his  people 
were  left  stranded  on  the  shores  of  the  Albert  Nyanza. 
Lugard  was  at  length  convinced  that  Selim  could  be 
trusted.  He  knew  his  own  position  in  Uganda  was 
untenable  with  the  forces  at  his  command,  and  that  it 
was  hopeless  to  ask  for  assistance  from  the  coast,  so  he 
resolved  to  visit  Selim  Bey  and  invite  his  help. 

At  the  end  of  the  Mohammedan  war  Lugard  there- 
fore left  Captain  Williams  in  charge  of  Uganda  and 
marched  westward  to  the  Albert  Nyanza.  He  went 
first  to  Toru,  a  district  at  the  eastern  foot  of  Ruwenzori, 
that  had  once  been  an  independent  Wahuma  kingdom. 
It  had  been  recently  conquered  by  its  northern  neigh- 
bours, the  Wanyoro,  who  continually  raided  the 
country  to  pillage  and  enslave.  Kasagama,  the  son 
of  the  last  king  of  Toru,  was  a  fugitive  in  Uganda, 
so  Lugard  took  him  back  and  replaced  him  on  his 
father's  throne. 

Kasagama  was  warmly  welcomed  by  his  people ; 
Lieutenant  de  Winton  was  left  to  build  a  series  of 
forts  and  to  protect  the  country  from  the  Wanyoro, 
and  Lugard  continued  westward  on  his  errand  to 
Selim. 

He  found  the  Soudanese  settlement,  and  he  explained 


i86  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

to  Selim  the  difficulties  in  Uganda  and  begged  him 
to  prevent  the  expulsion  of  the  British. 

Selim  told  Lugard  the  story  of  his  adventures  since 
he  had  been  sent  to  Wadelai  to  collect  the  last  of 
the  Soudanese  garrisons.  He  explained  that  he  had 
been  unable  to  rejoin  Stanley  in  the  ten  weeks 
allotted  him,  because  one  of  the  garrisons  he  had 
to  bring  back  was  a  month's  march  from  Wadelai. 
After  many  difficulties  he  reached  Kavalli's  a  few  days 
after  Stanley  had  left.  Fadl  Maula,  the  Soudanese 
officer  who  had  organized  the  mutiny  against  Emin, 
then  sent  a  force  to  attack  Kavalli's.  The  rebel 
Soudanese  took  Selim  prisoner,  looted  the  station, 
and  returned  north  to  Wadelai.  Selim  was  released 
and  left  with  90  men  and  300  women  and  children 
in  a  state  of  utter  destitution.  He  settled  at  Kavalli's, 
where  he  was  attacked  by  the  natives,  and  in  the 
fight  lost  half  his  men.  But  the  chief  Kavalli  inter- 
fered and  saved  his  force  from  annihilation. 

Meanwhile  Fadl  Maula,  who  was  now  in  command 
of  almost  the  whole  of  the  Soudanese,  played  false 
to  his  own  men.  He  entered  into  an  intrigue  to 
compel  his  force  to  submit  to  the  Mahdists.  His  men 
discovered  the  plot,  repelled  a  Mahdist  attack,  and 
then  marched  south  to  join  Selim.  They  left  Wadelai 
in  March,  1891,  and  reached  Kavalli's  forty  days 
later. 

By   this   reinforcement   Selim   had    under   his    com- 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   187 

mand  a  force  of  600  Soudanese  troops,  the  survivors 
of  over  3,000,  and  was  now  safe  from  attack  by  the 
natives.  He  planted  cotton  seeds,  made  rough  hand- 
looms,  wove  cloth  for  uniforms,  and  tried  to  re-establish 
among  his  men  the  discipline  and  organization  of 
civilized  troops. 

In  July,  1 89 1,  he  was  visited  by  Emin  Pasha,  who, 
now  in  the  service  of  the  German  Government,  came 
to  Kavalli's,  hoping  to  persuade  Selim  and  the  Souda- 
nese to  enlist  under  the  German  flag.  A  few  consented, 
but,  owing  to  Selim's  influence,  the  Soudanese,  as  a 
body,  remained  faithful  to  their  Egyptian  allegiance 
and  refused  to  enter  the  German  service.  Emin  went 
away  disappointed,  and  his  few  Soudanese  recruits 
deserted  at  the  first  opportunity. 

Lugard's  proposals,  however,  Selim  regarded  with 
favour.  He  had  been  one  of  Gordon's  officers,  and 
expressed  himself  devoted  to  the  British.  He  asked 
for  time  to  think  over  the  invitation,  and  terms  were 
discussed.  Lugard  suggested  that  some  other  Sou- 
danese should  take  part  in  the  conference,  but  Selim 
replied  "  that  he  alone  would  decide  for  his  people, 
and  what  he  resolved  on  they  would  do."  "  And  so," 
adds  Lugard,  "  it  eventually  turned  out." 

Selim's  main  hesitation  was  that  he  was  an  Egyp- 
tian soldier,  and  that  he  did  not  like  to  enlist  in  a 
foreign  service  without  authorization.  He  declared  that 
"  he  had   grown  grey  in   the   service  of  the  Khedive, 


i88  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

and  that  nothing  should  induce  him  to  swerve  in  his 
allegiance  to  the  flag  for  which  he  had  a  hundred  times 
risked  his  life." 

To  wait  for  permission  from  Egypt  would  have 
rendered  Selim's  assistance  useless.  So  the  enlistment 
took  place  on  the  understanding  that  the  Khedive's 
consent  was  to  be  obtained  at  the  earliest  possible 
opportunity,  and  that,  if  the  Khedive  withheld  it,  Selim 
and  his  men  should  be  immediately  released  from  their 
engagement.  Further,  it  was  decided  that,  until  the 
Khedive's  reply  came,  the  Soudanese  should  not  be 
sent  to  the  southern  Soudan,  or  beyond  the  northern 
and  north-western  frontiers  of  Unyoro.  Lugard  also 
agreed  that  all  orders  to  the  Soudanese  should  be 
given  through  Selim  Bey. 

The  alliance  was  popular  with  the  Soudanese,  who 
were  delighted  at  the  prospect  of  return  to  active  ser- 
vice. A  review  was  held,  and  the  troops  marched  in 
column  before  Lugard,  carrying  their  old  Egyptian  flags. 

"  It  was  impossible,"  says  Lugard,  "  not  to  feel  a 
thrill  of  admiration  for  these  deserted  soldiers,  as  they 
carried  past  flag  after  flag,  torn  and  riddled  in  many 
fierce  engagements  with  the  Mahdists." 

The  terms  of  enlistment  having  been  settled,  Lugard 
returned  to  Rubaga,  the  capital  of  Uganda,  with  a 
Soudanese  force  sufficient  to  quell  any  rebellion  that 
might  arise.  The  British  position  in  Uganda  seemed 
at  lencrth  secure. 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA    189 

However,  on  Christmas  Day,  1891,  a  mail  came  in 
from  the  coast  with  orders  that  Uganda  was  to  be 
evacuated,  and  the  Company's  forces  were  to  return 
at  once  to  the  coast.  "This  is  a  thunderbolt,"  said 
Lugard.  The  order  came  to  him  as  a  crushing  sur- 
prise. Since  his  departure  he  had  had  but  few  chances 
of  communication  with  the  coast,  and  he  was  not  aware 
that  the  British  East  Africa  Company  had  reached  a 
financial  crisis.  It  found  itself  unable  to  maintain  the 
expense  of  holding  Uganda ;  and  it  had  no  option  but 
to  withdraw.  Lugard  was  in  a  painful  dilemma.  Both 
he  and  Williams  had  given  their  personal  assurance  to 
their  Waganda  allies  that  England  would  not  abandon 
them,  and  they  felt  that  obedience  to  the  Company's 
order  would  be  an  act  of  personal  treachery.  On  the 
other  hand,  to  retain  the  Zanzibari  when  the  Company 
could  not  pay  their  wages  would  be  equally  bad  faith 
with  them.  Lugard  was  relieved  by  a  noble  offer  from 
Captain  Williams,  who  generously  undertook  to  pay 
personally  the  expenses  of  the  retention  of  Uganda, 
until  an  appeal  could  be  sent  to  the  coast. 

A  fortnight  later  (7th  January,  1892)  came  the  news 
that  Sir  William  Mackinnon  and  some  of  the  friends  of 
the  Church  Missionary  Society  had  subscribed  sufficient 
funds  to  pay  for  a  year's  administration  of  Uganda,  in 
the  hope  that  by  that  time  the  Company  would  be  able 
to  pay  its  way,  and  permanently  retain  the  country. 

But  the  news  that  the  Company  was  in  sore  straits, 


190  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

and  that  Lugard  had  been  actually  ordered  to  return, 
was  known  to  the  Catholics,  and  added  greatly  to 
Lugard 's  difficulties.  It  destroyed  the  Company's 
prestige,  and  shook  the  confidence  of  its  allies. 

During  Lugard's  absence,  moreover,  the  bitterness 
between  the  two  Christian  parties  had  been  intensified. 
Williams,  unaware  of  Lugard's  decision,  refused  to  en- 
force the  confiscation  of  the  property  of  those  Protes- 
tants who  had  turned  Catholic.  Captain  Williams  was 
a  straightforward,  outspoken  soldier,  with  a  typical 
Englishman's  distrust  of  plausible  excuses  for  deviation 
from  what  appears  the  honest  policy.  He  flatly  re- 
fused to  confiscate  any  man's  property  as  a  punishment 
for  change  of  creed.  For  this  he  was  bitterly  attacked 
by  the  Protestants,  who  threatened  a  war  in  conse- 
quence. One  of  the  Church  missionaries  (the  late  Rev. 
G.  L.  Pilkington)  declared  that  war  was  almost  inevit- 
able, and  threw  the  blame  on  Williams.  "  The  prob- 
ability of  war,"  he  wrote,  "  was  caused  by  a  proposal 
from  Captain  Williams  to  abolish  the  agreement  made 
between  the  two  parties,  and  to  permit  chiefs — all  of 
whom  now  hold  office  qua  Protestant  or  Roman 
Catholic,  appointed  by  one  or  other  party — who 
change  their  religion  to  retain  their  chieftainships. 
We  should,  of  course,  be  delighted  to  see  full  re- 
ligious liberty,  but  the  people  do  not  understand  it, 
and  the  Protestant  party  were  very  resolute  against 
accepting  the  proposal." 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   191 

The  English  missionaries  sent  Williams  a  strongly- 
worded  protest,  and  wrote  to  England  complaining 
that  he  was  ruling  "  Uganda  through  the  priests." 
They  said  that  he  had  shown  gross  partiality  to  the 
Catholics,  and  had  purposely  weakened  the  Protestants 
in  order  to  favour  the  Catholics.  The  best  answer  to 
this  charge  is  the  fact  that  the  Catholics  were  equally 
wrathful  with  Williams  for  favouring  the  Protestants. 
The  French  bishop  protested,  in  a  letter  written  on 
23rd  January,  that  during  Williams'  administration 
the  Catholics  could  "  no  longer  obtain  any  justice,  and 
the  thing  has  come  to  such  a  pass  that  they  do  not 
even  think  of  going  any  more  to  the  fort  at  Kampala 
with  their  grievances." 

Thus,  while  the  Catholics  declared  they  were  staying 
away  from  the  fort  owing  to  Williams'  gross  partiality 
to  the  Protestants,  one,  at  least,  of  the  English  mis- 
sionaries would  not  enter  the  fort  owing  to  Williams' 
gross  partiality  to  the  Catholics. 

Lugard  therefore  returned  to  Uganda  to  find  religious 
bitterness  worse  than  when  he  had  left  for  the  Albert 
Nyanza.  Feelings  on  both  sides  were  so  excited  that 
it  was  evident  that  the  slightest  untoward  accident  would 
precipitate  a  civil  war.  Lugard  did  his  best  to  prevent 
an  outbreak,  as  is  admitted  by  one  of  his  severest  critics. 
"  It  is  impossible,"  says  Ashe,  "  to  speak  too  highly  of 
Lugard's  earnest  desire  for  peace,  or  of  his  patience 


192  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

and  forbearance  under  the  most  trying  circumstances  ; 
and  I  feel  sure  that,  had  peace  been  possible,  no  man 
that  has  ever  entered  Uganda  was  more  fitted  to  secure 
it." 

But  all  efforts  for  peace  were  in  vain.  Both  sides 
were  arming,  and  Protestant  and  Catholic  natives 
began  gun-stealing  from  each  other  in  their  feverish 
preparations.  A  Catholic,  whose  gun  had  been  stolen 
by  a  Protestant,  appealed  for  its  return  from  the 
chief  whose  follower  had  stolen  it.  He  could  get 
no  redress,  and  resolved  to  take  compensation  by 
stealing  a  gun  from  the  other  side.  He  entered  into 
a  long  palaver  with  a  Protestant  about  the  sale  of 
some  beer,  and  while  the  bargaining  was  going  on, 
an  accomplice  snatched  the  Protestant's  gun  and  fled 
with  it  into  the  adjacent  compound  of  a  Catholic 
named  Mugoloba.  The  Protestant  gave  chase,  and 
tried  to  force  his  way  into  the  enclosure,  whereupon 
he  was  shot  dead  by  the  owner. 

The  different  accounts  vary  in  details,  but  they 
agree  in  the  essential  facts.  The  Protestants  demanded 
vengeance  on  Mugoloba ;  but  the  king  ruled  that, 
according  to  Uganda  law,  a  man  was  justified  in 
shooting  any  one  who  was  trying  forcibly  to  enter 
his  enclosure. 

The  law  on  the  subject  is,  perhaps,  doubtful.  Had 
the  Protestant  entered  the  enclosure  at  night,  Mugo- 
loba would  have  been  unquestionably  within  his  rights 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA   J  93 

in  shooting  the  trespasser.  As  the  incident  occurred 
during  dayh'ght,  the  Protestant  party  declared  their 
man  had  a  perfect  right  to  force  his  way  after  the 
thief  The  Church  Missionary  Society's  report  de- 
scribes the  affair  as  "the  cold-blooded  murder  of  a 
Protestant  chief."  There  was  not  much  cold  blood 
circulating  in  the  veins  of  the  Waganda  at  this  time. 

Lugard,  however,  thought  the  king's  decision  unfair, 
and  protested  against  it.  His  protest  was  ignored, 
and  he  was  himself  treated  with  insult  and  ridicule 
by  the  Catholic  chiefs  present  during  his  interview 
with  the  king. 

Lugard  saw  that  war  was  imminent.  He  appealed 
to  the  Catholic  bishop  for  help  in  averting  it ;  but  the 
reply  showed  Lugard  that  the  Catholics  would  do 
nothing  to  prevent  an  outbreak  of  hostilities.  They 
knew  their  party  was  strongest  amongst  the  natives, 
and  probably  thought  they  had  everything  to  gain  by 
a  fight.  To  be  ready  for  emergencies,  Lugard  at  once 
served  out  to  the  Protestants  forty  guns  and  some 
powder.  Next  day  the  war  drums  were  beaten,  and 
both  sides  were  drawn  up  in  line  of  battle,  waving 
flags  of  defiance. 

The  capital  of  Uganda  is  built  upon  four  hills.  The 
southern  hill  is  known  as  Mengo,  the  seat  of  the 
king's  palace,  and  the  ancient  capital  of  Uganda.  A 
little  to  the  north-west  of  Mengo  is  the  hill  of  Rubaga, 
which   is   the   headquarters   of    the    Catholic    Mission. 

O 


194  BRITISH   EAST    AFRICA 

The  Protestant  Mission  has  its  station  on  the  hill  of 
Namirembe,  which  is  due  north  of  Mengo.  The 
eastern  hill,  Kampala,  is  crowned  by  the  British  fort, 
and  was  the  headquarters  of  the  Company. 

The  Catholics  had  concentrated  on  Mengo,  in  front 
of  the  king's  palace,  while  the  Protestant  forces  were 
mainly  collected  on  the  hill  around  the  English  Mis- 
sion buildings  of  Namirembe,  and  opposite  the  French 
Mission  station  at  Rubaga.  The  fighting  is  said  by 
Lugard  to  have  begun  by  the  Catholics  suddenly 
opening  fire.  The  Protestants  at  once  attacked  Ru- 
baga, where  there  was  only  the  weak  left  wing  of 
the  Catholic  army  to  oppose  them.  The  Protestants 
easily  captured  the  hill,  and  set  fire  to  the  Catholic 
church  and  station.  The  Catholics,  in  turn,  advanced 
north  from  Mengo  towards  Kampala.  Lugard  con- 
cluded that  they  were  going  to  attack  the  fort,  and 
accordingly  opened  fire  with  the  Maxim  at  a  distance 
of  1,400  yards.  The  fire  was  effective.  The  Catholics 
fled,  after  about  a  dozen  had  been  wounded  and  half 
a  dozen  killed. 

After  a  little  more  fighting,  Williams  charged  with 
the  Soudanese,  and  the  Catholic  army  was  driven  from 
the  field.  The  Protestants  commenced  to  loot  and  burn, 
in  spite  of  the  strenuous  efforts  of  the  English  officers. 

The  king  fled  to  Bulingugwe,  a  small  island  seven 
miles  from  the  capital.  Lugard  was  anxious  to  get 
him  back  to  Mengo,  where  he  could  be  kept  under  con- 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA    195 

trol  and  out  of  mischief.  He  asked  Mwanga  to  return, 
and  allowed  the  Catholic  bishop  to  go  to  Bulingugwe 
on  the  promise  that  he  would  do  his  best  to  bring  the 
king  back.  But  the  bishop's  promise,  according  to 
Ashe,  was  "  a  diplomatic  ruse  to  obtain  his  own 
liberty";  for,  as  soon  as  the  bishop  reached  the  king, 
he  urged  him  not  to  return  to  Mengo.  Lugard  then 
sent  Stokes'  headman,  Mafitaa,  on  the  same  errand. 
He  reported  that  the  king  was  anxious  to  get  home 
again,  but  was  kept  a  prisoner  by  the  Catholics. 
Accordingly,  on  the  28th  January,  Lugard  sent  an 
ultimatum  demanding  Mwanga's  return.  He  could  not 
allow  so  large  a  force  to  remain  in  his  rear,  while  he 
might  at  any  time  be  attacked  by  the  Mohammedan 
party  from  the  north. 

On  the  very  next  day  (January  29th)  some  of  the 
king's  party  attacked  some  Protestant  canoes,  which 
were  taking  food  from  the  island  of  Komi  to  the  main- 
land. This  renewed  act  of  war,  combined  with  an 
insulting  message  from  the  king,  showed  Lugard  that 
strong  steps  must  be  taken.  On  the  following  day  he 
sent  Williams  with  a  Maxim  gun  and  a  hundred 
Soudanese,  under  Dualla,  to  attack  Bulingugwe.  The 
island  was  less  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  main- 
land, so  that  it  was  within  range  of  the  Maxim.  At 
two  in  the  afternoon  Dualla,  with  fifteen  canoes,  crossed 
the  strait  under  shelter  of  the  Maxim  fire.  The 
Catholics    were    panic-stricken.      The    king    and    the 


iq6  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

bishop  escaped  in  a  canoe,  and  the  people  tried  to 
follow  them.  The  canoes  were  overcrowded,  many  of 
them  sank,  and  in  the  flight  some  hundreds  of  the 
natives  were  drowned. 

Mwanga  and  the  Catholic  bishop,  who,  it  may  be 
remembered,  was  a  German,  fled  across  the  lake  to 
German  territory.  The  king  took  up  his  residence  at 
the  Catholic  station  of  Bukumbi,  where,  according  to 
Ashe,  he  was  "  watched,  as  a  mouse  is  watched  by  a  cat, 
by  his  Roman  Catholic  subjects,  who  were  now  really 
his  gaolers."  Mwanga  soon  tired  of  Catholicism  when 
it  meant  exile,  and  on  March  30th  he  escaped  from  the 
station  and  returned  to  Mengo,  where  he  was  respect- 
fully welcomed  by  Lugard  and  reinstated  as  king. 
But  he  now  fully  realized  that  his  absolute  power  was 
at  an  end,  and  that  in  future  he  must  reign  as  a  vassal 
of  the  British  East  Africa  Company.  He  accepted  a 
treaty  with  Lugard,  which  made  this  position  perfectly 
clear.  In  this  treaty  Lugard  stipulated  that  the 
missionaries  should  confine  themselves  to  missionary 
work,  and  one  clause  defined  their  proper  sphere  of 
work  as  "  preaching  the  Gospel,  and  teaching  the  arts 
and  industries  of  civilization."  But  this  ruling  was  not 
in  accordance  with  the  views  of  the  missionaries,  al- 
though non-interference  in  politics  is  one  of  the  accepted 
rules  of  the  Church  Missionary  Society.  The  President 
of  the  Protestant  Mission  at  once  repudiated  the  idea 
that  he  should  not  interfere  in  politics ;  he  maintained 


HOW  LUGARD  SAVED  UGANDA    197 

"that  the  Protestant  chiefs  were  now  the  rulers  of 
Uganda,  and  that  Lugard's  treaty  only  enabled  him  to 
rule  through  the  king  and  chiefs." 

The  Catholics  were  almost  as  hostile  as  their  rivals, 
for  they  were  angry  at  their  complete  overthrow.  And 
while  Ashe  accused  Lugard  of  being  "  entirely  under 
the  influence  of  the  fascinating  fathers,"  he  was  equally 
accused  by  them  of  gross  injustice.  Indeed,  both 
missionary  parties  for  a  while  lost  their  own  jealousies 
in  hatred  of  Lugard,  whom  they  denounced  as  a 
murderer  and  a  liar. 

"  Penal  servitude,  free  from  missionaries,  were  a  state 
of  comparative  bliss,"  exclaimed  Lugard  in  despair. 

This  feud  at  the  capital  between  the  Company  and 
the  missionaries  inspired  the  Mohammedans  with  the 
hope  that  they  might  recover  their  supremacy,  and 
they  prepared  to  attack  Mengo. 

Lugard  resolved  to  try  diplomacy,  and  sent  Selim 
Bey  to  treat  with  Mbogo,  the  Mohammedan  Sultan. 
Selim  did  his  work  so  well  that  Mbogo  was  persuaded 
to  give  up  his  claims  to  the  Uganda  throne,  and  to 
meet  Lugard  at  a  conference.  Mbogo  was  at  first 
afraid  to  enter  Uganda,  as  he  suspected  treachery  ;  but 
Selim  swore  on  the  Koran  that  he  would  be  responsible 
for  his  safety.  Mbogo  met  Lugard  at  a  conference,  and 
was  induced  to  settle  at  Kampala.  A  treaty  was  ar- 
ranged, which  assigned  to  the  Mohammedans  the  three 
provinces — Kitunzi,  Katambala,  and  Kasuju. 


198  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Meanwhile  the  Christians,  annoyed  at  this  peaceful 
settlement  with  the  Mohammedans,  were  again  medi- 
tating mischief;  for  the  Protestants  projected  an  alliance 
with  the  Catholics  for  a  treacherous  attack  on  the 
Company's  forces.  But  the  Soudanese  garrison  rendered 
Lugard's  position  impregnable,  and  the  last  scheme  for 
Lugard's  overthrow  came  to  nought. 

Lugard  had  now  firmly  established  the  Company's 
position  in  Uganda.  He  had  routed  the  Catholics, 
made  peace  with  the  Mohammedans,  and  enlisted  a 
garrison  of  Soudanese,  who  rendered  him  independent 
of  the  Protestants.  He  had  demonstrated  that  Uganda 
could  be  held,  and  had  maintained  British  supremacy 
throughout  a  greater  crisis  than  was  likely  to  recur. 
The  future  of  Uganda  was  now  financial,  and  the 
question  of  its  retention  must  be  fought  out  in  England. 
So  in  June,  1892,  Lugard  started  for  the  coast,  leaving 
Williams  in  charge  of  Uganda. 

In  Captain  Williams'  hands  the  British  supremacy 
was  absolutely  secure.  His  relations  to  the  Protestant 
missionaries  were,  however,  even  more  bitter  than  had 
been  those  of  Lugard.  Though  politically  opposed  to 
the  Catholics,  his  personal  relations  with  them  were 
more  cordial.  In  February,  1893,  he  attacked  the 
Wavuma  islanders  to  punish  some  acts  of  piracy. 
Otherwise  his  administration  was  peaceful,  and  he 
kept  the  country  in  order  till  the  end  of  the  period 
for  which  the  British  East  Africa  Company  had  agreed 
to  continue  the  occupation  of  Uganda. 


Chapter  XII 
UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE 

"  Fate  had  set  me  down  in  the  very  furthest  point  from  ali 
civiHzation,  as  a  captain  of  Bashi-bazouks,  a  raider  and  an  ivory 
thief." 

—  The  Commandant  of  Unyoro,  1895. 

THE  establishment  of  the  direct  Foreign  Office 
control  over  Uganda,  which  was  informally 
effected  by  Sir  Gerald  Portal  on  ist  April,  I 
1893,  was  the  result  of  a  vigorous  agitation  in  England  ' 
during  the  autumn  and  early  winter  of  1892.  The 
movement  for  the  Imperial  occupation  of  Uganda  was 
begun  by  the  English  missionary  party,  and  by  the 
friends  of  the  East  Africa  Company.  They  received 
the  powerful  support  of  Sir  H.  M.  Stanley.  But  the 
success  of  the  movement  was  in  the  main  due  to  the 
powerful  appeals  of  Captain  Lugard.  He  left  Uganda 
in  June,  1892,  and  landed  in  England  in  October.  He 
opened  the  campaign  by  a  paper  to  the  Geographical 
Society,  and  followed  this  pronouncement  by  an  ener- 
getic agitation  on  the  platform  and  in  the  press.  He 
urged  the  commercial  value  of  Uganda,  the  command- 


200  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

ing  strategic  position  of  the  country,  and  the  damage 
that  would  be  done  to  British  prestige  if  we  abandoned 
our  alh'es  and  converts  to  the  persecutions  of  their  foes. 
The  advocates  for  the  retention  of  Uganda  no  doubt 
had  the  sympathy  of  the  permanent  officials  of  the 
Foreign  Office,  and  the  support  of  the  Foreign  Secre- 
tary, Lord  Rosebery.  But  the  policy  was  strongly 
opposed  by  those  who  considered  British  East  Africa 
economically  worthless,  and  that  entanglement  in  ad- 
ventures there  would  tie  our  hands  in  the  struggle  for 
more  profitable  fields.  This  party  was  weak  numerically, 
but  it  was  strong  in  political  influence  ;  for  it  was  main- 
taining the  traditional  Liberal  principles  which  were 
still  held  by  some  of  the  strongest  members  of  the 
existing  Government,  including  Sir  William  Harcourt, 
then  the  Leader  of  the  House  of  Commons. 

As  the  popular  agitation  for  the  retention  of  Uganda 
increased  in  strength,  the  section  of  the  ministry  in 
favour  of  this  policy  became  more  resolute.  Neither 
side  would  give  way,  and  it  was  evident  that  some- 
thing must  be  done  to  prevent  a  split  in  the  Cabinet. 
So  to  postpone  discussion  of  the  question  until  after 
the  end  of  the  parliamentary  session  of  1893,  it  was 
resolved  to  send  Sir  Gerald  Portal,  the  British  Consul- 
General  at  Zanzibar,  to  Uganda — to  write  a  report. 

The  decision  was  formed  in  December,  1892.  It 
was  a  ten  weeks'  march  to  Uganda  ;  for  the  sake  of 
appearances,  the  commissioner  ought  to  devote  at  least 


3   ^ 

8 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     201 

two  months  to  his  investigations  in  the  country ;  ten 
weeks  would  be  occupied  in  the  return  journey  to 
Zanzibar,  and  another  three  on  the  journey  home. 
Hence,  by  this  simple  appointment  of  a  commissioner, 
whose  report  could  not  be  received  in  England  until 
the  end  of  August,  the  Government  removed  Uganda 
from  the  field  of  parliamentary  discussion  in  the  session 
of  1893. 

Sir  Gerald  Portal  thoroughly  understood  what  was 
expected  of  him.  He  remarked  before  he  started  that 
he  could  as  well  write  his  report  at  once  in  Zanzibar 
as  he  could  in  Uganda,  for  the  essential  facts  were 
all  known.  But  an  immediate  report  was  precisely 
what  was  not  wanted.  So  on  the  3rd  January,  1893, 
he  and  his  staff  left  Mombasa,  and  began  the  weary 
march  on  the  long  Uganda  Road.  The  monotony  of 
the  journey,  however,  was  varied  by  shooting  some 
rhinoceros  and  some  Kikuyu. 

The  instructions  sent  to  Portal  by  Lord  Rosebery 
were  extremely  vague.  Portal  was  "  to  frame  a  report 
as  expeditiously  as  may  be,  on  the  best  means  of  deal- 
ing with  the  country,  whether  through  Zanzibar  or 
otherwise."  Portal  clearly  shows  that  he  understood 
that  his  nominal  duty  was  to  report  regarding  "the 
retention  or  evacuation  of  Uganda." 

He  entered  Kampala  on  17th  March,  and  immedi- 
ately opened  negotiations  with  both  the  missionary 
parties  and  the  king. 


202  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Sir  Gerald  Portal  found  the  two  mission  parties  still 
bitterly  opposed.  He  reported  (8th  April)  though 
there  had  been  no  further  outbreak  of  hostilities  since 
the  previous  spring,  "  nevertheless  that  peace  could 
not  yet  be  looked  upon  as  being  permanent  or  as- 
sured. The  Catholics  were  arming  rapidly,  and  sparing 
no  sacrifice  in  their  effort  to  obtain  a  supply  of  arms 
and  ammunition,  and  that  they  were  in  a  dangerous 
state  of  discontent." 

Portal's  report  to  the  Government  threw  the  blame 
for  the  Uganda  disasters  on  the  unfortunate  mixture 
of  religious  and  political  parties.  "  The  miserable  history 
of  Uganda  for  the  last  two  years  is  sufficient  to  show 
how  inextricably  religion  and  politics  are  interwoven 
in  this  country,  and  I  fear  that  the  narrow,  fanatical 
nature  of  the  people  forbids  us  to  hope  for  any 
great  improvement  in  this  respect  for  several  years  to 
come." 

He  found  Uganda  divided  into  three  factions,  nomi- 
nally religious,  but  in  reality  political — the  Mohamme- 
dan, under  Mbogo,  and  the  two  Christian  parties,  of 
which  the  real  leaders  were  the  European  missionaries. 
"  That  the  missionaries,  on  both  sides,  are  the  veritable 
political  leaders  of  their  respective  factions,  there  can 
be  no  doubt  whatever."  Portal  considered  this  fact  as 
deplorable  as  it  was  indisputable.  He  admitted  that 
it  would  have  been  difficult  for  the  missionaries  to  have 
avoided  acquiring  the  political  leadership.     But  neither 


I 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     203 

party  wanted  to  avoid  acquiring  political  power,  so  it 
was  not  to  be  expected  that  they  should  have  exercised 
"  the  very  great  tact  and  judgment "  by  which,  accord- 
ing to  Portal,  they  could  have  kept  aloof  from  political 
strife.     Portal    bluntly    reported    "  that    the    race   for 
converts   now   being   carried   on   by  the   Catholic  and 
Protestant  missions  in  Uganda  is  synonymous  with  a 
race  for  political  power."     He  asserted  that  it  was  only 
the  presence  of  the  English  officers  and  the  Soudanese 
troops   at   the  fort   that  kept  peace  between   the  two 
Christian  factions  ;  and  he  predicted  that,  if  the  British 
administration  were  withdrawn,  "the  war  of  extermin- 
ation  will   be   at   once   renewed."      He   deplored   that 
"no   doctrine   of  toleration,  if  it  has  been  taught  on 
either  side,  appears  to  have  been  received  by  the  native 
Christians."     And  this   religious  intolerance,  according 
to  Portal,  has,  "  since  the  introduction  of  the  two  forms 
of  Christianity    into  Uganda,   cost  many   hundreds  of 
lives,  and  has  thrown  the  country  fifty  years  back  in 
its   advance   towards    prosperity.     It    is    deeply   to   be 
regretted  that  the  avowedly  great  influence  of  mission- 
aries in  Uganda  is  not  used   to  introduce  a  spirit  of 
tolerance   and   peace,  even  at  the   risk  of  loss   to  the 
party    of    some    political    power,    or    a    few    wealthy 
chieftainships." 
I       Portal  accordingly  concluded  that  British  occupation 
was  necessary  to  prevent  the  outbreak  of  a  civil  war 
of  extermination,  and  that  it  was  the  main  duty  of  the 


204  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

British  administrator  to  reconcile  the  two  parties,  or  at 
least  keep  the  peace  between  them,  by  holding  the 
balance  of  power.  With  difficulty  he  persuaded  the 
two  bishops  to  agree  to  a  division  of  Uganda  into 
Protestant  and  Catholic  provinces ;  this  arrangement 
was  only  rendered  possible  by  the  courageous  con- 
cessions and  moderation  of  Bishop  Tucker.  By  the 
treaty  the  Catholics  were  restored  to  several  important 
political  appointments,  and  were  given  the  province  of 
Kamia,  the  Island  of  Sesse,  the  district  of  Luwekula, 
and  the  plantations  of  Mwanika  through  Majama  to 
the  capital,  in  addition  to  the  province  of  Budu,  which 
had  belonged  to  them  in  accordance  with  Lugard's 
treaty. 

To  strengthen  the  administration.  Portal  enlisted  450 
Soudanese,  and  established  them  at  Ntebbi,  a  station  on 
the  shore  of  the  Nyanza  a  few  miles  from  the  capital. 

Portal's  third  measure  was  to  reverse  Lugard's  western 
policy  by  abandoning  the  chain  of  forts  built  to  protect 
Toru  from  the  raids  of  the  Wanyoro.  The  withdrawal 
of  these  garrisons  was  an  unfortunate  mistake  ;  and 
though  this  step  was  promptly  reversed  after  Portal's 
departure,  it  was  attended  with  disastrous  consequences. 

Portal  stayed  for  two  months  in  Uganda,  and  when 
he  left  for  home  the  outlook  was  more  peaceful  than  it 
had  been  for  some  time  before.  The  two  Christian 
parties  were  cowed  into  submission ;  the  Mohammedan 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE    205 

question  appeared  to  have  been  completely  settled  by 
Lugard's  arrangement;  the  capital  of  Uganda  was 
garrisoned  by  a  Soudanese  force  under  an  officer  with 
a  long  record  of  faithful  service.  Yet  in  less  than 
three  weeks  from  Portal's  departure,  on  the  30th  May, 
Uganda  was  again  enjoying  a  political  crisis,  and  the 
whole  of  the  Soudanese  garrison  was  being  disarmed 
on  a  charge  of  mutiny. 

When  Portal  started  on  his  return  journey,  he  left 
Captain  (now  Colonel  Sir)  J.  R,  L.  Macdonald  tem- 
porarily in  charge.  Macdonald  was  an  Indian  railway 
officer,  who  had  been  sent  to  East  Africa  in  1892  to 
survey  the  projected  railway  from  Mombasa  to  the 
Victoria  Nyanza.  He  was  returning  from  this  v/ork, 
when  he  was  ordered  back  to  Uganda  to  report  on 
the  charges  made  by  the  French  missionaries  against 
Lugard's  administration.  His  report  has  never  been 
published,  but  it  is  believed  to  have  been  hostile  to 
Lugard,  as  the  English  Government  agreed  to  pay 
the  exorbitant  demands  of  the  Catholics  for  their 
losses  in  the  war.  As  Macdonald  was  the  senior  officer 
in  Uganda  on  Portal's  departure,  he  was  left  as  acting 
commissioner,  with  instructions  to  interfere  as  little  as 
possible  in  internal  politics. 

Portal's  readjustment  of  the  provinces  of  the  Catholics 
and  Protestants  had  rendered  the  Mohammedans  dis- 
contented with  their  share.  They  sent  in  a  claim  for 
more    lands,   which   was    received    in    Kampala    after 


206  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

Portal's  departure.  The  Mohammedans  threatened  to 
refuse  to  pay  their  taxes,  until  their  asserted  wrongs 
were  righted.  Their  demands  were  refused,  and  trouble 
looked  inevitable.  On  i6th  June  Selim  Bey  sent  a 
message  to  the  administrator,  intended  to  prevent  an 
outbreak  of  hostilities.  The  message  was  verbal,  and 
there  are  grave  doubts  as  to  the  accuracy  of  its  trans- 
lation. Macdonald's  own  version  is  as  follows  :  "  The 
message  was  to  the  effect  that  he  [Selim]  heard  that 
there  was  a  probability  of  a  fight  between  the  king 
Mwanga  and  the  Uganda  Mohammedans  ;  that  he 
had  told  Mbogo  [the  Mohammedan  chief]  not  to  fight, 
but  warned  me  that  if  I  allowed  the  king  Mwanga 
to  fight  the  Mohammedans,  that  he,  Selim  Bey,  as  he 
and  Captain  Lugard  had  brought  the  Waganda  Mo- 
hammedans into  the  country,  would  consider  hostile 
action  on  the  part  of  Mwanga  against  the  Waganda 
Mohammedans  as  hostile  action  against  himself." 

For  a  native  officer  to  tell  his  political  superior  that 
he  would  treat  any  act  as  hostile  was  of  course  an 
irregular  proceeding.  But  we  must  remember  that 
the  Mohammedans  had  strongly  objected  to  re-enter- 
^^S  Uganda,  and  that  they  had  only  consented  to 
return  after  Selim  Bey  had  sworn  on  the  Koran  that 
no  harm  should  happen  to  them.  He  had  pledged  his 
personal  honour  to  the  Mohammedans,  and  it  was  not 
surprising,  therefore,  that  he  should  have  endeavoured 
to  secure  the  peaceable  redress  of  their  grievances. 


-^ 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     207 

Selim's  message,  whether  understood  correctly  or  not, 
created  great  excitement  in  Kampala.  Macdonald 
interpreted  it  as  a  threat  of  rebellion,  and  feared  that 
the  Soudanese  troops  would  mutiny.  He  arrested 
Mbogo  and  other  Mohammedan  leaders,  called  as  many 
as  possible  of  the  Europeans  into  the  fort,  and  disarmed 
the  Soudanese  troops.  Selim  was  then  arrested  at  Port 
Alice.  There  was  no  trouble  over  the  arrests.  Mbogo's 
Mohammedan  supporters  were  sent  away  peacefully  by 
their  leader ;  Selim  offered  no  resistance ;  and  the  troops 
at  Ntebbi  laid  down  their  arms,  saying,  according  to 
Ashe,  "  We  obey,  because  Selim,  our  leader,  has  asked 
us  to  do  so."  A  slight  skirmish  between  some  of  the 
Waganda  Mohammedans  and  some  Protestants  was 
the  only  fight  in  connection  with  this  deplorable 
episode. 

Selim  was  placed  on  his  trial  for  treason  and  mutinous 
conduct.  The  evidence  against  him  was  his  message  to 
Macdonald.  It  is  now  generally  admitted  that  the 
message  was  mistranslated,  as  Mr.  Reddie,  to  whom  it 
was  given,  had  then  a  limited  knowledge  of  Suahili. 
Selim  emphatically  repudiated  the  statements  attributed 
to  him.  Nevertheless,  though  the  charge  of  treason  was 
abandoned,  Selim  was  convicted  of  insubordination. 
He  was  degraded,  and  marched  away  in  irons  to  the 
coast.  Selim  was  slowly  dying  of  dropsy,  and  this 
treatment  no  doubt  hastened  his  death.  He  died  before 
reaching   Naivasha,   his    end   embittered    by   what   he 


2o8  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

regarded  as  an  ungrateful  return  for  his  years  of  faith- 
ful service. 

Whether  Selim  deserved  his  fate  depends  on  the 
question  whether  he  was  guilty  of  mutiny.  The  state- 
ment that  there  was  any  mutiny  at  all  is  dismissed  by 
Sir  Gerald  Portal  in  his  official  report  on  the  occurrence, 
for  he  says  that  "  Captain  Macdonald  appears  to  have 
taken  every  precaution  in  anticipation  of  the  complica- 
tions which  might  have  ensued  in  the  event  of  a  mutiny  of 
the  Soudanese'' 

The  evidence  of  the  missionaries,  who  have  been  uni- 
formly hostile  to  the  Soudanese,  is  less  explicit ;  but 
their  chief  spokesman,  Mr.  Ashe,  remarks  that  there  was 
"  nothing  secretly  treacherous  in  his  [Selim's]  action," 
and  whether  he  meant  to  resort  to  arms  against  the 
Government  "  it  is  a  little  difficult  to  decide." 

That  Selim  should  have  mutinied  is  in  itself  highly 
improbable.  Most  of  the  Europeans  who  had  come  in 
contact  with  him  describe  him  as  an  honest,  well- 
meaning,  but  indolent  man. 

Stanley  was  certainly  not  prejudiced  in  his  favour, 
for  he  was  irritated  with  his  slowness  and  what  he 
called  his  dense  stupidity.  Stanley's  graphic  sketch  of 
Selim  is  a  tribute  to  his  honesty. 

"  He  is  six  feet  high,  large  of  girth,  about  fifty  years 
old,  black  as  coal ;  I  am  rather  inclined  to  like  him. 
The  malignant  and  deadly  conspirator  is  always  lean. 
I  read  in  this  man's  face  indolence,  a  tendency  to  pet 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     209 

his  animalism.  He  is  a  man  to  be  led,  not  to  conspire. 
Feed  him  with  good  things  to  eat  and  plenty  to  drink, 
Selim  Bey  would  be  faithful.  Ah,  the  sleepy  eye  of 
the  full-stomached  man.  This  is  a  man  to  eat  and 
sleep  and  snore  and  play  the  sluggard  in  bed,  to 
dawdle  slip-shod  in  the  bed-chamber,  to  call  for  coffee 
fifty  times  a  day  and  native  beer  by  the  gallon,  to  sip 
and  sip  and  smile,  and  then  to  sleep  again,  and  so  and 
so  to  his  grave." 

Stanley's  officer,  Jephson,  who  had  even  better 
opportunities  of  knowing  Selim  intimately,  tells  us 
that  "he  was  enormously  fat  and  broad.  He  was  a 
great,  easy-going  fellow,  with  a  good-natured,  cherubic 
face,  and  had  a  little  shrew  of  a  wife  who  kept  him 
in  splendid  order." 

These  descriptions,  written  years  before  the  trouble 
in  Uganda,  do  not  represent  Selim  as  the  type  of  man 
who  would  start  a  mutiny  on  his  death-bed.  And  the 
testimonies  to  Selim's  fidelity  of  character  are  equally 
strong.  Jephson  reports  that,  when  the  rebellion  against 
Emin  broke  out  among  the  Soudanese,  Selim  did  his 
best  to  restrain  the  soldiers  and  save  Emin,  and  he 
warned  the  rebel  officers  to  do  nothing  violent.  Selim 
was  chosen  by  Emin  to  act  as  his  intermediary  with 
the  rebels  ;  he  smuggled  letters  to  Emin  and  Jephson 
when  they  were  prisoners,  telling  them  of  Stanley's  ar- 
rival on  the  Albert  Nyanza ;  and  he  finally  secured  their 
release. 

P 


210  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

Selim  also  held  a  good  record  for  valiant  service  in 
the  field.  By  his  bravery  at  Dufild  he  rallied  the  troops 
and  broke  the  Dervish  attack,  and  thus  saved  Emin, 
the  last  of  Gordon's  governors,  from  being  carried  cap- 
tive to  Khartoum. 

Lugard's  testimony  to  Selim's  loyalty  in  Uganda  is 
emphatic.  Lugard  found  him  absolutely  loyal  and  de- 
voted in  his  allegiance  to  the  Khedive  and  to  the 
English.  After  Lugard  got  to  know  him,  he  trusted 
him  implicitly,  and  was  rewarded  by  assistance  which 
Lugard  describes  as  invaluable.  We  can  therefore 
understand  Lugard's  burning  indignation  that  the  man 
who  did  most  to  hold  the  Equatorial  Provinces  against 
the  Mahdists,  and  in  truth  saved  the  English  from 
being  driven  from  Uganda — that  such  a  man  should 
have  been  done  to  death  in  chains  and  disgrace,  for  a 
share  in  what  Portal  apparently  regarded  as  a  phantom 
mutiny. 

"  Recent  telegrams,"  says  Lugard,  "  bring  the  news 
that  Selim  Bey  has  been  convicted  by  Captain  Mac- 
donald  of  treachery,  and  of  an  intrigue  with  the  Mo- 
hammedan Waganda,  having  for  its  object  the  over- 
throw of  the  British.  Judging  by  the  accounts  which 
have  reached  England,  Selim's  open  defiance,  when  he 
thought  the  Mohammedans  unjustly  treated,  can  hardly 
be  called  '  treachery.'  He  was  at  the  time  dying  of 
dropsy,  but  was  ordered  to  march  to  the  coast,  and,  of 
course,  died.     The  story  I  have  told   will   show  that,  at 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     211 

the  risk  of  his  own  life,  Selim  remained  loyal  to  me  ; 
that  it  was  mainly  owing  to  him  that  the  settlement 
with  the  Mohammedans  was  effected — at  a  time  when, 
had  he  desired  to  act  treacherously,  the  opportunity  was 
before  him.  The  Soudanese  in  Toru  were  close  by,  and 
would  have  followed  him  blindly  ;  the  whole  Moham- 
medan Waganda  faction  would  have  eagerly  accepted 
the  chance.  He  remained  absolutely  loyal  ;  and  I 
knew  the  man  with  whom  I  was  dealing  well  enough  to 
know  that  it  would  be  so.  There  must  have  been  a 
strange  want  of  tact  to  convert  a  loyalty  so  sincere  into 
hostility,  when  Selim  was  even  then  a  dying  man.  ,  .  . 
To  me  it  is  a  sad  contemplation  that  this  veteran 
selected  by  Gordon  for  the  command  of  Mruli,  whose 
valour  saved  Dufile,  against  whom  no  charge  of  dis- 
loyalty had  ever  yet  been  proved  amidst  all  the  faith- 
lessness of  the  Soudan  troops,  and  who  had  proved  at 
the  risk  of  his  life  his  loyalty  to  me — that  this  man 
should  have  been  hurried  off  in  a  dying  state,  discredited 
and  disgraced,  to  succumb  on  the  march,  a  prisoner  and 
an  outcast." 

The  death  of  Selim  Bey  is  one  of  the  most  pathetic 
episodes  in  the  history  of  the  Foreign  Office  rule  in 
Uganda,  and  its  subsequent  effects  were  deplorable. 
The  Soudanese,  however,  remained  loyal,  and  they  were 
soon  re-armed  and  used  in  furtherance  of  the  active 
policy  that  was  adopted  in  Uganda. 

The   principles  of  the  policy   on    which    Sir  Gerald 


212  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Portal  had  decided  were  reserve  and  experiment.  It 
was  a  mark-time  policy  to  discover  the  minimum  cost 
at  which  Uganda  could  be  held.  Sufficient  Soudanese 
were  to  be  enlisted  to  defend  Kampala  and  enable  the 
Commissioner  to  hold  the  balance  of  power  between 
the  three  Waganda  parties.  The  outlying  forts,  which 
Lugard  had  built  to  protect  Toru  from  the  Wanyoro, 
were  abandoned  ;  the  British  Acting  Commissioner  was 
ordered  not  to  interfere  in  the  internal  administration 
of  Uganda,  except  to  prevent  gross  injustice  or  cruelty 
or  the  renewal  of  internal  war,  and  he  was  to  under- 
take no  act  of  aggression  against  the  neighbouring 
states. 

But  Sir  Gerald  Portal's  system  was  almost  im- 
mediately abandoned  by  his  successors.  In  November, 
1893,  Macdonald  was  superseded  by  the  arrival  of 
Colonel  (now  General  Sir  Henry)  Colvile.  Colvile 
found  that  a  campaign  had  already  been  prepared 
against  the  people  of  Unyoro,  who  had  raided  into 
Toru  as  soon  as  Lugard's  chain  of  forts  had  been 
removed  by  Sir  Gerald  Portal.  The  reason  for  the 
recall  of  the  garrison  was  because  they  were  not  under 
European  supervision,  and  were  ill-treating  the  popula- 
tion they  were  supposed  to  protect.  That  the  Soudanese 
were  not  treating  their  neighbours  as  they  would  them- 
selves have  liked  to  be  treated  is  most  probable.  The 
only  question  is  which  particular  section  of  the  native 
population  was  their  victim.     According  to  Ashe  the 


i 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     213 

Soudanese  were  raiding  the  natives  of  Southern  Unyoro 
by  order  of  Kasagama,  the  king  of  Toru.  If  Ashe  be 
correct,  then  the  king  of  Unyoro  can  hardly  be  blamed 
for  punishing  Kasagama  as  soon  as  the  Soudanese 
garrisons  were  recalled  to  Uganda. 

The  justice  of  the  war  against  Unyoro  is  therefore 
open  to  doubt.  But  Macdonald  had  decided  on  the 
war  and  already  prepared  for  it.  As  Colvile  naturally 
did  not  care  to  upset  his  predecessor's  arrangements  the 
campaign  was  begun.  A  combined  Soudanese  and 
Waganda  army  marched  from  Kampala  ten  days  after 
Colvile's  arrival.  The  affair,  according  to  Thruston, 
was  not  worthy  of  being  called  a  war  ;  he  describes  it  in 
a  chapter  of  his  book  headed  "  Chasse  aux  Negres," 
explaining  that  he  accepted  the  truth  of  the  epigram  of 
a  French  traveller,  "  On  ne  fait  pas  la  guerre  en  Afrique ; 
ce  qui  s'y  fait,  c'est  la  chasse  aux  Negres." 

The  army,  which  consisted  of  some  15,000  to  20,000 
men,  started  from  Unyoro  on  4th  December,  1893. 
Colvile  took  Mwanga  with  him,  partly  to  give  him  a 
pleasant  holiday,  and  partly  to  keep  him  out  of  mischief 
while  the  Commissioner  was  away.  Resistance  on  the 
part  of  the  Wanyoro  was  useless.  Their  capital  was 
taken  and  burnt,  many  of  the  peasantry  were  shot,  but 
there  was  no  decisive  or  exciting  engagement.  Col- 
vile formed  a  low  opinion  of  the  military  qualities  of  his 
Waganda  allies,  though,  according  to  Thruston,  their 
tactics  were  extremely  skilful   whenever   they   left   the 


214  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

main  expedition  and  began  cattle-lifting  on  their  own 
account 

After  a  fruitless  chase  of  the  king,  the  expedition 
returned  to  Uganda  in  February,  1894,  Colvile  leaving 
Major  Thruston,  Dr.  Moffat  and  Mr.  Forster,  with  a 
garrison  of  660  men,  to  administer  Unyoro.  The  three 
men  did  their  work  as  well  as  such  work  could  be 
done.  To  raid  into  a  country,  to  seize  all  the  ivory  and 
cattle  that  can  be  found,  and  then  to  retreat  with  the 
loot,  is  the  traditional  African  system  of  warfare.  Col- 
vile's  raid  on  Unyoro  therefore  appeared  to  the  Wan- 
yoro  as  part  of  the  established  order  of  the  universe. 
But  that  a  few  men  should  be  left  to  hold  the  country 
permanently  was  not  part  of  the  ordinary  game. 

The  necessity  for  the  occupation  of  Unyoro  was  due 
to  the  fact  that  the  only  way  in  which  Colvile  could 
pay  his  Waganda  allies  was  by  giving  them  some  of  the 
best  estates  in  Unyoro.  He  accordingly  presented  a 
large  tract  of  country  south  of  Mruli  to  the  Protestants, 
and  assigned  the  Catholics  a  smaller,  but  still  extensive, 
district  known  as  Kikakure,  west  of  the  province  of 
Singo. 

The  Waganda  settled  in  the  regions  allotted  to  them  ; 
they  killed  the  men,  and  seized  all  the  women  they 
could  find.  Those  who  could  escape  fled  to  the  Wakedi 
country,  whence  they  waged  a  guerilla  warfare  against 
their  Waganda  supplanters.  The  British  garrison  was 
established  at  the  fort  of  Hoima,  which  was  frequently 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     215 

beleaguered  by  the  natives.  The  monthly  caravans  from 
Uganda  had  to  fight  their  way  through  the  enemy. 
ff-  Stray  parties  of  Soudanese  and  British  friendlies  were 
cut  off  and  slain,  and  in  retaliation  the  villages  and 
plantations  near  the  scene  of  action  were  destroyed. 

When  Colvile  entered  Unyoro  it  was  one  of  the 
richest  food  countries  in  Eastern  Equatorial  Africa,  it 
had  a  considerable  population,  and  it  was  a  very  impor- 
tant trade  centre.  Colvile  himself  tells  us  that  "  from 
the  capital  to  Kibba  the  country  had  been  one  mass  of 
I  banana  groves,  sweet  potato  and  bean  fields."  The 
\  prolonged  guerilla  warfare,  that  began  in  1894,  devas- 
;  tated  the  most  fertile  districts  of  Unyoro ;  crops  were 
cut  down  before  the  grain  had  formed,  plantations  went 
out  of  cultivation,  the  native  trade  routes  were  closed. 
Famine  was  therefore  inevitable,  and  after  a  spell  of 
famine  pestilence  swept  through  the  country.  It  has 
been  estimated  that  in  the  four  years  following  the 
establishment  of  British  rule  the  population  was  re- 
duced to  a  fourth. 

But  all  this  time,  it  must  be  remembered,  England 
had  not  annexed  Unyoro,  so  that  the  military  occupa- 
tion was  somewhat  irregular. 

Lord  Kimberley,  as  Secretary  for  Foreign  Affairs, 
once  assured  the  House  of  Lords  that  Unyoro  had  not 
been  annexed,  and  that  the  natives  were  not  under 
British  protection.  This  declaration  was  read  at  the 
mess  table  at  Hoima,  the  headquarters  in  Unyoro,  and 


2 lb  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

called  forth  the  remark  that  it  was  not  easy  to  under- 
stand the  first  part  of  the  statement,  but  that  the  natives 
were  not  under  British  protection  was  quite  correct,  for 
"  we  shoot  them  all  at  sight." 

There  can  be  little  doubt  that  the  policy  being  carried 
out  in  Central  Africa  was  not  approved  by  the  Home 
Government.  It  wanted  the  country  ruled  cheaply,  and 
these  wars  were  very  costly,  and  the  Liberal  party  had 
always  been  hostile  to  wars  of  aggression  and  unnecessary 
extensions  of  our  frontiers.  But  no  efficient  check  was 
possible,  owing  to  the  slowness  of  communications 
with  Uganda.  The  Government  mildly  rebuked  Col- 
vile's  forward  policy  ;  but  the  message  did  not 
arrive  until  Colvile  had  left  for  England  in  December 
1894. 

The  new  Commissioner  in  Uganda  was  Mr.  Berkeley, 
who  arrived  in  May,  1895.  There  had  been  a  change  of 
Government  in  England,  and  apparently  Mr.  Berkeley 
was  authorised  to  alter  the  policy  previously  recom- 
mended from  home.  Formal  protectorates  were  estab- 
lished over  Unyoro  and  Usoga,  and  then  over  Nandi 
and  Kavirondo. 

The  condition  of  Unyoro  had  been  steadily  getting 
worse,  and  by  the  end  of  1895  Southern  Unyoro  was 
in  such  a  deplorable  state  that  Major  (then  Captain) 
Pulteney  was  sent  there  to  effect  a  settlement.  Pulteney 
was  given  wide  powers,  and  he  used  them  well.  He 
made   a    leading    chief,    named    Rabadongo,    chief  of 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     217 

Southern  Unyoro,  and  appointed  as  his  assistants  two 
other  chiefs,  Makenda  and  Kikakure.  By  the  aid  of 
these  three  Wanyoro,  Pulteney  soon  restored  order. 
The  natives,  trusting  to  a  guarantee  that  they  should  not 
be  disturbed  so  long  as  they  kept  quiet,  began  to  reculti- 
vate  their  deserted  shambas.  They  also  cut  roads,  and 
helped  the  administration  in  various  ways.  The  Catholic 
Waganda,  however,  objected  very  strongly  to  this  rein- 
statement of  the  Wanyoro  in  the  district  that  Colvile 
had  given  them.  They  worried  Mr.  Berkeley  until  he 
decided  that  Pulteney's  statesmanlike  settlement  must 
be  rescinded.  Pulteney  regarded  this  decision  as  a 
breach  of  faith  with  the  Wanyoro,  and,  rather  than  be 
concerned  in  such  an  act,  resigned  his  position  as  Civil 
Officer  of  Southern  Unyoro.  He  was  succeeded  by 
Forster,  who  was  ordered  to  carry  out  the  new  policy, 
which  he  was  assured  was  not  intended  to  inflict  the 
slightest  practical  injustice  on  individuals.  The  people 
were  to  be  persuaded  to  recognise  the  supremacy  of  the 
Catholic  Waganda,  but  their  property  and  persons  were 
to  be  unmolested  so  long  as  they  kept  quiet.  Rabadongo 
was  removed  to  Northern  Unyoro,  and  his  two  assistants 
were  superseded.  The  natives,  however,  trusting  to 
promises  of  protection  and  safety,  stayed  in  their 
villages,  and  the  province  remained  in  peace.  But  then 
came  another  change  at  Kampala.  Mr.  Berkeley  re- 
turned to  England,  and  the  new  Acting  Commissioner 
resolved  to  allow  the  Catholic  Waganda  the  full  rights 


2i8  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

they  had  been  granted  by  Colvile.  He  gave  them  the 
necessary  authorization,  and  they  called  on  the  Resident 
in  Unyoro  to  instal  them  in  possession  of  some  of  the 
land  and  villages  in  his  district,  and  compel  the  native 
Wanyoro  to  remain  as  labourers.  This  was  in  defiance 
of  the  pledges  given  the  Wanyoro  by  Forster,  and  he 
resigned  his  post,  rather  than  be  the  instrument  for  the 
enslavement  of  the  Wanyoro  by  their  hereditary  foes. 
Forster  was  transferred  to  another  district,  and  the 
province  he  had  kept  in  peace  broke  out  into  revolt. 
The  British  fort  and  the  French  Mission  were  both 
stormed  and  destroyed,  and  the  Waganda  chiefs 
promptly  chased  back  to  their  own  country. 

Though  Unyoro  was  thus  in  chaos,  in  Uganda  itself 
the  officials  were  satisfied  with  the  general  outlook,  and 
trusted  for  great  progress  from  the  improved  methods  of 
transport  to  the  coast.  A  bullock  road  from  Mombasa 
to  the  Nyanza  had  been  completed,  and  a  steamer  was 
to  be  at  once  sent  up  for  service  on  the  lake.  The 
efforts  of  the  Government  to  place  an  effective  steamer 
on  the  Victoria  Nyanza  have  been  singularly  unlucky. 
In  January,  1895,  ^  sectional  steamer  of  62  tons  was 
purchased  and  sent  inland  by  caravans,  numbering 
altogether  some  5,000  men.  One  of  the  caravans,  com- 
posed of  1,200  men,  was  massacred  in  the  Rift  Valley  by 
Masai.  Many  sections  of  the  steamer  were  lost  or 
abandoned  on  the  road,  where  they  were  ruined  by  rust. 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     219 

Bishop  Tucker  met  one  of  the  caravans  in  August,  1895, 
and  found  it  so  reduced  by  death  and  disease  that  he 
sadly  confessed  "  the  prospect  of  the  steamer  being  at 
work  on  the  lake  within  five  years  is  very  remote."  A 
new  and  slightly  larger  steamer  was  bought  in  1896,  and 
Captain  Sclater,  the  builder  of  the  road  to  Uganda,  was 
preparing  to  carry  it  to  the  lake  in  light  steel  waggons, 
made  for  the  purpose  at  Woolwich  Arsenal.  But  this 
promising  young  officer  died  at  Zanzibar,  a  victim  to  the 
treacherous  East  African  climate,  and  the  attempts  to 
carry  the  steamer  to  the  lake  were  for  a  time  abandoned. 

Mr.  Berkeley  left  Uganda  in  December,  1896,  for  a 
visit  to  England,  and  Captain  (now  Major)  Ternan  was 
made  Acting  Commissioner. 

At  this  time  Mwanga  was  feeling  especially  aggrieved 
with  the  British.  Some  boys  whom  he  ill-treated  had 
been  taken  from  him  ;  he  had  been  recently  reminded 
that  he  was  now  only  a  vassal,  and  could  be  easily  re- 
placed ;  and  in  November,  1896,  he  was  much  annoyed 
by  being  compelled  to  pay  duty  on  a  transaction  in 
ivory,  and  at  being  roughly  taken  to  task  for  an  attempt 
to  evade  payment. 

The  king  was  therefore  secretly  hostile  to  the  British  ; 
and  many  of  his  subjects  and  subject  chiefs  had  their 
own  private  grievances.  The  Soudanese  were  very  un- 
popular with  the  people,  as  foreign  mercenaries  in  a 
conquered  state  generally  are.  Some  of  the  chiefs  had 
just  cause  for  complaint  at  acts  of  oppression  by  the 


220  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

officers  resident  in  their  districts.  Thus  Kasagama, 
whom  Lugard  had  reinstated  as  King  of  Toru,  was  so 
ill-treated  by  the  Resident  in  his  state,  that  he  com- 
plained to  Kampala  ;  and,  as  his  appeal  was  supported 
by  Bishop  Tucker,  an  official  inquiry  was  held,  and  judg- 
ment given  for  Kasagama.  But  other  chiefs,  who  had 
less  influential  supporters,  had  to  nurse  their  grievances 
in  secret. 

The  country  was,  therefore,  simmering  with  discon- 
tent, but  the  leading  officials  were  unconscious  of  the 
unpopularity  of  British  rule.  On  the  Commissioner's 
departure  he  reported  that  all  was  well,  and  one  of  the 
Vice-Consuls  wrote  that  "  everything  is  quiet  in  Uganda 
and  Unyoro  ;  the  people  are  settling  down,  and  there  is 
not  the  least  likelihood  of  any  trouble  with  them." 
The  missionaries,  however,  who  were  now  engaging  with 
most  encouraging  success  in  their  proper  religious  and 
educational  work,  saw  more  truly.  Archdeacon  Walker, 
one  of  the  ablest  of  the  British  missionaries,  wrote  in 
July  "  that  the  number  of  natives  who  hate  the  missions 
and  all  Europeans  is  very  large.  They  are  only 
restrained  from  showing  open  hostility  because  the 
Government  is  too  strong  for  them." 

The  Catholics  also  saw  that  trouble  was  brewing,  and 
patriotically  thrice  warned  the  Government.  But  the 
warnings  were  despised,  and  Major  Ternan  led  the 
whole  of  the  efficient  Soudanese  troops  on  an  expedition 
against  Kamasia,  a   country    some    300  miles   east  of 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     221 

Uganda.  The  force  devastated  Kamasia  and  also  the 
adjacent  country  of  Nandi.  The  country  of  Ketosh  was 
also  to  have  been  invaded,  but  the  tribe  M^as  saved  by 
the  protests  of  Mr.  Grant,  who  said  that  it  was  in  his 
district,  and  that  as  the  people  were  innocent  of  offence 
they  must  not  be  attacked. 

The  absence  of  the  efficient  part  of  the  Soudanese 
garrison  on  this  seemingly  unnecessary  expedition  gave 
Mwanga  his  chance.  He  fled  from  the  capital  on  5th 
July,  1897,  and  his  departure  was  the  signal  for  a  wide- 
spread revolt  in  Western  Uganda.  Ternan  was  recalled, 
and  returned  by  forced  marches  to  the  capital,  and 
thence  westward  to  Budu  to  quell  the  revolt. 

Ternan  drove  the  enemy  from  the  field.  Mwanga 
escaped,  and  it  looked  as  if  the  danger  were  past. 
Ternan  returned  to  Kampala,  where  he  received  orders 
to  send  300  Soudanese  to  the  Rift  Valley  as  escort 
of  an  expedition  under  Major  Macdonald  to  "the 
sources  of  the  Juba  river." 

A  new  danger  was  threatening  the  Uganda  Pro- 
tectorate. The  French  had  for  some  years  been 
endeavouring  to  avenge  their  diplomatic  defeats  in 
Egypt  by  securing  political  predominance  in  Abyssinia, 
and  the  annexation  of  the  Bahr-el-Ghazl  to  the  French 
Congo.  It  is  unnecessary  to  enter  into  the  full  de- 
tails of  the  policy,  but  the  main  principle  may  be 
briefly  stated. 


222  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

By  various  proclamations  Egypt,  after  the  fall  of 
Khartum  in  1885,  had  announced  her  abandonment 
of  her  Equatorial  Provinces.  King  John  of  Abyssinia 
was  persuaded  to  try  to  help  the  escape  of  the  gar- 
risons, and  the  Emin  Pasha  Relief  Expedition  was 
only  the  last  of  a  series  of  efforts  made  to  remove 
the  surviving  Egyptian  troops.  Egypt  therefore  had 
officially  announced  her  withdrawal  from  the  Soudan. 
The  British  Government  had  acquiesced  in  this  decision, 
not  only  by  official  approval  in  1885  and  1886,  but 
by  subsequently  treating  the  Soudanese  provinces  as 
derelict,  and  annexing  part  of  them  to  the  Uganda 
Protectorate. 

Moreover,  by  the  Lisbon  Despatch  of  August,  1887, 
England  had  laid  down  the  principle  that  there  was 
no  right  of  sovereignty  in  Africa  unless  supported  by 
effective  occupation. 

"  It  has  now,"  says  this  despatch,  "  been  admitted 
in  principle  by  all  the  parties  to  the  Act  of  Berlin 
that  a  claim  of  sovereignty  in  Africa  can  only  be 
maintained  by  real  occupation  of  the  territory  claimed." 
England  accordingly,  in  1887,  sent  to  Portugal  "a 
formal  protest  against  any  claims  not  founded  on  oc- 
cupation." 

The  French  argument  was  that  as  Egypt  was  not 
in  occupation,  effective  or  otherwise,  of  the  Bahr-el- 
Ghazl,  she  would  have  had  no  rights  of  ownership 
there   even    had    she    not   expressly    renounced    them. 


il 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     223 

Moreover,  England  had  annexed  part  of  the  Soudanese 
provinces  as  the  hinterland  of  Uganda,  and  had 
leased  another  part  of  them  to  the  Congo  Free  State 
(without  any  reference  in  the  least  to  the  rights  of 
the  Khedive).  Therefore  France  maintained  that  she 
had  the  equal  right  to  annex  the  Bahr-el-Ghazl  as  the 
hinterland  of  the  French  Congo  if  she  could  establish 
that  effective  occupation  which,  according  to  the  British 
principle,  alone  gives  rights  of  sovereignty. 

Accordingly,  M.  Liotard,  the  head  of  the  French 
State  on  the  Upper  Congo,  established  stations  in 
the  former  Equatorial  Provinces  of  Egypt  on  the  upper 
tributaries  of  the  Bahr-el-Ghazl.  On  this  action  being 
unofficially  reported  England  declared  that  she  would 
consider  any  such  action  as  unfriendly  ;  but  the  French 
declined  to  be  bluffed  by  this  pronouncement,  and 
the  Chamber  of  Deputies  publicly  voted  money  for 
their  expeditions  in  the  Bahr-el-Ghazl.  The  French 
advanced  slowly  and  steadily,  and  a  force  under  Major 
Marchand  descended  the  Bahr-el-Ghazl  and  established 
itself  at  Fashoda  on  the  Nile.  It  waited  there  for 
the  arrival  of  an  Abyssinian  army  which,  under  French 
officers,  was  advancing  eastward  to  occupy  the  country 
between  Abyssinia  and  the  Nile. 

There  was  no  particular  secrecy  about  these  ex- 
peditions, but  the  reports  as  to  their  progress  were 
discredited  in  England.  At  length  it  could  no  longer 
be    doubted    that   the    French    and    Abyssinians    were 


224  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

doing  their  best  to  establish  a  French  belt  across 
Africa,  cutting  off  any  connection  between  British 
East  Africa  and  Egypt.  Then  the  Foreign  Office 
took  action. 

An  expedition  was  organized  to  advance  from  the 
Uganda  Road  into  the  territory  between  Abyssinia 
and  Fashoda,  which  was  admittedly  the  important 
strategic  district.  The  Anglo-Italian  frontier,  to  the 
east  of  Lake  Rudolf,  in  the  upper  basin  of  the  Juba 
River,  had  not  been  deliminated  ;  accordingly,  it  was 
announced  that  the  expedition  was  to  explore  "  the 
sources  of  the  Juba  River,"  a  phrase  which  roused  the 
ire  of  Mr.  Labouchere.  The  statement  was,  however, 
technically  true.  There  is  a  small  river  known  as 
the  Juba  to  the  north-west  of  Lake  Rudolf,  and  part 
of  the  work  of  the  new  expedition  was  to  explore 
the  upper  part  of  this  less-known  Juba. 

The  official  statement  was,  however,  undeniably  mis- 
leading, as  it  was  naturally  thought  to  refer  to  the 
great  Juba  River  that  enters  the  Indian  Ocean  at 
Kismayu.  The  real  destination  was  soon  divulged 
by  a  political  indiscretion.  The  instructions  and  de- 
spatches regarding  the  expedition  were  carefully  edited 
before  publication  to  prevent  the  secret  being  be- 
trayed. But  a  Blue-Book  published  part  of  the 
despatch  which  ordered  the  Acting  Commissioner  in 
Uganda  to  provide  a  Soudanese  escort  for  the  ex- 
pedition.    A  sentence  was  unfortunately  left  in  which 


UGANDA  UNDER  THE  FOREIGN  OFFICE     225 

directed  that  this  escort  was  to  contain  as  many 
members  as  possible  of  the  tribes  of  the  Dinka  and 
Shilluk,  that  is  of  the  tribes  around  Fashoda  and 
the  Lower  Sobat. 

After  that  announcement  there  could  be  no  doubt 
that  the  aim  of  the  "  Juba "  expedition  was  to  reach 
Fashoda  and  the  Nile  before  the  French  expeditions 
could  arrive,  under  Marchand  from  the  west  and  Clo- 
chette  from  the  east. 

The  expedition  was  the  most  powerful  that  had 
ever  been  organized  in  British  East  Africa.  It  had 
a  staff  of  ten  European  officers,  an  escort  of  fifty 
Sikhs  and  three  hundred  Soudanese,  and  it  carried 
seven  Maxims.  Its  leader  was  Colonel  J.  R.  L. 
Macdonald. 

The  expedition  left  the  coast  in  detachments  during 
the  middle  of  1897.  The  caravan  was  to  be  organized 
and  the  real  start  made  from  a  camp  to  the  south 
of  Lake  Baringo.  Its  escort  was  ordered  to  join  at 
the  Eldoma  Ravine,  where  the  road  from  Uganda 
descends  into  the  Rift  Valley. 

The  call  for  a  Soudanese  escort  reached  Uganda 
at  an  unlucky  time.  The  three  efficient  companies  of 
Soudanese  had  been  overworked  by  the  expeditions 
to  Kamasia  and  Budu,  and  on  their  return  from  the 
latter  they  were  ordered  to  start  at  once  on  a  pro- 
longed journey  in  the  country  to  the  north  of  Uganda. 

The   three   companies    selected    were   taken   to    the 

Q 


226  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

ravine  station  by  their  commandant,  Major  Ternan, 
who  was  proceeding  to  tlie  coast  on  his  way  home. 
They  were  transferred  to  Macdonald,  who  began  his 
march  to  the  north  on  21st  September.  Two  days 
later  they  deserted  in  a  body  and  returned  to  the 
Eldoma  Ravine  station  to  complain  to  Mr.  Jackson, 
the  Acting  Commissioner,  of  the  treatment  they  had 
received  from  their  new  commander. 

So  far  the  act  was  a  matter  of  insubordination  and 
not  of  mutiny.  The  Soudanese  apparently  had  no 
intentions  of  mischief,  as  they  allowed  the  late  Captain 
Kirkpatrick,  one  of  Macdonald's  staff,  to  ride  through 
them  on  his  way  to  warn  the  late  Lieutenant  Fielding, 
who  was  in  command  of  the  station  at  the  Ravine. 

When  the  first  of  the  Soudanese  reached  Eldoma 
they  were  ordered  to  lay  down  their  arms  and  go 
into  the  fort.  They  refused  to  do  anything  until  the 
rest  of  their  party  had  arrived.  Captain  Kirkpatrick 
threatened  to  fire  upon  them  if  they  persisted  in  dis- 
obedience. The  reply  was  that  he  might  fire.  The 
Maxim  gun  was  brought  out,  against  the  protests 
of  Lieutenant  Fielding,  who,  though  junior  in  rank 
to  Captain  Kirkpatrick,  was  senior  in  East  African 
service  and  in  experience  of  the  Soudanese.  His  pro- 
tests were  disregarded,  and  the  Maxim  was  trailed 
upon  the  Soudanese  and  Kirkpatrick  gave  the  order 
to  open  fire.  The  gun,  according  to  the  official 
account,    jammed.      According    to    the    unofficial    ac- 


UGANDA   UNDER   THE   FOREIGN   OFFICE  227 

count  it  did  not  fire  from  a  cause  which  reflects  less 
discredit  on  the  mechanism  of  the  gun  and  much 
credit  on  the  men  behind  it. 

As  Kirkpatrick  could  not  shoot  down  the  Soudanese 
with  the  Maxim,  he  ordered  the  garrison  to  use  their 
rifles.  They  could  not  disobey,  but  they  took  care 
to  fire  high,  and  no  blood  was  shed.  But  the  Sou- 
danese were  outraged  by  this  reward  for  their  years 
of  loyal  service  and  fled  further  from  the  fort. 

Next  day  they  were  interviewed  by  Mr.  Jackson. 
The  tone  of  his  report  suggests  that  he  believed  the 
men's  story,  and  sympathized  with  their  grievances. 
He  had  no  option  whatever  but  to  order  the  men  to 
return  to  Macdonald,  and  the  men  absolutely  refused. 
After  a  short  delay,  the  Soudanese  marched  to  a 
Government  stockade  at  Nandi,  eighty  miles  to  the 
west.  They  were  joined  by  the  garrison,  arrested 
Captain  Bagnall,  the  officer  in  charge,  and  looted  the 
station.  Then,  releasing  Bagnall,  they  marched  west- 
ward toward  Lubwa's,  the  station  on  the  eastern  bank 
of  the  Nile,  at  its  outlet  from  the  Victoria  Nyanza. 

The  station  at  Lubwa's  had  a  small  Soudanese 
garrison,  under  an  officer  named  Wilson.  When  the 
news  of  the  mutiny  reached  Uganda,  Major  Thruston, 
the  commandant  of  the  Uganda  Rifles,  chivalrously 
started  for  Lubwa's  to  secure  the  loyalty  of  its  garrison, 
and  persuade  the  mutineers  to  return  to  duty. 

He  reached  Lubwa's  on  October  4th.     The  garrison 


228  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

swore  loyalty  to  him ;  he  sent  a  message  to  the 
Soudanese  urging  them  to  return  to  their  allegiance, 
and  promising  that  they  should  not  be  forced  to  serve 
under  Macdonald.  But  on  the  night  of  October  the 
1 6th  the  mutineers  reached  the  fort.  The  garrison  were 
irritated  by  the  arrest  of  some  of  their  women  in 
Uganda,  and  they  admitted  the  mutineers.  Thruston 
and  Wilson  were  seized  and  put  in  chains.  Next  day 
a  third  European  prisoner  was  taken,  as  the  Govern- 
ment's steam  launch  ran  up  to  the  fort,  and  its  engineer, 
Scott,  did  not  know  that  the  mutineers  were  in  posses- 
sion. 

The  same  day  Macdonald's  force  arrived  in  pursuit, 
and  took  up  a  station  on  the  hill  opposite  Lubwa's. 
Thruston  sent  Macdonald  a  characteristically  chivalrous 
letter,  asking  him  not  to  fight  unless  attacked,  but  not 
to  let  any  considerations  for  his  own  safety  interfere 
with  the  plans  for  the  suppression  of  the  mutiny. 

Early  next  day  (October  19th)  three  hundred  of  the 
mutineers  left  Lubwa's  to  have  a  "  shauri "  with  Mac- 
donald. They  advanced  in  irregular  order,  laughing 
and  talking  until  they  were  fifty  yards  from  the  camp. 
Macdonald  tells  us  that  they  then  treacherously  opened 
fire.  There  is  some  doubt  as  to  this  fact.  The  method 
of  the  Soudanese  advance  does  not  look  much  like  an 
intended  surprise  attack.  But  a  gun  went  off  on  one 
side  or  the  other.  Both  sides  appear  to  have  suspected 
that  the  other  was  beginning  a  treacherous  attack,  and 


II 


UGANDA   UNDER   THE  FOREIGN   OFFICE  229 

the  firing  became  general.  After  a  severe  fight,  in 
which  Lieutenant  Fielding  and  Lieutenant  Macdonald 
were  killed,  and  Mr.  Jackson  severely  wounded,  the 
mutineers  were  driven  back  with  heavy  loss,  including 
Mabruk  Effendi,  one  of  the  two  leaders  of  the  mutiny. 

In  the  afternoon  two  of  the  Soudanese  went  as  a 
deputation  to  Macdonald  to  ask  for  terms.  They  were 
ordered  to  surrender  unconditionally.  Though  they 
had  now  three  European  prisoners  in  their  hands,  they 
were  offered  the  same  terms  as  at  the  ravine,  when  the 
worst  punishment  they  had  to  fear  was  for  an  act  of 
petulant  insubordination.  The  Soudanese  were  in- 
furiated at  this  reply.  It  may  have  been  that  their 
officers  were  anxious  to  prevent  the  men  from  sur- 
rendering by  inciting  them  to  a  step  which  would  cut 
off  all  hopes  of  mercy.  The  three  Englishmen  were 
brought  from  the  guard  hut,  and  told  that  they  were  to 
be  shot.  Thruston  insisted  that,  if  he  were  to  be  shot 
it  must  be  by  the  Soudanese  commander,  Bilal  Effendi. 
Bilal  accordingly  raised  his  rifle.  Thruston  fearlessly 
caught  hold  of  the  muzzle  and  held  it  against  his  fore- 
head. A  moment  later  he  fell,  shot  through  the  head. 
Wilson  and  Scott  were  led  away  and  shot  in  the  back. 

This  terrible  outrage  rendered  further  negotiations 
useless,  and  the  siege  of  Lubwa's  was  begun  by  Mac- 
donald, aided  by  a  large  force  of  the  Waganda.  Mean- 
while the  news  of  the  Soudanese  revolt  had  spread 
through    Uganda,   and    the   Waganda    again    rose   in 


230  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

rebellion.  Fortunately,  most  of  the  other  Soudanese 
troops,  who  had  not  the  same  grievances  as  the  three 
companies  that  mutinied,  remained  loyal ;  but,  as  a 
precautionary  measure,  they  were  ordered  to  lay  down 
their  arms,  and  they  promptly  obeyed.  But  without 
the  services  of  the  Soudanese  troops  the  Waganda 
rebels  could  not  be  easily  kept  in  check.  For  some 
time  the  position  at  Kampala  was  critical. 

Luckily,  the  Acting  Commissioner  at  this  time  was 
Mr.  George  Wilson,  who  had  been  in  British  East 
Africa  ever  since  1889.  He  is  a  man  remarkable  for 
the  keen  personal  interest  he  takes  in  the  natives,  and 
for  his  infinite  patience  in  dealing  with  them.  He  has 
a  wide  command  of  East  African  languages,  and  will 
spend  hours  in  conversation  with  a  party  of  natives, 
without  betraying  boredom  or  impatience.  His  know- 
ledge of  the  character  of  the  natives  is  intimate,  and  his 
power  with  them  is  great. 

Thanks  in  the  main  to  the  influence  of  Wilson  and 
Grant,  and  to  the  loyal  assistance  given  by  the  two 
missionary  parties,  further  disasters  were  averted  and 
the  country  held,  until  the  arrival  of  reinforcements 
from  the  coast. 

Meanwhile  the  mutineers  were  still  besieged  at 
Lubwa's.  An  attempt  to  storm  the  fort  on  October 
28th  was  repulsed  with  severe  loss,  and  the  garrison 
held  its  own  until  the  beginning  of  January,  1897,  when 
they  escaped   across  the  bay,  and  marched  northwards 


I 


UGANDA   UNDER   THE   FOREIGN   OFFICE  231 

down  the  Nile.  They  occupied  a  fresh  position  at 
Lake  Kioga,  where  they  were  attacked  and  defeated. 
The  British  forces  were  now  reinforced  by  Indian 
troops,  and  the  Soudanese  were  overwhelmed.  They 
fought  bravely,  but  after  a  series  of  stubborn  engage- 
ments, fought  with  varying  success,  they  were  finally 
crushed  and  scattered. 

The  Soudanese  mutiny  is  the  saddest  of  the  many 
sad  stories  in  the  recent  history  of  Uganda.  It  neces- 
sitated the  destruction  of  the  loyal  garrison  that  had 
held  Uganda  for  England.  It  involved  a  deplorable 
waste  of  valuable  European  life,  and  gave  the  Waganda 
the  opportunity  of  renewing  their  rebellion.  The  cost 
of  its  suppression  was  enormous,  and  the  loss  to  the 
country  through  civil  war  and  devastation  has  ruined 
native  trade  or  diverted  it  to  routes  outside  the  British 
sphere.  Economically  and  politically  the  harm  has 
been  irreparable.  And  the  pity  of  it  is  that  the 
Soudanese  deserve  sympathy  rather  than  blame.  They 
were  the  victims  of  intolerable  grievances,  and  were 
driven  to  rebellion  by  tactless  treatment. 

The  blame  for  the  mutiny  is  not  to  be  charged 
against  any  one  man.  It  was  due  to  several  causes,  and 
Macdonald's  quarrel  with  his  men  at  the  ravine  was 
only  the  irritant  that  caused  the  bursting  of  the  bonds 
of  discipline,  strained  by  a  long  course  of  ill-treatment. 

The  Soudanese  had  just  cause  for  disaffection.     Their 


232  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

pay  was  miserably  inadequate.  The  Zanzibari  porters, 
upon  whom  the  Soudanese  looked  down  with  contempt, 
had  a  pay  of  ten  rupees  a  month.  The  Soudanese  in 
the  Uganda  Protectorate  received  only  four  rupees  a 
month.  When  they  reached  Eldoma,  they  found  that 
the  Soudanese  in  the  pay  of  the  adjacent  Coast  Pro- 
tectorate, though  men  of  the  same  race,  and  acting  in 
corresponding  positions,  were  receiving  more  than  six 
times  as  much  pay,  viz.,  twenty-six  rupees  a  month. 

What  is  still  more  discreditable  is  that  even  the 
stingy  pittance  of  four  rupees  a  month  was  often  not 
paid  for  months  after  it  was  due.  It  is  barely  credible 
that  the  pay  of  the  Soudanese  in  Uganda  should  have 
been  sometimes  six  months  in  arrears,  but  the  evidence 
is  conclusive.  It  is  true  that  the  men's  wages  were  paid 
in  cloth,  which  cannot  be  remitted  by  the  ordinary 
financial  methods.  But  this  excuse  for  the  Turkish 
irregularity  in  pay  is  not  sufficient,  as  some  East  Coast 
firms  had  offered  to  transport  to  Uganda  as  many  loads 
as  were  required.  Their  proposals  were  declined, 
though  the  Government  transport  service  was  admit- 
tedly inefficient. 

The  consequences  of  the  irregularity  in  the  payment 
of  the  Soudanese  were  unfortunate.  As  polygamous 
Mohammedans,  most  of  the  Soudanese  had  several 
wives  and  large  families.  When  they  did  not  get  their 
wages,  they  could  not  buy  any  food.  It  was  not  to  be 
expected  that  they  would  stand  by  and  see  their  families 


UGANDA   UNDER    THE   FOREIGN   OFFICE  233 

starve  in  a  land  of  plenty.  So  of  course  they  stole  food 
from  the  natives.  The  Waganda  bitterly  resented  the 
thefts,  and  the  feud  between  the  natives  and  our  mer- 
cenaries increased  the  unpopularity  of  our  rule. 

Another  grievance  of  the  three  companies  that  re- 
belled (the  4th,  7th,  and  9th)  was  the  fact  that  they 
were  steadily  overworked,  while  other  companies  were 
allowed  to  live  at  ease  as  garrisons  in  stations.  These 
three  companies  had  been  drilled  and  trained  by  Major 
Cunningham,  who  did  his  work  well.  Hence,  whenever 
there  was  fighting  to  be  done,  it  was  less  trouble  to 
send  the  three  trained  companies  rather  than  break  in 
the  others.  This  was  particularly  unfair  in  the  case  of 
the  Soudanese  troops,  because  they  had  been  allowed 
small  grants  of  land  as  gardens  to  help  them  in  the 
support  of  their  families.  While  they  were  kept  con- 
tinually on  the  march,  they  had  no  time  to  till  their 
allotments,  and  the  grants  were  useless. 

The  Soudanese,  moreover,  appear  to  have  been  tact- 
lessly and  unsympathetically  handled  by  some  of  their 
British  officers.  To  men  like  Gibb  and  Thruston,  who 
knew  their  language  and  understood  their  nature,  the 
Soudanese  were  devoted,  until  they  were  maddened 
to  anger  and  despair.  But  they  complained  bitterly 
of  their  treatment  by  the  young  and  inexperienced 
officers  sent  out  to  command  them,  who  did  not  know 
their  language  and  would  not  listen  to  their  complaints. 
In   the    latter    part    of    Major    Ternan's    command    he 


234  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

had  inflicted  punishments  on  two  companies  which 
they  bitterly  resented.  In  Bilal  Effendi's  company 
(the  9th)  all  the  non-commissioned  officers  were  de- 
graded a  step,  because  they  demanded  their  arrears 
of  pay.  In  the  company  of  Mabruk  Effendi,  the 
second  leader  of  the  mutiny,  the  officers  and  sergeants 
were  all  reduced  in  rank  because  they  refused,  from 
their  hereditary  terror  of  witchcraft,  to  arrest  a  native 
who  was  accused  of  having  bewitched  one  of  the  men. 

It  was  while  the  men  were  thus  dissatisfied  by 
overwork,  irregularity  in  the  payment  of  their  scanty 
wage,  and  tactless  treatment  by  some  of  their  officers 
that  Ternan  was  ordered  to  send  300  Soudanese  as 
escort  to  Macdonald's  expedition.  Companies  4,  7, 
and  9  were  as  usual  selected. 

They  reached  the  ravine,  smarting  under  a  sense 
of  injustice  for  their  treatment  in  the  past,  and  they 
were  prejudiced  against  their  future  commander,  for 
apparently  some,  at  least,  of  the  Soudanese  had  not 
forgotten  or  forgiven  Macdonald's  treatment  of  Selim 
Bey  in  1893.  Opinions  differ  as  to  how  far  this  factor 
helped  in  the  outbreak.  But  it  is  stated  that  Bilal 
Effendi,  before  leaving  Uganda,  swore  on  the  head 
of  his  son,  one  of  the  most  solemn  of  Mohammedan 
oaths,  that  he  would  never  serve  again  under  Mac- 
donald ;  and  the  telegram  from  the  Acting  Consul- 
General  at  Zanzibar,  which  announced  the  mutiny,' 
states   that   the    Soudanese    declared,   "  they   did    not 


UGANDA   UNDER   THE   FOREIGN  OFFICE  235 

care    for    constant    expeditions,   particularly   those    of 
Major  Macdonald." 

As  soon  as  the  men  were  transferred  to  their  new 
commander  the  trouble  began.  The  Soudanese,  know- 
ing how  they  were  hated  by  the  Waganda,  asked  for 
some  assurances  that  their  women  should  be  properly 
protected  during  their  absence.  They  also  asked  that 
some  of  the  women  might  be  allowed  to  accompany 
them.  Both  requests  were  reasonable.  The  Soudanese 
are  generally  attended  in  a  campaign  by  their  wives, 
who  light  fires,  cook  food,  build  grass  huts,  tie  up 
loads,  and  do  other  work  which  the  soldiers  regard 
as  menial  or  for  which  they  have  no  time.  This 
system  is  so  regular  that  the  Foreign  Office  had 
arranged  for  some  of  the  women  to  be  sent  on  the 
expedition,  but  the  men  had  not  been  informed  of  it. 
The  men,  on  joining  Macdonald's  expedition,  asked 
for  a  shauri  or  conference  in  which  to  state  their 
grievances.  Macdonald  refused  to  see  them,  but  told 
one  of  the  native  officers,  Mabruk  Effendi,  what 
arrangements  had  been  made.  There  was  either  some 
misunderstanding  over  Macdonald's  assurances,  or 
Mabruk  deliberately  suppressed  the  message.  The 
latter,  however,  is  improbable,  as  any  such  treacherous 
action  would  have  been  inevitably  discovered  at  the 
conference  which  the  men,  with  Mabruk's  approval, 
demanded  for  the  next  day.  On  the  following  morning 
the  men  drew   up  in  line  ready  to  march  north  with 


236  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

part  of  the  caravan.  According  to  the  men's  account, 
as  reported  by  Jackson,  the  men,  through  their  com- 
mandant. Lieutenant  Bright,  begged  for  an  interview 
with  Macdonald.  He  walked  toward  them,  and  the 
men  expected  some  explanations  and  assurances. 
Instead  of  that  they  were  brusquely  ordered  to  "  Right 
turn,  quick  march."  The  men  looked  appealingly  to 
Lieutenant  Bright,  and  asked,  "  What  is  the  meaning 
of  this  ?  We  want  to  see  him  ;  he  comes  and  won't 
speak  to  us,  but  orders  us  away.  We  won't  go,  but 
will  run  away." 

The  Soudanese  accordingly  fled  to  complain  to 
Jackson.  Apparently  they  thought  that  if  they  were 
to  be  treated  thus  at  the  first  camp,  what  might  they 
not  expect  when  they  got  far  away  from  Uganda 
into  the  deserts  to  the  north  ? 

The  impolicy  of  this  unsympathetic  treatment  of 
the  Soudanese  request  for  information  may  be  judged 
by  Stanley's  speech  on  the  mutiny  in  the  House  of 
Commons.  The  instructions  issued  by  the  Foreign 
Office  for  the  conduct  of  the  expedition  ordered  that 
the  native  tribes  met  with  were  to  be  treated  with 
consideration  and  respect.  If,  said  Stanley  after  quot- 
ing that  order,  the  commander  had  also  been  instructed 
to  treat  his  own  escort  with  consideration  and  respect, 
there  would  have  been  no  Soudanese  mutiny.  Uganda 
would  have  been  spared  the  most  disastrous  period  in 
the  last  decade  of   its  history. 


Chapter  XIII 
THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

"  Wherefore  such  persons  as  be  illuminated  with  the  brightest 
irradiations  of  knowledge  and  of  the  veritie  and  due  proportion  ot 
things,  they  are  called  by  the  learned  men  not  phantastici  but 
euphantasiote,  and  of  this  sort  of  phantasie  are  all  good  Poets, 
notable  Captaines  strategematique,  all  cunning  artificers  and 
enginers,  all  Legislators,  Politiciens,  and  Counsellours  of  estate, 
in  whose  exercises  the  inventive  part  is  most  employed,  and  is  to 
the  sound  judgement  of  man  most  needful." 

— George  Puttenham,  1589. 

WHEN  in  1893  the  British  Government  de- 
cided to  relieve  the  Chartered  Company 
of  its  work  in  British  East  Africa,  high 
hopes  were  formed  of  a  great  commercial  prosperity 
for  the  country.  Our  new  protectorate  was  generally 
believed  to  be  of  great  economic  value.  The  land,  with 
its  vast  areas  of  rich  volcanic  soil,  was  described  as 
of  the  highest  agricultural  capabilities.  It  was  expected 
to  yield  rich  harvests  of  rubber,  fibre,  coffee,  cotton,  and 
oils,  as  well  as  sufficient  food  stuffs  to  support  a  dense 
population.  The  ivory  trade  was  important  and  lucra- 
tive, and  was  carried  on  by  many  native  caravans. 
Silver  had  been  found  a  few   miles  from  Mombasa  ;  a 


238  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

rock  that  looked  like  quartz  was  abundant,  and  some 
out-crops  of  it  had  been  described  'on  the  maps  as 
"quartz  very  likely  looking  for  gold."  Gold  itself  had 
been  collected  in  the  nepheline  syenite  of  Mount 
Jombo,  south  of  Mombasa,  and  near  this  locality  ought 
to  occur  alluvial  deposits  that  would  pay  local  work- 
ing. 

Warnings  that  East  Africa  might  be  poorer  than  was 
expected  were  uttered.  Scott  Elliot,  for  example,  says, 
in  reference  to  the  Nyika,  that  "the  general  impression 
of  the  country  is  very  bad,  and  its  commercial  future 
probably  means  only  the  formation  of  perhaps  twenty 
ostrich  farms.  One  can  only  buy  a  chicken  at  four 
places  between  Mombasa  and  Kibwezi " — a  distance 
of  190  miles.  But  the  general  estimate  of  the  economic 
value  of  British  East  Africa  is  shown  in  a  series  of 
opinions  collected  by  Lugard,  who  concludes  that 
"  East  Africa  is  not  an  El  Dorado,  but  the  testimony 
of  all  the  authorities  I  have  quoted  is  unanimous  as 
to  the  fertility  of  the  soil,  the  healthiness  of  the  high- 
lands, the  abundance  of  the  rainfall,  and  the  general 
excellence  of  the  climate." 

Mr,    W.    A.    Fitzgerald,   who   travelled    through   the 
districts  near  the  coast  as  expert  botanical  adviser  to' 
the  British  East  Africa  Company,  reports  that,  for  fifty 
miles   into   the   interior   "  the   country   is,  as   a   whole, . 
exceedingly  rich  and  fertile,  there  can  be  no  possible' 
doubt  ;   in   the  coast-lands,   especially,   we   possess  an' 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     239 

extent  of  territory  which  for  productiveness  and  rich- 
ness of  soil  it  would  be  difficult  to  equal,  whilst  in 
the  extensive  forests  along  the  banks  of  the  Sabaki 
there  are  possibilities  of  future  wealth  and  prosperity 
which  only  require  development  to  be  realized." 

Fitzgerald's  opinion  was  formed  after  a  study  of  the 
coast-lands,  and  some  of  the  inland  provinces  were 
believed  to  be  still  more  valuable. 

Uganda,  in  particular,  was  regarded  as  a  land "  of 
great  commercial  importance,  and  the  urgent  demand 
for  its  annexation  by  the  British  Chambers  of  Com- 
merce testifies  to  the  high  estimate  of  its  economic  value. 
German  East  Africa  was  described  as  poor  in  contrast. 
Thus,  Dr.  Hans  Meyer  admits  that  "  in  East  Africa 
England  has  decidedly  had  the  best  of  the  bargain. 
In  Uganda  she  possesses  at  once  the  most  highly  cul- 
tivated and  the  most  densely  populated  region  in  Equa- 
torial Africa,  and  the  key  to  the  Soudan  and  Egypt." 

Uganda  being  thus  regarded  as  the  commercial 
"  pearl  of  Africa,"  it  was  necessary  to  bring  it  into 
direct  communication  with  the  coast.  As  the  East 
African  rivers  are  of  little  value  for  transport,  a  rail- 
way was  said  to  be  the  prime  necessity  of  British 
East  Africa. 

A  preliminary  railway  survey  was  made  in  1892-3 
under  the  superintendence  of  Major  Macdonald,  who 
estimated  that  the  railway  from  Mombasa  to  the 
Victoria  Nyanza  would  be  657  miles  long,  and  for  a 


240  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

3  ft.  6  in.  gauge  would  cost  ^2,240,000.  The  interest 
on  this  sum  would  amount  to  ^66,000  a  year,  and 
there  would  be  at  first  a  loss  on  working  expenses  of 
;^4,0C)0  a  year  (Report  on  Mombasa — Victoria  Lake 
Railway  Survey  Pari.  Pap.,  1893,  C.  7025,  p.  27).  It 
was  estimated  that  transport  from  the  interior  would 
pay  for  articles  that  could  afford  '^d.  per  ton-mile 
rate,  or  22.y.  a  ton  from  the  lake  to  the  coast.  Hence, 
for  a  moderate  liability  of  ;^70,ooo  a  year,  a  railway 
could  be  laid  from  the  coast  to  the  lake.  It  was 
predicted  that  with  these  facilities  for  transport  a  trade 
would  soon  develop,  sufficient  to  pay  for  the  adminis- 
tration of  the  country. 

The  railway  was  begun  in  1895,  and  is  still  in 
progress.  It  is  under  the  management  of  a  Foreign 
Office  Committee,  of  which  the  chairman  was  Sir  Percy 
Anderson,  succeeded  after  his  death  in  1896  by  Sir 
Francis  Bertie  and  Sir  Clement  Hill  ;  Mr.  George 
Whitehouse  was  appointed  local  engineer,  and  Sir  L. 
O'Callaghan  the  managing  director  in  London.  Fresh 
surveys  reduced  the  length  of  line  required  to  550  miles, 
and,  to  further  lower  the  cost,  the  gauge  was  reduced 
to  a  metre.  But  this  year  (1900),  in  addition  to 
the  original  vote  of  ;^3,ooo,ooo,  which  is  ^76o,0(X)  (or 
a  third)  more  than  Macdonald's  estimate,  an  extra 
;^ 1, 930,000  has  been  voted  for  the  work. 

The  railway  has  already  been  voted  more  than  twice 
as  much  as  the  first  estimate,  and  it  will  probably  cost 


ll 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     241 

still  more  before  it  is  finished.  Though  it  is  a  wild 
exaggeration  to  describe  it  as  "  the  English  Panama," 
it  is  hopeless  to  expect  it  to  pay  interest  on  its  capital. 
But  if,  as  may  reasonably  be  expected,  it  pays  its 
working  expenses,  its  construction  will  have  been 
justified,  as  it  was  built  for  political  reasons,  and  not 
as  a  commercial  speculation. 


I 


Whether  the  Uganda  Railway  will  be  a  success,  the 
'uture  alone  can  decide.  But  the  character  of  the 
British  Imperial  administration  in  British  East  Africa 
is  a  topic  fairly  open  to  discussion,  for  there  are  six 
years'  results  on  which  to  base  an  opinion. 

The  rule  of  the  Foreign  Office  has  been  accompanied 
by  great  progress,  for  most  of  which  the  Foreign  Office 
and  its  East  African  staff  deserve  the  credit. 

Mombasa  from  an  Arab  town  has  become  a 
Europeanized  commercial  city ;  roads  have  been  built ; 
transport  improved ;  the  railway  has  been  steadily 
pushed  inland,  and  towns  have  grown  up  beside  it ; 
some  of  the  most  turbulent  tribes  have  been  over- 
awed by  the  establishment  of  forts  in  their  districts  ; 
the  Pokomo  of  the  Tana  have  received  protection  from 
the  raids  of  the  Masai  and  Somali ;  the  Wakamba 
have  learnt  to  appreciate  the  benefits  of  European 
government,  and  to  assist  with  reliable  work.  Never- 
theless, it  must  be  admitted  that  the  great  expectations 
of  1894  have  not  been  fulfilled.     The  progress  of  the 

R 


242  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

country  has  been  very  partial.  The  volume  of  external 
trade  has  increased,  owing  to  the  influx  of  railway 
officials  and  the  import  of  railway  plant.  But  the 
natural  trade  has  not  grown  ;  old  trade  routes  have 
been  abandoned  and  native  markets  closed  ;  land  has 
gone  out  of  cultivation  ;  pestilence  and  famine  have 
swept  through  the  country,  and  the  population  has 
been  reduced  by  war,  disease,  and  emigration. 

The  results  have  been  most  disappointing  to  those 
who  hailed  the  establishment  of  Imperial  rule  as 
a  guarantee  that  East  Africa  would  soon  enjoy  a 
better  peace  than  she  has  ever  known.  The  disap- 
pointment has  been  all  the  more  bitter  as  there  has 
been  a  heavy  loss  of  valuable  European  life,  and  the 
failures  have  occurred  in  spite  of  the  noblest  and  self- 
sacrificing  efforts  of  a  devoted  band  of  officials. 

The  causes  of  the  disappointing  results  of  the  British 
rule  are  not  far  to  seek.  They  are  painfully  obvious. 
The  whole  of  the  blame  does  not  rest  with  man.  Some 
of  the  worst  faults  lie  in  the  structure  of  the  universe. 
British  East  Africa  is,  and  must  always  be,  a  trouble- 
some country  to  rule,  and  the  geographical  conditions 
render  its  government,  from  a  distant  office  on  second- 
hand knowledge  of  its  needs,  exceptionally  difficult. 

The  first  estimates  of  the  value  of  the  country  were 
far  too  optimistic.  Colonel  Pearson,  in  his  despatches 
on  the  campaign  against  the  rebel  Mazrui,  tells  us 
that   "  the  physical  difficulties  offered  by  the   country 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     243 

to  the  movement  of  troops  are  far  beyond  any  that 
have  been  recorded  01  expeditions  in  India.  The 
bHstering  force  of  the  sun,  the  stifling  heat  of  the 
jungles,  and  the  scarcity  of  water,  render  operations  in 
the  lowlands  near  the  coast  extremely  arduous  and 
trying." 

Moreover,  during  the  last  six  years  British  East 
Africa  has  had  persistent  ill-luck.  Pestilence,  drought, 
and  famine  are  enemies  that,  in  a  comparatively  un- 
known land,  can  neither  be  foreseen  nor  controlled  ; 
and  they  have  devastated  British  East  Africa,  and 
engendered  widespread  misery  and  a  spirit  of  unrest 
that  have  caused  especial  irritation  against  civilized 
restraint. 

But  the  blame  for  the  confusion  in  British  East 
Africa  is  not  all  extra-human.  The  clumsiness  of  man 
and  the  conservatism  of  government  systems  have 
been  only  too  powerful  for  evil.  Rebellion  is  only 
too  easily  roused  among  people  so  governed  by  habit 
and  so  saturated  with  superstition  as  negroes,  when 
their  rulers  fail  to  realize  the  spiritual  basis  of  fetish 
worship  and  despise  reverence  for  blocks  of  wood  and 
stone  as  mere  heathen  folly.  It  is  not  difficult  to 
point  out  blunders  after  they  have  been  advertised  by 
their  results,  and  to  grumble  at  acts  ot  impatience 
committed  by  men  perhaps  suffering  from  a  burning 
fever  or  abscessed  livers  in  a  hot  and  unhealthy 
climate.     Lord  Curzon  once   eloquently  expressed  his 


244  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

surprise  that  men  working  under  such  trying  con- 
ditions as  our  Uganda  staff  have  not  committed  more 
and  greater  blunders.  And  no  one  can  read  the  his- 
tory of  British  East  Africa  without  the  highest 
admiration  for  the  work  of  European  officials.  England 
has  been  represented  in  East  Africa  by  men  who  have 
worked  there  in  accordance  with  the  best  traditions 
of  our  colonial  policy.  Thus  amongst  the  administra- 
tors there  have  been  George  S.  Mackenzie  and  J.  R.  W. 
Piggott,  both  of  whom  by  tact  and  sympathy  secured 
the  goodwill  of  the  leading  Arabs  during  the  rule  of 
the  British  East  Africa  Company ;  and  Sir  A.  Hard- 
inge,  whose  intimate  knowledge  of  Arab  character  has 
enabled  him  to  reconcile  the  planters  of  Zanzibar  and 
Pemba  to  our  anti-slavery  legislation.  There  have 
been  model  district  administrators,  such  as  Ainsworth 
of  Machakos,  Hobley  in  Kavirondo,  Hall  in  Kikuyu, 
Grant  in  Usogo,  and  Forster  in  Unyoro.  Confidence 
in  British  justice  has  been  established  by  Jenner's  ^ 
integrity  and  impartiality  as  Chief  Judge  at  Mombasa. 
Men,  such  as  Bird  Thompson  at  Witu,  Pulteney  in 
Unyoro,  Rogers  at  Lamu,  Sitwell  in  Toru,  Cunning- 
ham and  Gibb  in  Uganda,  though  in  military  com- 
mands, have  restrained  their  natural  instinct  for  fight- 
ing and  have  worked  with  single-souled  devotion  and 
untiring    patience    at    the    peaceful    administration    of 

*  The  sad  news  that  Jenner  was  killed  by  the  southern  Somali 
was  received  after  this  chapter  was  in  type. 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     245 

their  districts.  Finally,  men  like  George  Wilson  and 
F.  J.  Jackson,  owing  to  their  sympathy  with  the 
natives,  have  been  able  to  carry  the  country  through 
crises  in  its  history. 

To  mention  individuals  is  no  doubt  invidious  ;  the 
men  named  are  but  samples  of  the  rest.  It  is  the 
fact  that  the  majority  of  the  British  East  African 
staff  have  worked  sincerely  and  disinterestedly  for  the 
welfare  of  the  country,  that  makes  so  deplorable  the 
frequent  waste  of  their  sacrifices  by  the  clumsiness  of 
inexperienced  colleagues  and  the  adoption  of  official 
methods  unsuited  to  local  conditions. 

The  main  cause  of  our  disasters  in  the  rule  of  the 
Foreign  Office,  as  in  that  of  its  predecessor,  the  British 
East  Africa  Company,  has  been  the  lack  of  a  policy 
based  on  a  scientific  knowledge  of  the  country  and 
its  people,  framed  in  accordance  with  the  views  of  the 
local  authorities  as  to  what  is  practically  and  economi- 
cally possible,  and  continuously  and  consistently  carried 
out,  even  despite  the  prejudices  of  philanthropists  at 
home  and  the  ambitions  of  military  officials  abroad. 

The  British  East  Africa  Company  was  ruined  by 
the  attempt  suddenly  to  introduce  a  government,  on 
philanthropic  principles,  into  a  country  too  poor  to 
afford  a  sudden  revolution  of  its  industrial  system, 
and  to  pay  for  the  luxury  of  social  experiments. 

The  policy  enforced  from  home  by  the  Company 
was   of    extraneous    origin,   and    the   climate   of    East 


246  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

Africa  was  fatal  to  it.  The  main  fault  of  the  Foreign 
Office  rule  has  been  exactly  the  reverse :  either  it  has 
not  had  any  consistent  policy  or  ideal  of  its  own,  or 
it  has  failed  to  insist  on  the  adoption  of  that  policy 
by  its  agents  in  East  Africa.  There  has  been  a  rapid 
succession  of  Commissioners  and  Acting  Commis- 
sioners, who  have  been  allowed  to  do  what  they 
wanted,  whether  or  not  it  was  consistent  with  the  acts 
of  their  predecessors  or  the  views  of  the  Government. 
Since  1893  Uganda  has  been  governed  successively 
by  Portal,  Macdonald,  Colvile,  Jackson,  Berkeley, 
Ternan,  Jackson,  Wilson,  Berkeley,  and  finally  Sir 
Harry  Johnston.  The  changes  of  policy  with  these 
changes  of  men  have  been  sudden  and  complete. 
Portal's  .system,  of  a  minimum  interference  in  local 
administration  and  peace  with  neighbouring  states, 
was  promptly  reversed  by  his  successor.  An  adven- 
turous policy  has  naturally  been  more  popular  in 
Uganda,  for  it  has  been  better  rewarded  at  home 
than  attempts  at  the  quiet  development  of  the  country. 
The  man,  who  made  successfully  one  of  those  "  nigger 
hunts,"  which  in  Equatorial  Africa  are  misnamed  wars, 
has  gained  distinction  and  decoration,  in  preference  to 
the  man  who  kept  his  province  in  peace  by  sympa- 
thetic and  patient  administration.  The  Chinese  system 
of  paying  a  doctor  most  when  he  attends  his  patient 
least  might  well  be  adopted  for  rewarding  soldiers  who 
have  civilian  duties.     Some  of  the   wars   and   punitive 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA      247 

expeditions  of  the  past  few  years  have  been  no  doubt 
inevitable  and  just.  They  have  been  "the  cruel  wars 
of  peace."  But  some  of  the  military  expeditions  in 
East  Africa  have  been  simply  criminal  in  their  folly 
and  thoughtlessness. 

In  one  instance  a  village  of  a  chief,  with  whom  it 
was  especially  necessary  that  friendly  relations  should 
be  maintained,  was  attacked  and  looted  by  an  officer 
on  his  way  home  from  Uganda  out  of  sheer  mischief 
Once  on  a  time  the  chief  had  been  troublesome,  but 
he  had  been  cajoled  into  good  behaviour  by  the  tact- 
ful handling  of  the  officer  in  command  of  the  district ; 
and  his  work  of  years  was  undone  in  an  afternoon  by 
the  caprice  of  an  irresponsible  officer  from  a  distant 
province. 

Acts  such  as  these  not  only  shatter  the  confidence 
of  the  natives,  but  they  dishearten  the  men  whose 
work  is  thus  lightly  ruined. 

Some  of  the  incidents  that  have  attended  British 
conquests  of  fractious  tribes  have  been  perfectly  hor- 
rible, as  is  admitted  by  the  men  who  were  forced  to 
commit  them.  Thruston's  interesting  memoir  tells  us 
of  several  which  occurred  during  the  campaign  that 
ruined  the  once  fertile  and  well-peopled  country  of 
Unyoro.  Thruston  relates  that,  during  a  night  march 
on  Kabarega's  stronghold  in  1894,  he  passed  a  hut 
with  three  men  sitting  inside  it  smoking,  "  It  was 
impossible    that    we    could    pass    without    being    dis- 


248  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

covered,  so  I  stopped,  and,  turning  round,  made  a  sign 
to  the  soldiers.  As  I  did  so,  one  of  the  men  got  up 
and  went  towards  the  door.  But  the  soldiers  had 
understood  me  well ;  they  had  fixed  their  bayonets. 
•In  a  moment  a  dozen  of  them  had  run  into  the  house 
and  silently  done  their  work.  This  transaction,  I  know, 
comes  very  near  to  mere  assassination." 

Thruston  describes  his  duty  in  Unyoro  as  that  of 
"  a  captain  of  Bashi-Bazouks,  a  raider,  and  an  ivory 
thief"  ;  and  he  complains,  "  I  was  sick  of  raids  and 
bloodshed,  and  I  longed  to  have  done  with  them." 
He  therefore  wrote  to  Kabarega,  the  king  of  the 
country,  to  beg  him  to  submit.  But  Thruston  tells 
us  that  "  this  letter  was  promptly  repudiated  by  the 
Foreign  Office,"  and  endorses  the  opinion  expressed 
by  Mr.  Byles  in  the  House  of  Commons,  that  every 
one  who  had  been  in  any  way  connected  with  Un- 
yoro ought  to  be  thoroughly  ashamed  of  himself — a 
condemnation  which  Thruston  candidly  accepted  for 
himself. 

The  work  of  civilian  administration  in  East  Africa 
has  also  been  seriously  hindered  by  the  quarrels  of 
the  missions  and  their  interference  in  politics.  The 
difficulty  thus  introduced  into  the  government  of 
Uganda  has  been  admitted  by  every  independent 
visitor  to  the  country. 

I  have  had  to  criticise  the  missionaries  in   Chapter 


THE    UGANDA    RAILWAY  :    A    SIKKI'    GRADIENT. 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     249 

XI.,  and  should  like  to  remark  that  I  have  no  animus 
against  them.  I  had  taken  a  keen  interest  in  mission 
work,  and  went  to  East  Africa  in  full  sympathy  with  it. 
I  realized  that  the  missionaries  are  the  one  section  of 
Europeans  in  an  uncivilized  community  whose  interests 
are  one  with  the  natives,  whom  they  best  can  protect 
against  ill-treatment  by  traders  or  officials.^  The 
missions  in  East  Africa  have  done  work  which  every 
student  of  that  country  must  admire,  from  its  untiring 
patience,  its  educational  success  as  at  Freretown,  and 
the  extent  of  its  civilizing  influence  as  in  Uganda.  The 
East  African  Mission  has  on  its  roll  the  names  of  men 
of  saintly  life  and  of  Christian  spirit,  like  Krapf  and 
Rebmann  of  the  old  Mombasa  Mission,  Mackay  and 
Tucker  of  Uganda,  Hooper  of  Jelori,  Smith  and 
Edwards  of  Freretown,  and  W.  E.  Taylor  of  Mom- 
basa. But  the  work  of  these  men  has  been  hampered 
by  the  political  interference  of  the  missionaries  as  a 
body.  Missionary  intervention  in  politics  has  been  as 
disastrous  in  Eastern  Africa  as  it  has  been  in  other 
parts  of  the  continent. 

The  effort  of  the  London  Missionary  Society's  agents 
to  make  South  Africa  into  a  group  of  native  states 
ruled  by  local  chiefs,  under  the  guidance  of  missionary 
advisers,  was  one  great  cause  of  the  feud  at  the  Cape 
between    the    English    and    the    Dutch    settlers.       In 

'  As  in  the  case  of  Bishop  Tucker's  excellent  intervention  in 
Toru,  p.  179. 


250  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

Uganda,  in  the  British  East  African  coast-lands,  and 
in  British  Central  Africa,  the  political  action  of  the 
missionaries  has  done  deplorable  harm  to  the  countries, 
to  the  missions,  and  to  the  missionaries.  It  would  no 
doubt  often  have  been  difficult  for  the  missionaries  to 
avoid  intervention ;  but  some  of  them  seem  to  have 
been  only  too  willing  to  exchange  preaching  for  the 
excitement  of  political  intrigue. 

A  minute  of  the  Church  Missionary  Society  declares 
that  "  one  of  the  fundamental  principles  of  the  Society 
is  that  the  committee  and  missionaries  must  keep  clear 
of  politics."  This  rule  may  be  obeyed  in  Asia,  but  in 
Uganda  it  has  many  a  time  been  absolutely  neglected. 
Indeed,  Sir  Gerald  Portal  asserted  that  the  race  for 
converts  in  Uganda  was  synonymous  with  a  race  for 
political  power.  Now,  however,  there  can  be  no  doubt 
about  the  future  ownership  of  Uganda ;  so  we  may 
hope  that  the  Church  Missionary  Society  will  enforce 
its  own  wise  rule,  that  its  agents  are  not  to  interfere 
in  political  affairs.  Until  the  missionaries  are  per- 
suaded to  work  on  this  principle,  it  is  idle  to  expect 
African  natives  to  believe  that  missions  are  solely  in- 
spired by  religious  motives. 

A  second  change  that  is  wanted  is  more  tolerance 
for  rival  missions.  That  the  bitter  feud  between  the 
Catholics  and  Protestants  in  Uganda  has  been  the  great 
difficulty  in  ruling  that  country  has  been  recognised  by 
every  independent  visitor.     The  bitterness  between  the 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     251 

two  parties  can  be  best  illustrated  by  extracts  from  the 
writings  of  the  missionaries  themselves.  The  diary  of 
the  French  Mission  in  Uganda  is  printed  in  the  official 
Chronique  Trimestrielle  de  la  Societe  des  Missionaires 
d'Afrique  {Peres-B lanes).  This  journal,  which  is  now  in 
its  twenty-first  year,  is  especially  instructive,  as  it  is  not 
issued  for  general  circulation.  A  notice,  printed  on  both 
leaves  of  the  cover,  reminds  all  whom  it  may  concern 
that  the  Chronique  Trimestrielle,  being  published  ex- 
clusively for  the  Missionary  Fathers,  ought  not  to  be 
communicated  to  any  other  person  whatever  without 
the  permission  of  the  "  Superieurs  majeurs."  Care  is 
taken  to  prevent  the  journal  falling  into  the  hands  of 
what  it  calls  "  Protestant  pagans  "  ;  but  copies  are  occa- 
sionally read  by  others  than  the  White  Fathers,  and  a 
few  quotations  will  illustrate  the  spirit  in  which  some 
members  of  the  Catholic  Mission  conduct  their  work. 
The  two  mottoes  of  the  order  are  the  texts,  "  Behold, 
how  good  and  how  pleasant  it  is  for  brethren  to  dwell 
together  in  unity,"  and  "  It  [the  multitude  of  them  that 
believed]  was  of  one  heart  and  one  soul."  How  the 
missionaries  interpret  these  maxims  is  shown  by  the 
following  passages,  all  of  which  are  taken  from  one 
number  of  the  Chronique  Trimestrielle  : — 

"What  a  pity  that  at  Rubaga  [the  headquarters  of 
the  French  Mission]  there  is  not  a  missionary  specially 
charged  with  the  conversion  of  the  Protestants."  Any 
such  arrangement  is  unnecessary,  since  it  appears  from 


25^  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA 

the  diary  that  the  whole  staff  are  ready  to  devote  their 
best  energies  to  this  branch  of  the  work.  A  few  pages 
earlier  is  the  following  passage,  "  Three  teachers  armed 
with  a  letter  from  Mwanga  leave  for  Budu  to  build  a 
church  there  and  introduce  heresy  into  our  beloved 
province.  The  progress  and  success  of  Catholicism  in 
the  Protestant  provinces  make  the  heretics  hope  for 
similar  results  in  Budu.  But  they  will  try  in  vain  ;  for 
one  proselyte  neophyte  they  may  make  from  us,  we 
will  glean  a  hundred  from  them."  The  enthusiasm  with 
which  the  conversion  of  Protestants  is  undertaken  is 
illustrated  by  a  remark  on  the  next  page.  "January 
30th.  Departure  of  Fathers  Gaudibert  and  Jacquet  for 
Bulamwezi.  Their  baggage  is  light,  but  they  are  as 
gay  as  larks — they  are  going  to  evangelize  a  Protestant 
province."  Mr.  Wilson,  the  Acting  Commissioner  at 
Kampala,  had  occasion  to  protest  to  the  king  against 
some  of  Father  Gaudibert's  proceedings  during  the 
course  of  this  evangelical  tour.  The  complaint  is  re- 
peated in  the  journal  as  follows,  with  a  characteristic 
comment,  " '  He  [Father  Gaudibert]  does  harm  in  Bula- 
mwezi ;  he  has  many  houses  built  by  force.  The  whites 
of  Namirembe  [the  headquarters  of  the  Church  Mis- 
sionary Society  in  Uganda]  have  denounced  him  to 
me.'  Bravo,  Father  Gaudibert.  Mr.  Wilson  pays 
you  a  compliment  to-day.  The  Protestants  curse  you. 
That  proves  that  you  do  good,  and  what  are  these 
houses,  which  cause  you  to  be  detested  by  the  chiefs  of] 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     253 

Kampala  and  the  Reverends,  but  chapels  wherein  you 
collect  your  catechumens,  more  numerous  every  day, 
converted  from  Protestantism  ?  "  A  week  later  Father 
Gaudibert  returned  to  the  French  central  station,  re- 
joicing in  the  salvation  of  "  a  joyful  band  of  neophytes 
and  catechumens  torn  from  Protestantism.  This  is  the 
wheat  that  with  the  help  of  God  he  has  known  how  to 
glean  in  the  midst  of  thistles."  "  During  the  two  past 
months  nine  chapels  have  been  built  in  the  midst  of  the 
Protestant  provinces  at  the  instigation  of  the  cate- 
chists  and  with  the  help  of  the  catechumens.  But  in 
the  midst  of  what  broils,  what  cries  of  rage  from  the 
Protestants  ?  God  alone  knows.  May  the  Blessed 
Virgin  continue  her  protection  and  give  us  courage 
in  our  militant  life." 

Zeal  on  the  part  of  the  Protestant  agents  is  attributed 
to  inspiration  from  a  different  source.  "  Thousands  of 
printed  leaflets  are  circulating  in  the  capital  of  Uganda ; 
men  posted  at  every  street  corner  distribute  them  to 
the  passers-by.  It  is  Pilkington,  the  crack-brained 
{exalte)  minister  of  Namirembe,  who  writes  a  collective 
letter  to  all  the  Buganda  from  England.  This  minister, 
who  during  his  sojourn  in  Uganda  had  all  the  symptoms 
of  diabolical  possession,  speaks  in  this  letter  of  his 
laborious  scriptural  works  —  six  books  were  already 
printed,  and  others  in  preparation,  with  which  he  will 
not  delay  inundating  the  country." 

The  Catholic  converts,  however,  are  not  always  gained 


254  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

by  the  methods  of  the  Church  mihtant.  The  following 
entry  shows  that  recruits  are  obtained  by  purchase  as 
well  as  by  preaching,  "  April  20th.  A  woman  escapes 
from  her  Mussulman  master,  and  entreats  me  to  buy 
her.  Four  years  ago  she  began  to  pray  daily,  morning 
and  evening,  and  she  has  been  faithful  to  her  prayers  ; 
in  spite  of  being  forbidden  and  bastinadoed  by  her 
master,  she  has  had  herself  secretly  instructed  in  the 
catechism,  which  she  knows  by  heart.  The  Mussulman, 
despairing  of  corrupting  her,  has  resolved  to  sell  her 
to  a  pagan,  I  buy  this  poor  soul  for  5,500  cowries." 
Father  Gaudibert's  method  of  arguing  with  heretics  he 
describes  as  follows: — 

"  About  ten  o'clock  in  the  morning  a  grand  diable  01 
a  negro,  whose  body  is  all  covered  with  horrid  sores, 
presents  himself  to  me.  I  have  seldom  seen  a  man  of 
so  repulsive  an  aspect.  His  hideous  face,  stupefied  by 
abuse  of  mwenge  [native  beer],  presents  to  the  frightened 
gaze  two  eyes  terribly  reddened  by  smoking  hemp. 

"  '  Where  do  you  come  from  .-* ' 

"  *  I  come  from  Namirembe  [the  Church  Missionary 
Society's  headquarters].  The  whites  have  sent  me  here 
to  carry  greetings  to  the  lost  children  of  the  house  of  God.'.| 

"  '  But  these  reverend  gentlemen  have  not  told  you  toj 
come  to  me,  I  think  ?  ' 

"  '  They  told  me  to  go  everywhere,  and  have  fear  of  no| 
one.  But  if  I  had  not  convinced  the  Pope's  white  man] 
of  error,  people  would  refuse  the  greeting  I  bring.' 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     255 

" '  No,  my  dear  friend,  they  could  not  refuse  greetings 
presented  by  so  distinguished  a  man.  Are  not  your 
hemp-reddened  eyes  and  the  infectious  odour  that  is 
exhaled  by  your  legs  enough  to  unite  round  you  all  the 
Buganda  ? ' 

"  '  Laugh  at  me,  but  listen  ! ' 
»    "  *  I  am  not  laughing ;   I  am    telling  the  truth  pure 
and  simple.' 

" '  This  is  what  the  Lord  sends  me  to  tell  you.' 

"  *  Wait  a  minute  ;  what  is  your  name  ? ' 

" '  My  name  is  Eliya ;  on  this  earth  my  master  is 
Mugema,  but  in  truth  I  have  no  other  master  than 
that  one  who  says,  *'  There  is  only  one  Master,"  and 
who  has  written  the  evangel  I  hold  in  my  hand,  and 
which  leaves  me  neither  night  nor  day.' 

" '  Take  care  not  to  dirty  it  with  the  pus  which 
flows  from  your  body.' 

" '  The  Lord  sends  me  to  tell  you  that  you  are  a 
liar.  The  day  of  judgment  draws  near  ;  yet  a  little 
while 

"'la  liar  ?  Thanks  for  your  politeness  ;  but  tell 
me  why  I'm  a  liar.' 

"  *  Yes,  you  are  a  liar,  because  you  teach  that  Peter 
is  the  vicar  of  Jesus  Christ.  Open  the  evangel.  Would 
our  Lord  Jesus  Christ  have  entrusted  His  Holy  {sic) 
Mother  to  John  if  Peter  had  been  His  vicar  ?  Would 
the  apostles  united  at  Jerusalem  have  sent  Peter  into 
Samaria  if  Peter  had   been   their  chief  ?     Would  Jesus 


255  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

have  rebuffed  Peter  as  He  did  (St.  John  xxi.  20-23)  if 
He  had  wished  that  Peter  should  be  His  vicar  ? '  etc.,  etc. 

"  I  answer  all  these  old  objections  very  seriously  to 
edify  the  catechumens  present,  and  excite  their  laughter 
against  this  inspired  man,  whom  I  would  willingly 
call  Pilkingtonian.  He,  in  fact,  recalls  very  well  a 
fool  I  once  knew  at  the  capital.  That  visionary  pre- 
tended to  have  received  the  Holy  Spirit  in  the  island 
of  Kome,  and  wished  to  communicate  it  to  every 
one,  whether  they  wished  or  not.  What  an  assault 
I  had  to  endure  as  my  share !  Briefly,  my  good 
negro,  finding  it  impossible  to  continue  the  argument, 
avowed  himself  vanquished  and  changed  his  weapons. 
He  passed  from  insolent  discussion  to  downright  insult. 

"  *  You  white  man  of  Kasala,  and  all  belonging  to 
you,  you  deceive  your  people,  you  teach  that  the 
Pope  is  God.' 

" '  I  teach  that  the  Pope  is  God  ? ' 

"  '  Yes,  you.' 

" '  Well,  as  you  are  so  ill-informed,  go  and  ask  those 
whom  I  teach  what  is  my  doctrine.'  And,  saying 
this,  I  show  him  the  door.  My  demoniac  refusing  to 
go,  I  am  obliged  to  take  him  by  the  arm  and  put 
him  outside.  I  have  all  the  trouble  in  the  world  to 
prevent   my  people   accompanying   this  by  blows. 

" '  It  is  the  Lord  you  are  driving  away,'  he  cries, 
like  one  possessed  ;  '  The  day  of  judgment  is  near.'  " 

This,  it    must  be    remembered,    is    Pere   Gaudibert's 


1 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA      257 

own  account  of  how  he  spreads  the  gospel  of  Christ 
among  the  Waganda.  It  is  distressing  enough  that 
any  native  on  visiting  a  Christian  mission  station 
should  be  reviled  and  ridiculed  and  then  forcibly- 
expelled.  But  it  is  worse  that  the  missionary  should 
describe  the  incident  with  manifest  pleasure  and  with- 
out the  slightest  feeling  of  shame.  It  is  still  more 
deplorable  that  such  a  narrative  should  be  circulated 
by  the  authorities  of  the  Order  of  the  White  Fathers 
among  their  other  stations,  apparently  as  an  instance 
of  commendable  zeal. 

Further,  it  is  to  be  hoped  that  the  missionaries  will 
become  not  only  more  tolerant  towards  one  another, 
but  more  patient  in  demanding  reforms  of  local  in- 
stitutions. 

Slavery,  when  it  involved  slave-raiding  in  Africa,  a 
Transatlantic  voyage  in  a  crowded  slave  ship,  and 
work  under  the  harsh  discipline  of  an  American 
plantation,  deserved  every  epithet  that  its  opponents 
hurled  against  it.  But  this  type  of  slavery  has  dis- 
appeared from  British  East  Africa.  What  is  there 
called  slavery  is  a  feudal  system  which  is  freedom 
itself  compared  with  the  rigid  rules  and  imprison- 
ment of  a  South  African  mining  compound.  The 
agitation,  in  favour  of  the  immediate  abolition  of  East 
!  African  serfdom  owes  its  strength  to  feelings  that  have 
I  survived  from  the  crusade  of  Clarkson  and  Wilberforce 


258  BRITISH   EAST  AFRICA 

Even  thirty  years  ago  some  missionaries  admitted 
that  the  evils  of  domestic  slavery  in  East  Africa 
had  been  exaggerated.  In  1873  ^^^v.  C.  New  ob- 
jected to  the  transportation  of  the  freed  slaves  to 
the  settlements  established  for  them  in  Mauritius,  the 
Seychelles,  Bombay  and  Aden,  because  in  those  places 
the  slaves  had  to  live  under  discipline  and  learn 
various  uncongenial  subjects — a  lot  which  they  re- 
garded as  slavery  under  a  less  sympathetic  and  stronger 
master  than  they  would  otherwise  have  had.  "  From 
personal  intercourse,"  says  New,  "  I  found  that  these 
freed  people  feel  their  exile  more  than  they  did  their 
original  slavery." 

That  the  abuses  of  domestic  serfdom  are  now  in- 
significant is  obvious  from  the  difficulty  found  by  the 
anti-slavery  advocates  in  discovering  sensational  scan- 
dals. The  Anti-slavery  Society  has  been  misled  into 
using  bogus  evidence.  In  September,  1896,  it  pub- 
lished in  its  organ,  The  Anti-slavery  Reporter,  a 
photograph  of  some  men  in  chains,  under  the  title 
"  Slavery  in  Zanzibar."  The  picture  was  re-published 
in  a  pamphlet  in  1897,  when  it  was  described  as 
"  A  group  of  slaves  under  the  British  flag,  Zanzibar," 
and  "Slavery  in  Zanzibar,  1896."  The  photograph 
in  reality  was  an  old  photograph  showing  a  German 
soldier  guarding  some  prisoners  at  Dar-es-Salaam  in 
German  East  Africa. 

If  the   Society,   in   spite   of  its    enterprising   agents 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     259 

in  British  East  Africa,  has  to  use  such  evidence  as 
this,  the  existing  evils  cannot  be  extensive.  Never- 
theless the  British-  public  has  failed  to  recognise 
the  difference  between  the  slavery  of  the  American 
sugar  plantations  and  the  domestic  serfdom  of  East 
Africa,  It  has,  accordingly,  forced  the  British  Govern- 
ment to  impose  on  the  East  African  coast-lands 
labour  reforms  for  which  the  people  were  not  ready. 
The  effect  has  therefore  been  disastrous. 

The  Germans  have  been  wiser.  They  began  an 
equally  vigorous  campaign  against  slavery.  The 
German  Anti-slavery  Committee  was  nothing  behind 
the  British  Anti-slavery  Society  in  the  vigour  of  its 
denunciations  of  slavery  and  in  its  efforts  to  destroy  it. 
But  the  German  administrators  soon  realized  the  harm 
that  would  result  from  precipitate  interference  with 
domestic  serfdom,  and  they  were  allowed  to  proceed 
slowly.  Hence,  though  they  started  work  in  the  face 
of  a  stronger  native  prejudice  than  we  did,  they  have 
managed  to  rule  their  territories  without  any  such 
serious  rebellions  as  those  of  Uganda  and  the  Mazrui, 
which  have  done  such  irreparable  harm  in  British 
East  Africa. 

So  far  this  chapter  has  been  merely  critical.  What 
suggestions,  it  may  be  asked,  can  be  made  to  improve 
our  administrative  methods,  so  as  to  avoid  evils  and 
injustice  in  the  future  ? 


26o  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

The  crying  need  of  East  Africa  is  consistent  ad- 
ministration by  men  who  know  the  country  and  under- 
stand its  people.  The  present  Commissioner  is  the 
first  ruler  sent  out  with  full  powers  who  has  had  con- 
siderable experience  of  the  Bantu  races.  If  Sir  Harry 
Johnston  had  only  been  sent  out  five  years  earlier, 
how  different  the  story  of  British  East  Africa  might 
have  been  !  If  his  appointment  means  that  there  is 
to  be  a  new  system  in  the  selection  of  officials,  then 
his  administration  marks  the  beginning  of  a  brighter 
era  in  East  Africa. 

A  radical  reform  is  also  necessary  in  the  method  of 
filling  the  subordinate  appointments. 

At  present  British  East  Africa  is  governed  by  the 
Foreign  Office.  The  qualifications  required  in  diplo- 
matic and  consular  work  are  not  those  wanted  for  the 
management  of  equatorial  railways  and  the  government 
of  uncivilized  tribes  of  negroes.  The  Foreign  Office 
has  a  staff  which  has  been  trained  for  diplomatic  and 
consular  work  ;  but  it  has  no  body  of  men  at  its  dis- 
posal who  understand  the  conditions  of  Equatorial 
Africa,  and  who  are  at  the  same  time  available  for 
appointments  in  East  Africa.  The  Foreign  Office  has 
to  borrow  the  services  of  soldiers,  who  have  learnt  to 
love  the  formal  discipline  of  European  armies,  and  will 
even  expect  native  levies  to  show  the  self-restraint  of 
British  troops.  In  cases  of  emergency,  the  Foreign 
Office  calls  for   help  from    India ;   and,   though   some 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     261 

of  the  men  of  Indian  training  have  achieved  brilliant 
success,  others  appear  to  have  tried  ruling  excitable 
"  Fuzzy-Wuzzies  "  and  turbulent  Masai  as  if  they  were 
Bengali.     The  consequences  have  been  tragic. 

The  primary  need  of  our  possessions  in  Equatorial 
Africa  is  a  special  service  of  men  appointed  by  open 
competition,  as  in  the  Indian  Civil  Service.  According 
to  the  present  system,  the  selection  of  men  is  neces- 
sarily somewhat  haphazard.  A  man  is  sent  for  a  few 
years'  work  to  East  Africa  ;  thence  he  is  promoted  to 
act  as  consul  at  a  Mediterranean  watering  place  or 
an  American  port.  Aware  that  promotion  may  at  any 
time  lead  to  his  sudden  removal  to  another  continent, 
■  he  has  no  particular  inducement  to  take  much  interest 
iin  the  country  or  its  people.  As  soon  as  a  man  begins 
to  understand  the  natives  and  speak  their  language, 
he  may  be  transferred.  Similarly,  a  young  official  in 
British  East  Africa  may  at  any  time  have  placed  over 
his  head  a  man  who  knows  nothing  of  Africa  or 
African  methods,  and  may  do  serious  mischief  before 
he  learns  to  take  advice  from  his  more  experienced 
juniors. 

A  special  service  for  tropical  Africa  is  needed,  not 
only  for  the  good  of  our  African  possessions,  but  in 
the  interests  of  the  normal  work  of  the  Foreign  Office. 
Berths  in  other  parts  of  the  world  have  to  be  found 
for  men  who  have  earned  promotion  in  Equatorial 
Africa.     The   most   striking  illustration   of  the   disad- 


262  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

vantages  of  this  system  is  the  case  of  Sir  Claude 
Macdonald,  who  made  a  great  reputation  by  the  high 
character  and  brilliant  success  of  his  African  work. 
He  was  rewarded  by  promotion  to  the  Embassy  at 
Pekin,  a  position  in  which  full  success  may  have  been 
impossible  to  any  one,  though  some  of  Macdonald's 
critics  say  that  a  man  more  experienced  in  the  methods 
of  Chinese  and  Russian  diplomacy  would  have  had  a 
better  chance.  At  any  rate,  this  case  illustrates  the 
danger  of  rewarding  success  in  African  administration 
by  promotion  to  diplomatic  duties,  which  call  for  differ- 
ent qualities  and  training. 

The  separation  of  the  management  of  East  Africa 
from  the  ordinary  work  of  the  Foreign  Office  is  there- 
fore advisable,  in  the  interests  both  of  the  country  and 
of  the  Foreign  Office.  Upon  this  supposition  it  has 
been  proposed  to  transfer  British  East  Africa  to  the 
charge  of  the  Colonial  Office.  The  change  appears 
natural  to  those  who  do  not  realize  the  difference  be- 
tween a  white  man's  colony  and  a  dependency  which 
is  the  home  of  a  numerous  and  inferior  race.  What 
would  have  been  the  history  of  India  had  it  been 
placed  under  the  Colonial  Office?  and  what  may  not 
be  the  history  of  our  African  possessions  were  they 
placed  under  the  conditions  which  have  made  of  the 
government  of  India  the  most  magnificent  achievement 
of  our  race  ?  The  Foreign  Office  has  probably  managed 
East  Africa  as  economically  and  as  well  as  any  London 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     263 

office  could  have  done  during  the  trying  times  of  the 
transition.  The  main  faults  to  be  found  with  it  have 
been  its  inefficient  curb  on  militarism,  and  its  steady 
defence  of  agents  who  have  blundered,  even  when  they 
have  expressly  disobeyed  its  orders  and  wrecked  its 
policy.  Loyally  to  defend  servants  who  have  done 
their  best  is  an  absolute  necessity  in  the  case  of  our 
representatives  abroad,  whose  credit  has  to  be  main- 
tained in  the  eyes  of  foreigners.  They  support  their 
men  and  we  have  to  support  ours.  But  the  historic 
tradition  of  the  Foreign  Office  unfits  it  for  manag- 
ing a  commercial  and  administrative  service.  And  this 
policy  in  East  Africa  has  been  attended  with  a  very 
unfortunate  result.  It  has  disheartened  the  officials, 
whose  work  has  been  spoiled,  to  see  blunders  not  only 
escape  censure,  but  secure  rewards  that  should  only 
have  been  earned  by  complete  success. 

In  addition  to  the  need  for  reforms  in  our  adminis- 
trative system,  we  need  a  fundamental  change  in  policy. 
Greater  efforts  should  be  made  to  use  local  men  and 
materials.  There  had  been  no  systematic  attempt  to 
ascertain  the  economic  resources  of  the  country  before 
the  arrival  of  Sir  H.  Johnston,  and  even  now  the  funds 
at  his  disposal  for  this  purpose  are  inadequate. 

"  Hitherto,"  said  Lugard  in  1894,  and  it  is  still  truer 
to-day,  "  they  [the  Germans]  have  set  us  an  example 
in  the  thorough  and  practical  way  in  which  they  set 


264  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

about  to  develop  their  territories,  though,  as  regards 
tact  with  the  natives,  the  advantage,  perhaps,  lies  with 
us.  Even  so  much  as  three  years  before  it  was  adminis- 
tered, preliminary  expeditions  of  experts  and  scientists 
were  sent  to  German  East  Africa  (in  1885)  to  report 
on  the  geology,  climate,  soil,  and  vegetation,  and  this 
was  immediately  followed  by  the  establishment  of  plan- 
tations, so  that  some  thirty  were  in  existence  in  1888." 

Even  more  important  than  the  discovery  of  the 
available  economic  products  of  East  Africa  is  the  need 
for  more  use  of  native  help  in  the  management  of  the 
country. 

What  success  would  England  have  gained  in  India 
had  we  ignored  the  help  of  native  rulers?  In  the  civili- 
zation of  British  East  Africa,  the  more  intelligent  races 
can  give  invaluable  assistance.  The  native  merchants 
of  the  coast  towns  can  conduct  a  profitable  trade  where 
no  European  could  pay  his  expenses.  For  some  con- 
siderable time  to  come  trade  with  the  less  accessible 
portions  of  British  East  Africa  must  be  left  to  native 
caravans.  In  this  method  of  business  the  Arabs  and 
Suahili  are  experts.  Their  assistance  is  indispensable 
for  the  commercial  development  of  the  country. 

It  may  be  urged  that  any  alliance  with  the  Arabs 
would  be  immoral,  as  their  passion  for  slave-raiding  is 
ineradicable.  As  the  slave  business  was  profitable,  and 
the  Arabs  do  not  regard  it  as  objectionable,  no  doubt 
they  would  engage  in  it  if  they  could  do  so  safely. 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     265 

But  the  East  Coast  Arabs  and  Suahili  are  sufficiently 
intelligent  to  appreciate  the  benefits  of  a  European  con- 
nection. "  We  are  children,  you  are  men,"  said  to  me 
Omari  Hamadi,  the  former  commander  of  the  Witu 
army.  The  leading  natives  on  the  coast  are  eager  for 
European  help,  and  will  make  sacrifices  to  secure  it. 
The  loyal  assistance  given  by  the  Lewali  of  Melindi  is 
an  instance  of  the  native  readiness  to  co-operate  with 
the  British  administrators.  But  to  secure  the  continued 
help  of  the  natives  they  must  be  fairly  treated.  They 
will  not  help  if  their  religion  is  to  be  officially  attacked, 
if  their  sentiments  are  to  be  outraged  by  proposals  to 
declare  polygamy  illegal  and  all  children  of  concubines 
illegitimate,  and  if  their  trade  is  to  be  harassed  by 
finicking  regulations. 

In  many  provinces  of  British  East  Africa  there  were 
chiefs  ready  to  support  us  with  their  power  and  influence 
in  the  management  of  the  country.  Kabarega  in 
Unyoro,  Gabriel  in  Uganda,  and  Mbaruk  of  Gazi  may 
be  quoted  as  examples  of  natives  who  were  willing 
to  help  us.  But  what  encouragement  did  they  meet  ? 
Kabarega  is  a  political  prisoner  in  Somali-land,  practi- 
cally because  he  helped  his  people  to  resist  being  placed 
in  bondage  to  their  hereditary  foes,  Gabriel  is  an  outlaw. 
Mbaruk  of  Gazi,  in  spite  of  loyal  service  to  the  British 
and  a  consuming  anxiety  for  peace,  has  been  driven  into 
rebellion  and  chased  with  his  people  into  German  terri- 
tory ;  his  alternative  was  the  dishonourable  surrender  of 


266  BRITISH   EAST   AFRICA 

a  kinsman,  whose  sin  was  resistance  to  an   admittedly- 
unjust  decree. 

When  the' British  Government  began  the  administra- 
tion of  British  East  Africa,  in  1895,  the  greatest  need  of 
the  country  was  peace.  The  protection  of  the  weaker 
tribes  against  the  tyranny  of  the  strong  was  the 
most  immediate  necessity.  Peace  has  been  secured 
by  a  series  of  sanguinary  wars,  but  it  seems  to  have 
been  at  length  obtained.  The  Pokomo  are  now  secure 
from  Somali  and  Suahili  raids  ;  the  Wakamba  can  till 
the  plains  and  valleys  around  their  hills  ;  the  Masai  are 
being  trained  as  police  to  protect  the  people  they  once 
pillaged.     We  have  done  our  first  duty  : — 

"  Make  ye  sure  to  each  his  own, 
That  he  reap  where  he  hath  sown. 
By  the  peace  among  your  peoples  let  men  know  ye  serve  the  Lord." 

We  have  now  to  apply  the  second  of  the  two  prin- 
ciples to  which  our  Empire  owes  its  success.  Sir  Alfred 
Milner,  in  his  England  in  Egypt,  remarks  that  "  the 
true  nature  of  British  influence  is  a  weight,  and  a  de- 
cisive weight,  cast  into  the  right  scale,  in  the  struggle 
of  the  better  elements  of  Egyptian  society  against  the 
worse."  It  should  be  the  aim  of  British  policy  that  this 
definition  could  be  truly  applied  to  our  influence 
throughout  our  African  territories.  Kabarega,  king  of 
Unyoro ;  Mbaruk,  the  chief  of  Gazi ;  Selim  Bey,  the 
defender    of    the    Equatorial    Provinces    against     the 


THE  FUTURE  OF  BRITISH  EAST  AFRICA     267 

Mahdists,  are  representatives  of  the  best  and  most 
intelligent  classes  in  the  East  African  population.  But 
the  fate  of  these  men  shows  that  we  have  not  yet  learnt 
how  to  make  the  best  use  of  the  better  element  in  East 
African  society.  Pulteney's  pacification  of  Southern 
Unyoro,  Lugard's  defence  of  Uganda,  Ainsworth's 
management  in  Ukambani,  and  the  invaluable  assistance 
rendered  to  the  British  East  Africa  Company  by  the 
Lewali  of  Melindi  and  Mombasa  show  what  excellent 
results  may  be  obtained  by  co-operation  with  the  native 
leaders,  if  efforts  be  made  to  educate  them  into  useful- 
ness, and  not  to  crush  them  into  impotence. 

Therefore,  the  main  requirement  for  that  successful  ad- 
ministration of  British  East  Africa  is  a  government  that 
will  curb  militarism,  raise  a  permanent  trained  staff  of 
men  whose  hearts  are  in  their  work,  scientifically  develop 
the  natural  resources  of  the  country,  and  enlist  the 
sympathetic  co-operation  of  the  better  elements  in  the 
native  population.  But  successful  administration  will 
not  alone  save  East  Africa.  It  will  give  the  country 
peace  and  security  and  prosperity ;  but  these  benefits 
will  be  half  wasted  unless  they  be  used  as  a  basis  for 
further  progress  by  a  patient  and  practical  philanthropy, 
\  and  by  a  tolerant  missionary  enterprise  working  in 
\  accordance  with  Christ's  command,  "  Into  whatsoever 
house  ye  enter,  first  say, '  Peace  be  to  this  house.'  " 


MAP    OF 

IBRITISH  EAST.4FRICA 

to  accompaiiv 

The  Foundations  of  British  East  Africa!' 
b^  Prof.  J.  W.  Gregory,  D.Sc. 

Statate  Mies 


o 


30               lOO                150               200 
Siibmarinc   Cables  


QThjlip  &■  SarbjZaridcnj  icJLiverpooV- 


lIor<it:<-  Mersholl  &  Sou.  London 


c 


Vt0 


INDEX 


Albert  Nyanza,  13 

Discovered  by  Baker,  79 
Arab  Explorers,  45 

Baker,  Samuel,  78,  79,  104 
Bantu  Tribes,  18,  108 
Belesoni  Canal,  135 
British  East  Africa  Company,  5, 
123 

and  slavery,  131,  150 

and  Witu,  134 

and  Germany,  132 

and  the  Mazrui,  150 

and  Lugard,  175 
Burton,  Sir  Richard,  53 

and  Nile  Sources,  72 

Catholic  Missionaries,  119,  250 
Colvile,  Gen.  Sir  Henry,  212 
Congo  Free  State,  125 
Cooley's  Criticisms,  67 

Denhardt,  45 

Economic  Value  of  British  East 
Africa,  238 

Emin  Pasha,  169,  187 

Equatorial  Africa,Early  Explora- 
tion of,  28 

European  Expedition  into 
British  East  Africa,  The 
First,  59 


Fischer's,  Dr.  G.  A.,  Expedition, 

82 
Foreign  Office  Rule,  246,  260 
French,  The,  in  East  Africa,  221 
Frere,  Sir  Bartle,  69 

Galla,  The,  22 

Geography  of  BritishEastAfrica, 

3,  27 
German  Aggression,  137 

Treaty  with  Uganda,  172 
Germany  and  Zanzibar,  126 

and  Witu,  134 
Grant,  74 

Hannington,  Bishop,  121 
Hardinge,  Sir  A.,  149,  151,  244 

Kalema,  King  of  Uganda,  163, 

168 
Kapti  Plains,  10 
Karagwe,  People  of,  75 
Kavirondo,  The  natives  of,  21 
Kikuya  Country,  90 
Kilima  Njaro,  60 
Kirk,  Sir  John,  128 
Krapf,  Dr.  Ludwig,  53 

and  the  Galla,  55 

at  Mombasa,  55 

translations  into  Suahili,  56 

and  Rebmann,  56,  70 

and  Inland  Missions,  59 


269 


270 


INDEX 


Krapf,  Dr.  Ludwig,  continued. 
and  the  Wa-Kamba,  6i 
and  Methodist  Mission,  65 
criticism  of,  68 

Livingstone,  67,  74 
and  Stanley,  106 

Lothaire,  Major,  167 

Lugard,  Gen.  F.  D.,  173,  174 
first  visit  to  Uganda,  177 
joins     British     East     Africa 

Company,  175 
and  religious  disputes,  181, 191 
and  Selim  Bey,  184,  210 
war  in  Uganda,  194 

Mackay,  A.  M.,  118,  169 
Mackenzie,  George  S.,  130,  147, 

244 
Masai,  The,  20,  82 
and  Thomson,  86 
and  Carl  Peters,  140 
Mazrui,  The,  144 

Cause  of  Rebellion,  149 
Commencement  of,  152 
end  and  result  of,  161 
Mbaruk  of  Gazi,  146,  150,  152, 

156,  265 
Missions,  18,  48,  53,  65,  104,  1 14, 
125,   148,   162,   169,    170, 
179,  248 
Mombasa,  145,  241 
Mtesa,  King  of  Uganda,  'j'j.,  1 10 
and  Christianity,  114,  120 
Death  of,  121 
Mvi^anga,  King  of  Uganda,  121, 
162,  164,  168,  194,  219 


Natives  of  British  East  Africa,  17 
New,  Charles,  66 

and  Mbaruk,  146 

Ascent  of  Kilima  Njaro,  67 
Nile,  The  Sources  of  the,  31,  71, 
78,  80,  125 

Pearson, Col,  Expedition  against 

Mbaruk,  160 
"  Periplus  of  the  Red  Sea,  The," 

49 
Peters,  Dr.  Carl,  138,  171 
Physical  Geography  of  British 

East  Africa,  6 
Portal,  Sir  Gerald,  200 
Portuguese  and  East  Africa,  43 
Ptolemy's  account  of  the  Coast 

of  East  Africa,  33 
Pulteney,  Major,  216 
Pygmies,  23 

Rebmann,  56 
and  Inland  Missions,  59 
return  home,  69 
Rift  Valley,  11,  84,  93 

Sanson  d' Abbeville's  Map,  48 
Selim  Bey,  186,  206 
Shimba  Expedition,  159 
Slavery,  105,  131,  149,  175,  257 

and  Lugard,  175 
Soudanese  Mutiny,  226 
Speke,  John  Hanning,  72 

Discovery  of  Victoria  Nyanza, 

Second  Expedition  with  Grant, 

74 
and  the  Karagwe  People,  75 


INDEX 


271 


Speke,  John  Hanmng,  conimued. 

journey  to  Uganda,  77 

and  Mtesa,  1 1 1 
Stanley,  H.  M.,  106 

and  the  slave  trade,  107 

and  Uganda,  109 

and  Mtesa,  112 

translation  of  Scriptures,  115 

first  journey  across  Africa,  124 

Congo  Free  State,  125 
Stokes,  164 

and  Mwanga,  167 

and  Lugard,  180 
Suahili,  The,  19,  157 
Szek's,  Teleki  von.  Expedition,  89 

and  the  Kikuya,  91 

and  Lake  Samburu,  94 

Takaunga  Dispute,  150 
Thomson's,  Joseph,  Expedition, 

84 
Thruston,  247 
Tucker,  Bishop,  179 

Uganda,  12 
visited  by  Speke  and  Grant,  77 
German  Road  to,  81 
Arab  Traders'  route,  81 
Stanley's  visit  to,  109 
Government  under  Mtesa,  113 
as  amission  field,  116 
Catholic  missionaries,  119 
and  Mwanga,  121 
and  Carl  Peters,  138,  171 
Rebellion    of  Christians  and 

Mohammedans,  163 
and  Kiwevva,  163 
Treaty  with  Germany,  172 


Uganda,  continued. 

under  British  protection,  173 
and  British  East  Africa  Com- 
pany, 173 
entered  by  Lugard,  177 
religious  difficulties,  181 
Sir  William  Mackinnon,  189 
War  breaks  out,  194 
and  Foreign  Office,  199 
Sir    Gerald    Portal's   Report, 

200 
Lord  Rosebery  and,  200 
Sir  J.  R.  L.  Macdonald,  205 
Arrest  of  Selim  Bey,  207 
Revolt  in  Western,  221 
and  the  French,  221 
"  Pearl  of  Africa,"  239 
Railway,  239 

Unyoro  Campaign,  213 

Van  Hohnel,  89 

Vasco  da  Gama's  Expedition,  38 
Victoria  Nyanza,  discovery  of,  73 
Thomson's  Expedition,  88 
explored  by  Stanley,  107 

Waganda,  The,  19 
Wahuma,  The,  in  Uganda,  109 
Wakefield,  66 
Williams,  Capt.,  189 
Wissmann,  Lieut.,  138 
Witu,  133 

Massacre  of  German  Traders 
in,  141 

Rebellion,  142 

Zanzibar  and  Germany,  127 
and  British  East  Africa  Com- 
pany, 129 


Butler  &  Tanner,  The  Selwood  Printing  Works,  Frome,  and  London. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 

This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


^e 


REC'D  LP-tlB 

IIQ  1  4  1971 


?) 


it). 


I^J,EC101 


m 


m9 


1970 


D)      FEB  3  - 
URL 

IWO  WEEKS  FROMJ)ATi: 
MON-RENEWABLE 


i9;t} 


at 


^^ 


1^  NOV3  0  19?Q 


OF  RECi«|  uf      », 


25^91^ 


MftY     g  1973 


REC'D  LD-URt 

.  JIJN 1 8 1973 
MAY  1  4  1973 


NOV  ii  8 19H7 


Form  L9-Series4939 


DT    423.       G86F 


"fl'"f]r'fri 


AA    001006  967